The Breon Mitchell Collection of Bi–lingual Dictionaries, 1559–1998

Consists of a collection formed by Professor Breon Mitchell of first and early editions of bi–lingual dictionaries of languages throughout the world, including the languages of Africa, the Americas, Asia, and the Pacific Rim.


The collection is housed at the Auxiliary Library Facility (ALF). To request these materials for use, note the appropriate box number and follow the "Request ALF Item" link in IUCAT (direct link to record). For further information, see IUCAT search tips. Additional books from this collection are being individually cataloged, and are included in Indiana University Library's online catalog (IUCAT).


Collection of Bi-lingual Dictionaries of Rare and Unusual Languages (arranged by language):


[ABAZA] Russko-abazinskii slovar: okolo 30 000 slov: s prilozheniem kratkogo grammaticheskogo ocherka abazinskogo iazyka, by Kh. D. Zhirov and N. B. Ekba. Moscow: Gos. izd-vo inostrannykh i natsionalnykh slovarei, 1956. [BOX 48]


[ABIPON] Lengua Abipona, by Elena Lidia Najlis. Two volumes. Buenos Aires: Universidad de Buenos Aires, Centro de Estudios Linguisticos, 1966. [BOX 14]


[ABNAKI-PENOBSCOT] Remarks on the language of the St. John's, or Wlastukweek Indians with a Penobscot vocabulary, [by Horatio Hale]. Boston: [s.n.], 1834. [BOX 57]

The Abenaki Indians: their treaties of 1713 & 1717, and a vocabulary ; with a historical introduction, by Frederic Kidder [1804-1885]. Portland: Printed by Brown Thurston, 1859. Michael Brown. [BOX 31]

New familiar Abenakis & English Dialogues. The first ever published on the grammatical system, by Jos[eph] Laurent. Quebec: Leger Brousseau, 1884. Additional title page: New familiar Abenakis and English dialogues. The first vocabulary ever published in the Abenakis language, comprising: the Abenakis alphabet, the key to the pronunciation and many grammatical explanations, also synoptical illustrations showing the numerous modifications of the Abenakis verb, &c., to which is added the etymology of Indian names of certain localities, rivers, lakes, &c. &c. Original edition. [BOX 18]


[ABORIGINAL LANGUAGES OF AUSTRALIA: see AUSTRALIAN ABORIGINAL LANGUAGES; KAURNA; SOUTH AUSTRALIAN ABORIGINAL LANGUAGES]


[ABUAN] A Comparative Vocabulary of Abuan Dialects, by Hans Wolff. Evanston, IL: Northwestern University Press, 1969. [BOX 59]

Abuan-English. English-Abuan Dictionary, compiled by Ian Gardner. University of Port Harcourt, 1980. [BOX 20]


[ACEH] Woordenboek der Atjehsche taal,, by K[arel] F[rederik] H[endrik] van Langen [1848-1915]. 's Gravenhage: Martinus Nijhoff, 1889. [BOX 27]

Atjehsche tolk. Lijst der meest voorkomende woorden en enkele samenspraken, by L[ouis] C[onstant] Westenenk. 's-Gravenhage: Martinus Nijhoff, 1903. [BOX 13]

Malay, Achinese, French, and English vocabulary : alphabetically arranged under each of the four languages, with a concise Malay grammar, by A. J. W. Bikkers. London: Crosby Lockwood and Son, n.d. [1905]. First edition, second issue. [BOX 28]

Atjehsch handwoordenboek (Atjehsch-Nederlandsch), by J Kreemer. Leiden: E. J. Brill, 1931. [BOX 24]


[ACHOLI] A Study of the Acoóli Language: Grammar and Vocabulary, by J.P. Crazzolara. London: Oxford University Press, 1955. Second impression revised. [BOX 17]

A Short Acoli-English and English-Acoli Vocabulary, by G.A.R. Savage. Nairobi; Kampala; Dar-es-Salaam: The Eagle Press, 1955. [BOX 57]

English-Lwoo Dictionary, by Alfred Malandra. Bologna: Editrice Nigrizia, 1957. [BOX 64]


[ACHUMAWI] Achumawi Dictionary, by D. L. Olmsted. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1966. [BOX 36]


[ACOÓLI: see ACHOLI]


[ADANGME: see DANGME and GA]


[ADELAIDE: see SOUTH AUSTRALIAN ABORIGINAL LANGUAGES]


[ADIWASI ORIYA: see ORIYA, ADIVASI]


[AFGHANISTANI LANGUAGES AND DIALECTS] [In Persian script] Da Afghanistan da zino zhibo aw lahjo qamus, by Abdullah Badakhshi. Cover title: A Dictionary of some Languages and Dialects of Afghanistan. Kabul: Pashto Tolana, 1960. [BOX 21]


[AFRICAN LANGUAGES AND DIALECTS: POLYGLOT] A voyage to Abyssinia, and travels into the interior of that country, executed under the orders of the British government, in the years 1809 and 1810; in which are included, an account of the Portuguese settlements on the east coast of Africa, visited in the course of the voyage; a concise narrative of late events in Arabia Felix; and some particulars respecting the aboriginal African tribes, extending from Mosambique to the borders of Egypt; together with vocabularies of their respective languages, by Henry Salt [1780-1827]. London: F. C. and J. Rivington, 1814.

Specimens of dialects: short vocabularies of languagues: and notes of countries and customs in Africa, by John Clarke. Berwick-upon-Tweed: Printed by Daniel Cameron, 1848.

Sammlung und Bearbeitung Central-Afrikanischer Vokabularien. Collection of Vocabularies of Central African Languages, by Heinrich Barth [1821-1865]. Gotha: Justus Perthes, 1862-1866. [BOX 16]

Pallas und andere afrikanische Vokabularien vor dem 19. Jahrhundert: ein Beitrag zur Forschungsgeschichte, by Istvan Fodor. Hamburg: Helmut Buske, 1975. [BOX 24]

A Handbook of African Names, by Ihechukwu Madubuike. Washington, D.C.: Three Continents Press, 1976. [BOX 24]

South African multi-language dictionary and phrase book: English, Afrikaans, Northern Sotho, Sesotho, Tswana, Xhosa, and Zulu. Cape Town: Reader's Digest Association South Africa, 1991. [BOX 37]


[AFRIKAANS] Patriot. Woordeboek, dictionary: Afrikaans-Engels, Cape Dutch- English. Paarl: D.F. Du Toit, 1902 1904. Two parts in one volume. [BOX 49]

Praktisches Lehrbuch der Kapholl¨a;ndischen Sprache (Burensprache).| Sprachlehre, Gespr¨a;che, Lesestücke und Wörterbuch, by N[icolaas] Marais-Hoogenhout. Vienna: A. Hartleben's Verlag, [ca. 1904]. [BOX 55]

Zuid Afrikaans Woordeboekje Hollands-Engels en Engels-Hollands in vereenvoudige Spelling en ok vele Kaapse woorden bevattende. Derde verbeterde druk, with separate title page: South Afrcan Pocket-Dictionary. Dutch-English and English-Dutch in simplified spelling and containing many Cape Dutch words. Third revised edition. Amsterdam, Pretoria and Johannesburg; Kaapstad: J. H. de Bussy: H.A.U.M. V/H, J. Dusseau & Co., 1916. [BOX 17]

Juta se Sakwoordeboek. Pocket Dictionary. Afrikanns-Engels English-Afrikaans (according to the latest spelling of the S.A. Akamenie). Cape Town & Johannesburg, S.A.: Juta & Co., n.d. [c. 1950]. [BOX 61]

Dictionary Coetzee Woordeboek. Afrikaans-Engles. Engles-Afrikaans; pronouncing dictionary containing over 35,000 entries; uitspraak woordeboek met oor die 35,000 inskrywings., by Abel Coetzee. Johannesburg; Glasgow: Collins, 1953. [BOX 2]

First American edition, 1966: African English - English African Dictionary, by Abel Coetzee. Brooklyn: P. Shalom Publications, 1966. [BOX 65]


[AGTA, CENTRAL CAGAYAN] A Vocabulary of Central Cagayan Negrito, by William J. & Lynette F. Oates. Manila: The Summer Institute of Linguistics affiliated with the University of North Dakota in cooperation with The Bureau of Public Schools and The Institute of National Language of The Department of Education, 1955. [BOX 15]


Ahtna Athabaskan Dictionary, compiled and edited by James Kari. Fairbanks, Alaska: University of Alaska, Fairbanks, 1990. [BOX 76]


[AHTNA ATHABASKAN: see AHTENA]


[AJIE] Vocabulaire et grammaire de la langue Houaïlou, by Maurice Leenhardt. Paris: Institut d'Ethnologie, 1935.


[AKA-BEA: see ANDAMANESE LANGUAGES: POLYGLOT]


[AKA-KOL: see ANDAMANESE LANGUAGES: POLYGLOT]


[AKAN] Second edition, revised and enlarged (1933): Dictionary of the Asante and Fante Language called Tshi (Twi), by Rev. J. G. Christaller. Basel: Evangelical Missionary Society, 1933. [BOX 70]

Mfantse Nkasafua Nkyerekyerease / Fante-English Dictionary, by Ngyiresi Kasa Mu. Cape Coast: Methodist Book Depot, n.d. [c. 1940]. [BOX 61]

English-Twi-Ga Dictionary, by C. A. Akrofi & G. L. Botchey. Accra: Waterville Publishing House, n.d. [c. 1950]. [BOX 62]

Bibliography and Vocabulary of the Akan (Twi-Fante) Language of Ghana, by Dennis M. Warren. Bloomington, Indiana: Indiana University, 1976. [BOX 31]


[AKAR-BALE: see ANDAMANESE LANGUAGES: POLYGLOT]


[AKHA / KAW] Akha-English Dictionary, compiled by Paul Lewis. Ithaca, NY: Department of Asian Studies, Cornell University, 1968. [BOX 16]


[AKOOSE] Vokabularium der Nkosi-sprache (Kamerun), by H. Dorsch. Hamburg: Otto Meissner, 1915. [BOX 31]


[AKPAFU: see LAFANA]


[ALABAMA] Dictionary of the Alabama Language, by Cora Sylestine, Heather K. Hardy, & Timothy Montler. Austin: University of Texas Press, 1993. [BOX 21]


[ALACALUF: see KAWESQUAR]


[ALEUT] Aleutian Indian and English Dictionary. Common words in the dialects of the Aleutian Indian Language as spoken by the Oogashik, Egashik, Egegik, Anangashuk and Misremie tribes around Sulima River and neighnoring parts of the Alaska Peninsula, compiled by Charles A. Lee. Seattle, Washington: Lowman & Hanford, 1896. [BOX 65]

Binding variant (1896): Identical to issue in gray wrappers, but in pale green wrappers, with illustrative portrait of Indian woman on front wrapper. [BOX 79]

The Aleut Language: the Elements of Aleut Grammar with a Dictionary in two Parts containing Basic Vocabularies of Aleut and English, by Richard Henry Geoghegan. Washington, D.C.: US Department of the Interior, 1944. [BOX 21]

Aleutian Indian and English Dictionary, by Charles A. Lee. Seattle: The Shorey Book Store, 1965. Also a second copy: second facsimile edition, 1966, limited to 100 copies. [BOX 75]

Aleut Dictionary. Unangam Tunudgusii. An unabridged lexicon of the Aleutian, Pribilof, and Commander Islands Aleut Languages, compiled by Knut Bergsland. Fairbanks, Alaska: Alaska Native Language Center, University of Alaska Fairbanks, 1994. [BOX 4]


[ALGONQUIAN: see also BLACKFOOT; DELAWARE; MAHICAN; MENOMINI; MICMAC; OJIBWA; WAMPANOAG; WESTERN ABENAKI]

Lexique de la langue Algonquine, by J.A. Cuoq. Montreal: Chapleau et Fils, 1886. [BOX 70]

Comparative Vocabulary of Algonquin Dialects. From Heckewelder's Manuscripts in the Collections of the American Philosophical Society, Philadelphia. Cambridge: John Wilson and Son. University Press, 1887. [BOX 49]

Dictionnaire français-algonquin, by Geo[rge Joseph Guyon] Lemoine [1860- ]. Chicoutimi: G. Delisle, impr. Bureaux du journal "Le Travailleur", 1909. [BOX 55]

A Computer-Generated Dictionary of Proto-Algonquian, by John Hewson. Hull, Quebec: Canadian Museum of Civilization, 1993. [BOX 23]

[ALSEA] Alsea Texts and Myths, by Leo J. Frachtenberg. Washington, D.C.: Government Printing Office, 1920. Hardbound without d.j. [BOX 73]


[ALTAIC LANGUAGES: POLYGLOT; see also TUNGUS] Entwurf einer vergleichenden Grammatik der altaischen Sprachen: nebst einem vergleichenden Wörterbuch, by Joseph Grunzel. Leipzig: Wilhelm Friedrich, 1895. [BOX 16]


[ALUR] A Simple Alur Grammar and Alur-English-Alur Vocabularies, by Peter C. Ringe. [Kampala?]: The Eagle Press, [ca. 1948]. [BOX 61]


[AMHARIC] Dictionary of the Amharic language. In two parts. Amharic and English, and English and Amharic, by Charles William Isenberg. London: printed for The Church Missionary Society, 1841. [BOX 35]

Raccolta delle frasi più usuali tradotte dall'italino in amarico, coll'aggiunta di un piccolo dizionario. 2a edizione reveduta e corretta, by F[ederico] Piano. Rome: Voghera Carlo, 1887. [BOX 7]

Piccolo dizionario eritreo: raccolta dei vocaboli piu usuali nelle principali lingue parlate nella Colonia Eritrea. Italiano-arabo-amarico, Alessandro Allori. Milano: Ulrico Hoepli, 1895. [BOX 7]

Initia Amharica. An Introduction to Spoken Amharic. Part I Grammar. Part II. English-Amharic Vocabulary with Phrases. Part III Amharic-English Vocabulary with Phrases. Vol. I. [H-S in Amharic script](H-S), 3 vols [of 4], by C[arl] H[ubert] Armbruster [1874-1957]. Cambridge: At the University Press, 1908, 1910, 1920. [PARTS 1-3 BOX 35]

Dictionnaire amarigna-francais, suivi d'un vocabulaire français-amarigna, by J[oseph] Baeteman. Dire-Daoua, Ethiopia: Imprimèrie Saint Lazare, 1929. [BOX 37]

Vocabolario Pratico Italiano-Tigrai-Amarico, corredato d'alfabeto, frasario e nozioni grammaticali delle due lingue, by Prospero Maria da Milano. Milan: Editrice Genio, [1936]. [BOX 64]

Short Manuel (with Vocabulary) of the Amharic Language prepared for the General Staff by Major J. P. Alone (West India Regiment) 1909. Revised 1940by Lieut. D. E. Stokes. Khartoum: Printed for the Sudan Government by McCorquodale & Co. 1941. 6/12/00. [BOX 6]

Russko-amkharskii slovar: okolo 23,000 slov, by E[mmanuil] B[erovich] Gankin. Moscow: Sovetskaia entsiklopediia, 1965. [BOX 31]

Amkharsko-russkii slovar: okolo 25 000 slov, by E[mmanuil] B[erovich] Gankin. Moscow: Sov. Entsiklopediia, 1969. [BOX 48]

Concise Amharic dictionary: Amharic-English, English-Amharic, by Wolf Leslau. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1976. [BOX 12]


[AMOY] Chinese-English Dictionary of the vernacular or spoken language of Amoy, with the principal variations of the Chang-Chew and Chin-Chew dialects. New edition, with corrections by the author, by Carstairs Douglas. London: Publishing Office of the Presbyterian Church of England, 1899. [BOX 5]

Supplement to Dictionary of the vernacular or spoken language of Amoy [Rev. Carstairs Douglas, M.A., LL.D., Glasg.], by Thomas Barclay. Shanghai: The Commercial Press, Ltd., 1923. [BOX 5]

A pocket dictionary of the Amoy vernacular. English-Chinese, by Ernest Tipson. Singapore: Lithographers Limited, 1934. [BOX 13]

A Practical English-Hokkien Dictionary, by Chiang Ker Chiu. Singapore: The Chin Fen Book Store, n.d. [BOX 17]


[AMUZGO, OAXACA] Tzon 'tzíkindyi jñò tzjó Noà yo jñò tzko. Diccionario amuzgo-español el amuzgo de San Pedro Amuzgos, Oaxaca, by L. Fermín Tapia García. Mexico: CIESAS, Plaza y Valdés Editores, 1999. [BOX 12]


[ANDAMANESE LANGUAGES: POLYGLOT]

Notes on the languages of the south Andaman group of tribes, by M. V. Portman. Calcutta: Office of the superintendent of government printing, India, 1898. [BOX 28]


[ANEITYUM] A dictionary of the Aneityumese language. In two parts. I. Aneityumese and English. II. English and Aneityumese. Also outlines of Aneityumese grammar. And an introduction, containing notices of the missions to the native races, and illustrations of the principles and peculiarities of the Aneityumese language, by John Inglis. London & Edinburgh: Williams and Norgate, 1882. [BOX 67]


[ANGASS] Angass Manual - Grammar and Vocabulary, by H.D. Foulkes. London: Kegan Paul, 1915. [BOX 61]


[ANGLOROMANI] Romano lavo-lil: word-book of the Romany; or, English Gypsy language. With many pieces in gypsy, illustrative of the way of speaking and thinking of the English gypsies; with specimens of their poetry, and an account of certain gypsyries or places inhabited by them, and of various things relating to gypsy life in England, by George H[enry] Borrow. London: John Murray, Albemarle Street, (London: printed by William Clowes and Sons, Stamford Street and Charing Cross), 1874. [BOX 2]

An American-Romani vocabulary, by Albert Thomas Sinclair [1844-1911]. [New York]: The New York public library, 1915. [BOX 32]

Avesta and Romani, by Albert Thomas Sinclair [1844-1911]. [New York]: The New York public library, 1916. [BOX 32]

The dialect of the gypsies of Wales, being the older form of British Romani preserved in the speech of the clan of Abram Wood, by John Sampson (1862-1931). Oxford: The Clarendon Press, 1926. [BOX 7]

"An East Anglian Romani Vocabulary of 1798," ed. by John Sampson, in: Journal of the Gypsy Lore Society, Third Series, Volume IX, Part 3, 1930. [BOX 53]


[ANJAM: see PAPUA NEW GUINEA LANGUAGES]


[APACHE, WESTERN] Western Apache dictionary, compiled by the staff of the White Mountain Apache Culture Center. Fort Apache, Ariz.: White Mountain Apache Tribe, 1972. [BOX 23]

Vocabulary of the Apache or 'Indé+Language of Arizona & New Mexico, Collected by John Gregory Bourke in the 1870s and 1880s, ed. by Carol J. Condie. Greeley, Colo.: Museum of Anthropology, University of Northern Colorado, 1980. [BOX 43]

Western Apache-English dictionary : a community-generated bilingual dictionary, edited by Dorothy Bray in collaboration with the White Mountain Apache Tribe. Tempe, AZ: Bilingual Press, 1998. [BOX 23]


[A-PUCIKWAR: see ANDAMANESE LANGUAGES: POLYGLOT]


[APURINÃ] A grammar and a vocabulary of the Ipurina language, by J[acob] E[vert] R[esyek] Polak. London: Published for the Fund By Kegan Paul, Trench, Trubner, 1894. [BOX 36]


[ARABELA] Diccionario Arabela-Castellano, by Rolland G. Rich. Lima: Instituto Lingüistico de Verano, 1999. [BOX 12]


[ARABIC, CHADIAN SPOKEN] Lexique des parlers arabes tchado-soudanais. An Arabic-English-French lexicon of the dialects spoken in the Chad-Sudan area, compiled by Arlette Roth-Laly. Four vols. Paris: Éditions du Centre National de la Recherche Scientifique, 1969. [BOX 54]


[ARABIC DIALECTS: see also ARABIC, HASANIYA; EGYPTIAN ARABIC, IRAQI ARABIC, NIGERIAN ARABIC, SUDANESE ARABIC, TUNISIAN ARABIC] Vocabulaire Français-Arabe des dialects vulgaires africains; d'Alger, de Tuni, de Marok et d'Égypte, by J.J. Marcel. Paris: Charles Hingray, 1837. [BOX 68]


[ARABIC, HASSANIYA] "Vocabulaire technique de Chameau en Mauritanie (Dialecte Hassanya)," by Capt. [Claude] Le Borgne. Extract from Bulletin de l'Institut Français d'Afrique Noire, Dakar, IFAN, vol. 15, 1953. [BOX 29]


[ARABIC, SUDANESE SPOKEN]

Sudan Arabic; English-Arabic vocabulary. Author(s): Hillelson, Sigmar. ; Amery, Harold Francois S. Publication: London, Sudan government, Year: 1925 Description: xxvii, [1], 341 p. p. Language: English Note(s): Based on English-Arabic vocabulary, by H. F. S. Amery. OCLC lists 4 copies in US (San Francisco Public, Princeton, Harvard, NYPL). With bookplate of E. H. Paxton, Herford College, Oxford. Hendrix 239 (listing second edition of 1930). [BOX 71]

Sudan Arabic Note-book, by G.S.M. Burton. With a Foreword by Earl Kitchener. London: McCorquodale and Co., 1934. [BOX 64]


[ARAPAHO] Arapaho dialects, by A[lfred] L[ouis] Kroeber [1876-1960]. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1916. [BOX 39]


[ARAUCANIAN: see MAPUDUNGUN]


[ARAWAK] Nachricht von Suriname und seinen Einwohnern, sonderlich den Arawacken, Warauen und Karaiben, von den nüzlichsten Gew¨a;chsen und Thieren des Landes, des Gesch¨a;ften der dortigen Missionarien der Bruderunit¨a;t und der Sprache der Arawacken. Nebst einer Charte und zwey Kupfern, [by Christlieb Quandt, b. 1740]. Görlitz: Gedruckt bey J. G. Burghart, zu finden bey dem Verfasser [etc.], 1807 [BOX 10]

Bush master: into the jungles of Dutch Guiana, by Nicol Smith. Indianapolis, New York: The Bobbs-Merrill Company, 1941. [BOX 28]


[ASANTE: see AKAN]


[ASMAT] The Flamingo Bay Dialect of the Asmat Language, by C. L. Voorhoeve. 's-Gravenhage: H. L. Smits, 1965. [Box 8]


[ASSAMESE] Anglo Assamese Dictionary, by Dutta Baruah. Nalbari, Assam: Dutta Baruah, 1952. Second edition. [BOX 6]


[ATAKAPA: see also TUNICA] A Dictionary of the Atakapa Language, accompanied by Text Material, by Albert S. Gatschet & John R. Swanton. Washington, D.C.: US Government Printing Office, 1932. [BOX 65]


[ATESO: see TESO]


[ATHAPASKAN LANGUAGUES] Der Athapaskische Sprachstamm, ed. by Joh[ann] Carl Buschmann. Berlin: F. Dummler, 1856. [BOX 2]


[ATSUGEWI] A Lexicon of Atsugewi, by D[avid] L[ockwood] Olmsted. S.l.: Survey of California and Other Indian Languages, 1984. [BOX 17]


[ATTACAPA: see ATAKAPA]


[ATAYAL: see also AUSTRONESIAN LANGUAGES: POLYGLOT] Atayal-English Dictionary, by Soren Egerod. 2 vols. London: Curzon Press, 1980. [BOX 27]


[AUSTRALIAN ABORIGINAL LANGUAGES] "Description of the Natives of King George's Sound (Swan River Colony) and Adjoining Country," written by Mr. Scott Nind, and communicated by R. Brown, Esq., F.R.S. Read 14 February, 1831. From: Papers Read before the Royal Geographical Society, Paper III, pp. 21-51. [BOX 23]

Second printing (1856): Language of the aborigines of the Colony of Victoria and other Australian districts: with parallel translations and familiar specimens in dialogue, as a guide to aboriginal protectors and others engaged in ameliorating their condition, by Daniel Bunce. Melbourne: Slater, Williams and Hodgson, 1856. [BOX 71]

"Second edition" (1859): Language of the aborigines of the Colony of Victoria and other Australian districts: with parallel translations and familiar specimens in dialogue, as a guide to aboriginal protectors and others engaged in ameliorating their condition, by Daniel Bunce. Geelong: Thomas Brown, 1859. [BOX 71]

Vocabulary of dialects spoken by aboriginal natives of Australia, Melbourne: Mastermann, printer, 1867.

The aborigines of Central Australia, with vocabularies of the dialects spoken by the natives of Lake Amadeus and of the western territory of Central Australia, by W[illiam] H[enry] Willshire. Adelaide, C. E. Bristow, Government Printer, 1891. [BOX 22]

"A Grammar and Vocabulary of the Language of the Aborigines of the MacDonnell Ranges," by Rev. H. Kempe of the Mission Station, River Finke, in: Transactions of the Royal Society of South Australia, Vol. XIV, Part I, pp. [1]-54, Adelaide: W.C. Rigby, July, 1891. 1/29/99. [BOX 23]

Australian Aboriginal Native Words and their Meanings, by Sydney J[ohn] Endacott. Melbourne: Sydney J. Endacott, 1923. [BOX 7]

The aboriginal word book, by Justine Kenyon. Melbourne: The Lothian Publishing Co. Pty. Ltd., 1930. [BOX 2]

Second edition (1951): The aboriginal word book, by Justine Kenyon. Melbourne: The Lothian Publishing Co. Pty. Ltd., 1951. [BOX 4]

Australian aboriginal place-names and their meanings, by James R[obert] Tyrrell [1875-1961]. Sydney: Simmons, limited, 1933. [BOX 24]

Australian Aboriginal Words. Aboriginal-English. English-Aboriginal, compiled by Rex Ingamells. Melbourne: Hallcraft Publishing Company, 1955. [BOX 15]

Aboriginal Words and Their Meanings, by Joah H. Sugden. Sydney: Dymock's Book Arcade. Ltd., n.d. [circa 1960's]. [BOX 7]

Aboriginal Words of Australia, [by Alexander Wyclif Reed]. Sydney; Wellington, Auckland: A. H. & A. W. Reed, 1965. [BOX 15]

Aboriginal words and place names, compiled by A[lexander] W[yclif] Reed. Adelaide: Rigby, 1977. [BOX 27]


[AUSTRONESIAN LANGUAGES: POLYGLOT] Dictionnaire de termes de droit coutumier indonesien: avec six cartes hors textes, by D[irk] van Hinloopen Labberton. The Hague: Martinus Nijhoff, 1934. [BOX 32]

Takasagozoku kanshuho goi = Dictionnaire de termes de droit coutumier des aborigenes de Formose, by Erin Asai. Tokyo: Herarudosha, L'Académie Impériale, 1941. [BOX 31]


[AVATIME: see LAFANA]


[AWABAKAL] An Australian Language, as spoken by the Awabakal, the People of Awaba or Lake Macquarie (near Newcastle, New South Wales), being an Account of their Language, Traditions, and Customs by L. E. Threlkeld: Rearranged, condenses, and edited, with an Appendix, by John Fraser. Sydney: Charles Potter, Government Printing, 1892. [BOX 71]


[AWUTU] Awutu, Larteh, Nkonya and Krachi, with glosses in English and Twi, by J. M. Stewart. Legon: Institute of African Studies, University of Ghana, 1966. [BOX 35]


[AYMARA] Materials for an Aymara Dictionary, by Thomas A. Sebeok. Offprint in original stapled wrappers from the Journal de la Société des Américanistes (Paris), new series, XL, 1951 pp. 89-151. [journal publication BOX 14] [OFFPRINT BOX 37]

Vocabulario castellano ingles aymara, Jean de Dio Yapita. Oruro, Bolivia: INDICEP Editorial, 1974. [BOX 39]

Diccionario básico del idioma aymara /Author: Gómez Bacarreza, Donato. La Paz : Instituto de Estudios Bolivianos, 1999. Original colored wrappers. [BOX 66]


[AWYU, MIARIO: see MANDOBO]


[AZERBAIJANI: see also KURDISH] ] [In Persian script] Tati va harzani, du lajih az zaban-i bastan-i Azarbayijan, by Abd al-Ali Karang. Tabriz: Bungah Bazargani va Matbuati vaizpur, 1954. [BOX 13]

English-Azerbaijan-Russian dictionary on oil field industry, Kuliev, S[aftar] M[ekhti] Kuliev [1908- ] & A[drienna] A[lekseevna] Mdivani. Baki: Azerbaijan State Publishing House of Oil and Scientific-Technical Literature, 1958. [BOX 47]

Azerbaidzhansko-russkii slovar, by Kh. A. Azizbaiov. Baku: Azerbaidzhanskoe gos. izd-vo, 1965. Added title page: Azarbaijanja-rusja lughat. [BOX 48]

Udinja-azabaijanja-rusja lughat, by Voroshil Gukasian. Baky: Elm, 1974. Additional title page in Russian: Udinsko-azerbaidzhansko-russkii slovar. [BOX 47]

Azerbaijani. English-Azerbaijani / Azerbaijani-English, by Seville Mamedov. Hippocrene Concise Dictionary. New York: Hippocrene Books, 1995. [BOX 2]


[BAAMARANI: see TACHELHIT]


[BADAGA] A Badaga-English Dictionary, by Paul Hockings & Christiane Pilot-Raichoor. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter, 1992. [BOX 62]


[BADAKHSHANI: see PERSIAN DIALECTS]


[BAGIRMI] Essai de grammaire de la langue Baguirmienne suivi de textes et de vocabulaires Bagiurmien-Français et Français-Garuirmien, by H[enri] Gaden. Paris: Ernest Leroux, 1909. [BOX 67]


[BAHAMAS CREOLE ENGLISH] Dictionary of Bahamian English, by John A. Holm, with Alison W. Shilling. Cold Spring, NY: Lexix House Publishers, 1982. [BOX 22]


[BAHNAR] Lexique français-bahnar et bahnar-français, by [Paul] Guilleminet & [Jules] Alberty. Hanoi: Imprimèrie G. Taupin, 1940. [BOX 67]

Dictionnaire bahnar-français. Tome premier. Première partie A-K. Tome deuxième. Première partie. L-U'. , 2 vols., by Paul Guilleminet & Jules Alberty. Paris: Icole française d'Extreme-Orient, 1959, 1963. [BOX 30]


[BAKA: see YULU]


[BAKAÏRÍ] Die Bakaïrí-Sprache. Wörterverzeichnis, S¨a;tze, Sagen, Grammatik. Mit Beitr¨a;gen zu einer Lautlehre der Karaïbischen Grundsprache, by Karl von den Steinen [1855- ]. Leipzig: K.F. Koehler's Antiquarium, 1892. [BOX 12]


[BAKHTIARI: see PERSIAN DIALECTS]


[BALINESE] A Balinese-English Dictionary, by C[harles] Clyde Barber. Aberdeen: University of Aberdeen, 1979. Two vols. [BOX 38]


[BALOCHI, EASTERN] English-Balochi Colloquial Dictionary, 2 vols. [Vol. I: Ab-Lo; Vol. II Lo-Zi], by George Waters Gilbertson, assisted by Gháno Khán Haddíání. Hertford: published by the author, printed by Stephen Austin & Sons, 1925. [BOX 21]

A Vocabulary of Marw Baluchi, by Josef Elfenbein. Naples: [Instituto Universitario Orientale di Napoli], 1963. [BOX 59]


[BALOCHI, WESTERN] Baluchi glossary. A Baluchi-English glossary: Elementary Level, by Mumtaz Ahmad. Keningston, Maryland: Dunwoody Press, 1985. [BOX 21]


[BALUAN-PAM: see LOU]


[BAMBARA] Dictionnaire Bambara-Français et Français-Bambara, by [Paul Marie] Molin [1885- ]. Issy-Les Moulineaux (Seine): Les Presses Missionnaires, 1955. 3/20/00. $35. McBlain Books. [BOX 10]

Lexique Français-Bambara, [by Jannick Jaffre]. [Bamako]: Éditions Imprimeries du Mali, 1980. [BOX 65]


[BANDA: see also CONGO LANGUAGES, POLYGLOT] Dictionnaire Banda-Français, by Charles Tisserant. Paris: Institut d'Ethnologie, 1931. [BOX 38]


[BANDJALANG]


[BANGALA] Suggestions for a grammar of "Bangala" (the Lingua Franca of the Upper Congo), with 2000 words and many useful phrases, by Walter H[enry] Stapleton. Yakusu, Stanley Falls, Congo Independent State: Baptist Missionary Society, [1903]. [BOX 64]

Suggestions pour Une Grammaire du "Bangala" (la "Lingua Franca" du Haut Congo) et un Vocabulaire Français-Bangala-Swahili. Avec beaucoup de Phrases dans ces trois langues. Nouvelle Édition, by Walter H. Stapleton, trans. and enlarged by W. Millman. Yakusu, Stanley Falls, Congo Independent State: Baptist Missionary Society, 1911. [BOX 64]

Second issue: Propositions pour Une Grammaire du "Bangala" (la "Lingua Franca" du Haut Congo) et un Vocabulaire Français-Bangala-Swahili. Avec beaucoup de Phrases dans ces trois langues. Nouvelle Édition, by Walter H. Stapleton, trans. and enlarged by W. Millman. Yakusu, Stanley Falls, Congo Independent State: Baptist Missionary Society, 1911. [BOX 15]

Dictionnaire bangala-francais-lingala. Bago na monoko na Bangala-Frase-Lingala, suivi d'un lexique lingala-bangala -français et d'un index français-bangala-lingala, by Atibakwa Baboya Edema. Paris; Saint-Maur (France): Sepia; ACCT, 1994. [BOX 12]


[BANGI] Grammar and Dictionary of the Bobangi Language as Spoken over a Part of the Upper Congo, West Central Africa, compiled and prepared for the Baptist Missionary Society's Mission in the Congo Independent State, by John Whitehead. London: Baptist Missionary Society and Kegan Paul, Trench, Trübner & Co., 1899. [BOX 2]

Bobangi in twenty-one Lessons With Exercises & Key, by A[ndrew] G[ilbert] W[auchope] MacBeath. Bolobo: Baptist Missionary Society, 1940. [BOX 57]

Grammar and Dictionary of the Bobangi Language as Spoken over a Part of the Upper Congo, West Central Africa, compiled by John Whitehead. Ridgewood, NJ: Gregg Press, 1964. [BOX 61]


[BANJALANG] Gidabal Grammar and Dictionary, by Brian and Helen Geytenbeek. Canberra: Australian Institute of Aboriginal Studies, 1971. [BOX 8]

Dictionary of Western Bundjalung, including Gidhabal and Tabulam Bundjalung, edited by Margaret Sharpe. Armidale: Margaret Sharpe, Linguistics Department, University of New England, 1995. [BOX 7]

Dictionary of Yugambeh (including neighbouring dialects), by Margaret C. Sharpe. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics, 1998. [BOX 31]


[BANTU LANGUAGES: POLYGLOT; see also EKOID BANTU] Polyglotta Africana orientalis or, a comparative collection of two hundred and fifty words and sentences in forty-eight languages and dialects spoken south of the Equator and additional words in nineteen languages, by J[ospeh] T[homas] Last. London: Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge, 1885. [BOX 5]

"Bantu Notes and Vocabularies," ed. by Heli Chatelain. Nos. II & III (of three). In Journal of the American Geographical Society of New York, vol. 26 (1894), pp. 208-240, 51-67. [BOX 11]

Comparative Bantu: An Introduction to the Comparative Linguistics and Prehistory of the Bantu Languages, 4 vols., by Malcolm Guthrie. Farnborough: Gregg Press, 1967-1971. [BOX 41]


[BARBADOS CREOLE ENGLISH] Notes for a glossary of words and phrases of Barbadian dialect, by Frank A. Collymore. Bridgetown, Barbados: Advocate Co. Ltd., 1955. [BOX 3]


[BAREE: see PAMONA]


[BARUYA] A Baruya-Tok Pisin-English Dictionary, by J.A. Lloyd. Canberra: The Australian National University, 1992. [BOX 39]


[BARTANG: see SHUGHNI]


[BASHKIR (BASQUORT)] Russko-bashkirskii slovar, by G[aliia] R[akhmanovna] Karimova. Moscow: Gos. izd-vo inostrannykh i natsionalnykh slovarei, 1954. [BOX 48]


[BASAA] Die Sprache der Basa in Kamerun: Grammatik und Wörterbuch, by Georg Schürle. Hamburg: L. Friederichsen & Col., 1911. [BOX 66]


[BATAK] Field Vocabulary of The Batak of Palawan (Philippines), by Charles P. Warren. Lisse, The Netherlands: The Peter de Ridder Press, 1975. [BOX 8]


[BATAK ANGKOLA] Angkola- en Mandailing-Bataksch-Nederlandsch Woordenboek, by H. J. Eggink. Bandoeng: A.C. Nix, 1936. [BOX 78]


[BATAK KARO] Besuch bei den kannibalen Sumatras. Erste Durchquerung der unabh¨a;ngigen Batak-Lande, by Joachim [Maria Heinrich] Freiherr von Brenner [von Felsach] [1859- ? ]. Würzburg: Leo Woerl, 1894. [BOX 32]

Karo-Bataksch woordenboek, by M. Joustra. Leiden: E. J. Brill, 1907. [BOX 16]


[BATAK MANDAILING: see BATAK ANGKOLA]


[BATAK TOBA: see also BATAK KARO] Bataksch-Nederduitsch woordenboek. In dienst en op kosten van het Nederlandsche bijbelgenootschap vervaardigd, by H[ermanus] N[eubronner] van der Tuuk [1825-1894]. Amsterdam: Frederik Muller, 1861. [BOX 30]

Toba-Bataks-Nederlands Woordenboek, [translated from the original German of] J[ohannes] [Gustav] Warneck. S.l.: "Pro Manuscripto", 1947. [BOX 22]


[BAYA: see GBAYA]


[BÊ: see LINGAO]


[BEDAWI] Tentative Grammar of the Beidawi Language Spoken by the Tribes of the North-Eastern Soudan with Short Vocabulary and Sentences, by Major-General F.T. Haig. London and Bungay: Richard Clay & Sons, 1895. [BOX 65]

Wörterbuch der Bedauye-Sprache, by Leo Reinisch [1832-1919]. Vienna: Alfred Hölder, 1895. [BOX 36]

Tu Bedawie: An Elementary Handbook for the Use of Sudan Government Officials, [by E.M. Roper]. Hertford, Herts. England: Stephen Austin & Sons, n.d. [c. 1928]. [BOX 65]


[BELIZE CREOLE ENGLISH] Manuscript of the Belizean Lingo, by George McKesey. Belize: National Printers, Ltd., n.d. [1974]. [BOX 55]

Bileez Kriol glassary an spellin gide. Belize Kriol glossary and spelling guide, by The Belize Creole Project Committee. Belize City, Belize: The Project, 1997. [BOX 24]


[BELLA COOLA LANGUAGE: see NUXALK]


[BEMBA: see also BANTU LANGUAGES]

Bemba Pocket Dictionary, compiled by E. Hoch. Abercorn: n.d. [c. 1950]. [BOX 61]

A Vocabulary of Icibemba, compiled by Malcolm Guthrie, edited by Michael Mann. London: School of Oriental and African Studies, University of London, 1995. [BOX 74]


[BENG] Beng-English dictionary, Alma Gottlieb & M. Lynne Murphy. Bloomington, IN: Distributed by Indiana University Linguistics Club Publications, 1995. [BOX 14]


[BENGALI] The Indian vocabulary. To which is prefixed the forms of impeachments, [by Weeden Butler (1742-1823)]. London: John Stockdale, 1788.

A dictionary of the Bengalee language in which the words are traced to their origin and their various meanings given, Vol. I. Second edition., with corrections and additions; Vol. II-Part [I]-II, by William Carey [1761-1834]. Serampore: printed at the Mission-Press, 1818, 1825. [BOX 1]

[Bengali script] Or a Dictionary of the Bengali Language with Bengali Synonyms and an English Interpretation, compiled from native and other authorities, by William Morton. [Bombay?]: Bishop's College, printed by H. Townsend, 1828. [BOX 27]

A Companion to Johnson's Dictionary in English and Bengalee, to which is prefixed an introduction to the Bengalee language, adapted for the use of both Native and European students. Vol. II, by John Mendies.. Serampore: The Serampore Press, 1828. [BOX 32]

Abridgment of Johnson's Dictionary, English and Bengali. Peculiarly calculated for the use of European and native students. The Second, Improved edition. To Which are subjoined abbreviations commonly used in writing and printing; and a short list of French and Latin words and phrases in common use among English authors, by John Mendies. Calcutta: Printed for the compiler by J. Thomas, at The Baptist Mission Press, 1851. [BOX 6]

Bengalsko-russkii slovar. 38000 slov, by E[vgeniia] M[ikhailovna] Bykova et al. Moscow: Gos. izd-vo inostrannykh i natsionalnykh slovarei, 1957. [BOX 47]

Karmannyi russko-bengalskii slovar. 7500 slov, by D[zhek] Litton. Moscow: Gos. izd-vo inostrannykh i natsionalnykh slovarei, 1959. [BOX 47]

Karmannyi bengalsko-russkii slovar. 8000 slov, by D[zhek] Litton. Moscow:

Gos. izd-vo inostrannykh i natsionalnykh slovarei, 1960. [BOX 47]

A Short Bengali-English English-Bengali Dictionary, by Jack A. Dabbs. [College Station, Texas]: A. & M. College of Texas, 1962. Original blue wrappers, lettered in black. 174 pp. First edition. [BOX 8]

Samsad Bengali-English Dictionary, compiled by Sailendra Biswas, revised by Subodhchandra Sengupta. Calcutta: Sahitya Samsad, 1968. Original red cloth over boards, lettered in red on black stamped labels. 1278 pp. (numbered in Bengali). First edition thus. Preliminary material in Bengali. With bookplate and signature of Aditi Nath Sarkar. [BOX 55]

Wörterbuch Deutsch-Bengali, by Nabinananda Ghose. Calcutta: Jagadananda Ghose, 1994. [BOX 34]


[BENUE-CONGO LANGUAGES] Benue-Congo Comparative Wordlist[Vol. 1], ed. by Kay Williamson & Kioyshi Shimizu. : Ibadan, Nigeria: University of Ibadan, West African linguistic society, 1968. Vol. 1 only. [BOX 38]


[BEOTHUK] [cover title] Beothuk Vocabularies: a Comparative Study, by John Hewson. St. John's, Newfoundland: Newfoundland Museum, 1978. [BOX 16]


[BERBER LANGUAGES: see also RIF, TACHELHIT, TAMAHAQ, HOGGAR, and TAMAZIGHT, CENTRAL; ZENAGA] Grammaire et dictionnaire abrégés de la langue berbère, [Jean-Michel] Venture de Paradis, edited by Amédée Jaubert. Paris: Société de Géographie, Imprimerie Royale, 1844. [BOX 7]


[BIAK] Noefoorsch-Hollandsch woordenboek, by J. L. van Hasselt [1839-1930]. Tweede, verbeterde en vermeerderde uitgaaf. Utrecht: Kamink & Zoon, 1893. Second, revised and enlarged edition. [BOX 10]


[BICOLANO] New Bicolano-Pilipino-English Dictionary, compiled by Julio Silverio. Manila: National Book Store, 1980. [BOX 15]


[BIDYARA] Bidyara and Gungabula: grammar and vocabulary, by J[ohn] G[avin] Breen.

Melbourne: Monash University, 1973. [BOX 31]


[BILEN] Die Bilin-Sprache, by Leo Reinisch [1832-1919]. Vol. 1: Leipzig: Th. Grieben's Verlag, 1883; Vol. 2: Vienna: Alfred Hölder, 1887. [BOX 24]


[BILOXI] A Dictionary of the Biloxi and Ofo Languages accompanied by Thirty-one Biloxi Texts and Numerous Biloxi Phrases, by James Owen Dorsey & John R. Wanton. Washington: Government Printing Office, 1912. [BOX 27]


[BIMA] Bimaneesch-Hollandsch Woordenboek, edited by J[ohann] C[hristoph] G[erhard] Jonker. Batavia; 'S Hage: Landsdrukkerij; M. Nijhoff, 1893. [BOX 71]


[BINI: see BULU]


[BISAYAN: see CEBUANO]


[BISLAMA] Beach-la-mar: the jargon or trade speech of the western Pacific, by William Churchill [1859-1920]. [Washington, D.C.]: Carnegie Institution of Washington, 1911. [BOX 31]

A Descriptive Dictionary Bislama to English, by Bill Camden. Vila, New Hebrides: Maropa Bookshop, 1977. [BOX 8]


[BISSA] La Langue Bisa: Grammaire et Dictionnaire, A[ndré] Prost. Ouagadougou, Upper Volta [Burkina Faso]: Centre IFAN [Institut Français d'Afrique Noire], [1950]. [BOX 67]


[BLACKFOOT]

An English-Blackfoot Vocabulary based on Material from the Southern Peigans. A Blackfoot-English Vocabulary based on Material from the Southern Peigans, by C.C. Uhlenbeck & R. H. Van Gulik. 2 vols. Amsterdam: Koninklijke Akademie van Wetenschappen & N.V. Noord-Hollandsche, 1930, 1934. [BOX 4]

A Blackfoot-English Vocabulary based on Material from the Southern Peigans, by C.C. Uhlenbeck & R. H. Van Gulik. New York: AMS Press, n.d. [BOX 52]

Blackfoot Dictionary of Stems, Roots, and Affixes, by Donald G. Frantz & Norma Jean Russell. Toronto: University of Toronto Press, 1989.1/31/00. $60. Tall Stories. [BOX 23]

Second, enlarged and revised, edition, 1995: Blackfoot Dictionary of Stems, Roots, and Affixes, by Donald G. Frantz & Norma Jean Russell. Toronto: University of Toronto Press, 1995. [BOX 20]


[BLANCHE BAY: see KAUANA]


[BOBANGI: see BANGI]


[BOBO MADARÉ, NORTHERN] "Phrase Book {Bobo Fing). 9 pp. original typescript, Bobo-English, thematically arranged phrases. No indication of place, author or purpose, date c. 1960's? [BOX 33]


[BOBO MADARÉ, SOUTHERN] Dictionnaire bobo-français: précédé d'une introduction grammaticale, et suivi d'un lexique français-bobo, by Pierre Le Bris. Paris: SELAF, 1981. [BOX 11]


[BODO] Boro vocabulary, with a grammatical sketch, by D N. Shankara Bhat. Poona: Deccan College Post-graduate and Research Institute, 1968. [BOX 21]

Diccionario bora-castellano, castellano-bora /Author: Thiesen, Wesley.; Thiesen, Eva. Publication: Lima, Perú : Instituto Lingüístico de Verano, 1998 [BOX 59]


[BODO PARJA] The Parji language, a Dravidian language of Bastar, by T[homas] Burrow & S[udhibhushan] Bhattacharya. Hertford [Eng.]:Printed and Published on behalf of the administrators of the Max Müller Memorial Fund by Stephen Austin and Sons, 1953. [BOX 24]


[BOLAANG MONGONDOW: see MONGONDOW]


[BOLAK] Methode et vocabulaire de la langue bleue, Bolak, langue internationale pratique, Leon Bollack [1859- ]. Paris: Éditions de la Langue Bleue, 1900. [BOX 27]


[BONDA: see BONDO]


[BONDO] A Bonda dictionary, Sudhibhushan Bhattacharya. Poona: [Deccan College Postgraduate and Research Institute], 1968. 1/25/00. NGL 100 (=$45). Smitskamp. [BOX 11]


[BONGO: see YULU]


[BONGU] Grammatik und vokabularium der Bongu-Sprache (Astrolabebai, Kaiser-Wilhelmsland), by A. Hanke. Berlin: Kommissionsverlag von Georg Reimer, 1909.


[BONTOC, CENTRAL] ] The first grammar of the language spoken by the Bontoc Igorot, with a vocabulary and texts, mythology, folklore, historical episodes, songs, by Carl Wilhelm Seidenadel. Chicago: The Open Court Publishing Company; 1909. [BOX 42]

Bontok-English Dictionary, by L[awrence] A[ndrew] Reid. Canberra: Department of Linguistics, Research School of Pacific Studies, The Australian National University, 1976. [BOX 39]


[BORANA] Boran vocabulary, by G. H. Webb. Nairobi: Literacy Centre of Kenya, 1969. [BOX 23]


[BORÔRO] Missões salesianas em Matto Grosso, [by Helvecio Gomes de Oliveira (1894-1908)]. Saõ Paulo: Escolas Profiss. Salesianas, 1908. [BOX 12]


[BOSAVI: see KALULI]


[BRAHUI] The Brahui language. Part I Introduction and Grammar. Part II. The Brahui problem. Part III. Etymological Vocabulary, 2 vols, by Denys de S. Bray. Calcutta: Superintendent Government Printing, 1909; Delhi: Manager of Publications, 1934. [BOX 21]


[BRAZILIAN PORTUGUESE DIALECTS: CAIPIRA] O dialeto caipira; gramatica, vocabulario, by Amadeu Amaral [1875?-1929]. São Paulo: Editora Anhembi, 1955. [BOX 24]


[BRIBRI] Die Sprache der Bribri-Indianer in Costa Rica, by H. Pittier De Fabrega, edited and with a foreword by Friedrich Müller. Vienna: In Commission bei Carl Gerold's Sohn, 1898. [BOX 25]


[BU: see KATUIC]


[BUDIBUD: see MUYUW]


[BUGHOTU] A Dictionary of the Language of Bugotu, Santa Isabel Island, Solomon Islands, compiled by W[illiam] G[eorge] Ivens. London: The Royal Asiatic Society, 1940. [BOX 12]


[BUGIS] Supplement op het "Boegineesche-Hollandsch woordenboek", by B. F. Matthes. 's Gravenhage: M. Nijhoff, 1889. [BOX 31]


[BUGOTU: see BUGHOTU]


[BUKUSU] Bukusu Generative Phonology and Aspects of Bantu Structure, by K[ornelis] F[rans] de Blois. Tervuren, Belgium: Musée Royal de l'Afrique Centrale, 1975. [BOX 74]


[BULU] Manuel élémentaire de langue bulu (sud Cameroun), by P[ierre] Alexandre. Paris; Centre de Hautes Études d'Administration Musulmane, 1956. [BOX 30]


[BUNGANDITY] "Language of the Bungandity Tribe, South Australia," by R. H. Mathews, in: Journal and proceedings of the Royal Society of New South Wales for 1903, Volume XXXVII. Sydney: Published by the Society, F. W. White Printer, 1904, pp. 59-74. [BOX 12]


[BURIAT, RUSSIA] Alexander Castrén's Versuch einer burj¨a;tischen Sprachlehre, nebst kurzem Wörterverzeichniss, ed. by Anton Schiefner [1817-1879]. St. Petersburg: Buchdruckerei der Kaiserlichen Akademie der Wissenschaften, 1857 [BOX 53]

Russko-buriat-mongolskii slovar: okolo 40 000 slov, by TS[ybikzhap] B[oboevich] Tsydendambaev. Moscow : Gosudarstvennoe izdatelstvo inostrannykh i natsionalnykh slovarei, 1954. [BOX 31]

Buriatsko-russkii slovar. 44 000 slov, by K. M. Cheremisov. Moscow: "Sov. entsiklopediia", 1973. [BOX 47]


[BURMESE] Judson's Burmese-English Dictionary. Revised and enlarged, by Robert C. Stevenson. Rangoon: Printed by the Superintendent, Government Printing, 1893. [BOX 22]

A Burmese-English Dictionary, compiled by J[ohn] A[lexander] Stewart & C[harles] W[illiam] Dunn. Parts I-III. [London]: [Parts I-II] Published under the auspices of the University of Rangoon [by Luzac], 1940, 1950, [Part III] School of Oriental and African Studies, 1955. [BOX 33]

Part IV (1963): A Burmese-English Dictionary. Part IV, compiled by J[ohn] A[lexander] Stewart & C[harles] W[illiam] Dunn. Revised and edited by Hla Pe, H. F. Searle & A. J. Allott. London: School of Oriental and African Studies, University of London, 1963.

Part VI (1981): A Burmese-English Dictionary. Part VI, compiled by J[ohn] A[lexander] Stewart & C[harles] W[illiam] Dunn. Revised and edited by Hla Pe, A. J. Allott & J.W.A. Okell. London: School of Oriental and African Studies, University of London, 1981. [BOX 46]

Burmese Glossary, by William S. Cornyn & John K. Musgrave. New York: American Council of Learned Societies, 1958.

Russko-birmanskii slovar. Okolo 23 000 slov, N[ikolai] N[ikolaevich] Novikov & V[iktor] P[etrovich] Kolobkov. Moscow: Sov. entsiklopediia, 1966. [BOX 49]


[BURU] Het burusch van masarete, by H. Hendriks. S-Gravenhage:: Martinus Nijoff, 1897. [BOX 27]


[BURUSHASKI] The Burushaski language: Vol. I Introduction and Grammar; Vol. II Text and Translations; Vol. III. Vocabularies and Index, by D[avid] L[ockhart] R[obertson] Lorimer [1876-1962]. Oslo; Cambridge, Mass.: H. Aschehoug; Harvard University Press, 1935 1938. 3 vols. [BOX 39]

Werchikwar English vocabulary; (with a few Werchikwar texts), by D[avid] L[ockhart] R[obertson] Lorimer [1876-1962]. [Oslo] Norwegian Universities Press, 1962. [BOX 1]


[BUSHMAN] Comparative vocabularies of Bushman languages, by D[orothea] F[rances] Bleek (d. 1948). Cambridge: The University Press, 1929. [BOX 9]

A Bushman Dictionary[including Bushman-English and English-Bushman] by Dorothea F[rances] Bleek (d. 1948). New Haven: American Oriental Society, 1956.


[BUSHOONG] Esquisse de grammaire bushong, by J[an] Vansina. Tervuren, Belgium: Musée Royale du Congo Belge, 1959. [BOX 78]


[BWANABWANA: see MUYUW]


[CAJUN: see FRENCH, CAJUN]


[CAKCHIQUEL] [Thesaurus verboru[m]]: vocabulario de la lengua cakchiquel u[el] guatemalteca: nuevamente hecho y recopilado con summo estudio, travajo y erudición, by Thomás de Cota, ed. and introduced by René Acuña. Mexico: Universidad Nacional Autónoma de México, 1983. [BOX 78]

Palabras: diccionario ilustrado castellano-kaqchikel = b Jun ka'i' taq tzij : wachb'alun Choltzij kaxlan ch'ab'al-kaqchikel. Guatemala: Universidad Rafael Landivar, Instituto de Linguistica, 1992. [BOX 2]


[CAKCHIQUEL, CENTRAL] Diccionario cakchiquel central y español, compiled by Jo Ann L. Munson. Guatemala, C.A.: Instituto Linguistico de Verano de Centroamerica, 1991. [BOX 11]


[CALÓ / PACHUCO; see also under ROMANI, VLACH] Diccionario de Calo: el lenguaje del hampa en Mexico. Segunda Edicion, by Carlos G. Chabat. Mexico, D.F.: F. Mendez Oteo, Libreria de Medicina, 1964. [BOX 7]

The Tongue of the Tirilones: A Linguistic Study of a Criminal Argot, by Luline Coltharp. University, Alabama: University of Alabama Press, 1965. [BOX 8]

Barrio Language Dictionary. First Dictionary of Caló, by Dagoberto Fuentes & José A. López. Los Angeles: Southland Press, 1974. [BOX 19]


[CAMBODIAN: see KHMER]


[CANALA: see XÂRÂCÙÙ]


[CANTONESE: see CHINESE, YUE]


[CARIB, ISLAND] Histoire naturelle et morale des iles Antilles de l'Amerique enrichie de plusieurs belles figures des raretez les plus considerables qui y sont d'ecrites : avec un vocabulaire caraibe, Charles de Rochefort [1605-1683]. A Roterdam: Chez Arnould Leers, 1658.


[CAR-NICOBARESE: see NICOBARESE]


[CAROLINIAN] Die Zentralkarolinische Sprache. Grammatik, Übungen u. Wörterbuch der Mundart der westlich von Truk liegenden Atolle, insbesondere der Saipan-Karoliner, Georg Fritz. Berlin: Georg Reimer, 1911. [BOX 52]

Carolinian-English Dictionary, compiled by Frederick H. Jackson & Jeffrey C. Marck. Honolulu: University of Hawaii Press, 1991. [BOX 59]


[CARRIER] Central Carrier bilingual dictionary, by Francesca Antoine, Catherine Bird, et al of the Carrier Dictionary Committee and Richard Walker & David B. Wilkinson of Summer Institute of Linguistics. [Fort Saint James, B.C.: Carrier Linguistic Committee], 1974. [BOX 28]


[CAYMAN ISLANDS ENGLISH: see LESSER ANTILLEAN CREOLE ENGLISH]


[CEBUANO] The Subanu; studies of a sub-Visayan mountain folk of Mindanao. Ethnographical and geographical sketch of land and people, by John Park Finley & William Churchill. Washington, D.C.: Carnegie Institution of Washington, 1913. Also a second copy in poor condition. [BOX 20]

Pocket dictionary, English-Tagalog Visayan (Cebuano-Ilongo) vocabulary, by P[ablo] Jacobo Enriquez, Jose A. Bautisa & Francis J. Jamolangue. Manila: Philippine Book Co., 1949. 5/9/00. $14. Wonder Book and Video. [BOX 12]

Visayan-English Dictionary, by Rodolfo Cabonce. [Manila?]: n.p., [1958]. [BOX 38]

A Dictionary of Cebuano Visayan, 2 vols., by John U. Wolff. Ithaca, N.Y.: Southeast Asia Program, Cornell University, 1972. [BOX 40]


[CENTRAL CAGAYAN NEGRITO: see AGTA, CENTRAL CAGAYAN]


[CENTRAL SAKAI: see SEMAI]


[CENTRAL THAI: see THAI]


[CHAD-SUDANESE ARABIC: see ARABIC, CHADIAN SPOKEN; SAR]


[CHAGA / CHAGGA] Wörterbuch der Djaga-Sprache (Madjame-Mundart) gesprochen am Kilimandjaro in Ostafrika, by Emil Müller. Hamburg: Verlag von Eckardt & Messtorff, 1947. [BOX 56]


[CHAMORRO] Chamorro-Wörterbuch, enthaltend I. Deutsch-Chamorro II. Chamorro-Deutsch nebst einer Chamorro-Gramatik und einigen Sprachübungen, by Father Callistus. Hong Kong: Typis Societatus Missionem ad Exteros, 1910. [BOX 73]

Dictionary and Grammar of the Chamorro Language of the Island of Guam, [by Edward R. von Preissig]. Washington, D.C.: Government Printing Office, 1918. [BOX 20]. A second copy,with a clear plastic protective cover and inscribed by the author. [BOX 20]

Chamorro-English; English-Chamorro dictionary, by F. "Val" C. Hong Kong: Green Pagoda Press, 1967. 10/98. Fred Goetz Books. [BOX 15]

Chamorro Word Book, by Marilyn C. Salas, ed. by Josefina Barcinas, illustrated by Roland Miranda. Honolulu: The Bess Press, 1998. [BOX 33]


[CHANTEL] Chantyal dictionary and texts, by Michael Noonan, with Ram Prasad Bhulanja, Jag Man Chhantyal & William Pagliuca. Berlin; New York: Mouton de Gruyter, 1999. [BOX 12]


[CHANTYAL: see CHANTEL]


[CHATINO, TATALTEPEC] Vocabulario chatino de Tataltepec: castellano-chatino, chatino-castellano, by Leslie & Kitty Pride. Mexico City: Instituto Linguistico de Verano, 1970. [BOX 25]


[CHECHEN] Chechensko-russkii slovar: Okolo 20000 slov, by A[khmat] G[ekhaevich] Matsiev. Moscow: Gos. izd-vo inostrannykh i natsionalnykh slovarei, 1961. [BOX 55]


[CHELHALIS, UPPER] Upper Chehalis dictionary, by M[arving] Dale Kinkade [1933- ]. Missoula, MT: Linguistics Laboratory, University of Montana, 1991. [BOX 29]


[CHEKE HOLO] Cheke Holo (Maringe/Hograno) Dictionary, by Geoffrey M[iles] White, in collaboration with Francis Kokhonigita & Hugo Pulomana. Canberra: Department of Linguistics, Research School of Pacific Studies, The Australian National University, 1988. [BOX 39]


[CHEMEHUEVI: see UTE-SOUTHERN PAIUTE]


[CHEROKEE] A dictionary of the Cherokee Indian language, by J. T. Alexander. [Sperry, Okla.?], 1971. [BOX 13]

Cherokee Words with Pictures, by Mary Ulmer Chiltoskey. Sylvan, N.C.: The Herald Publishing Company, 1972. [BOX 20]

Cherokee-English Dictionary, by Durbin Feeling, ed. by William Pulte, in collaboration with The Dictionary Committee, Agnes Cowen Coordinator. Tahlequah, Oklahoma: Cherokee Nation of Oklahoma, 1975. [BOX 6]

English Cherokee book. Unega tsaligi go-we-li, by E.L. Gilmore. Tahlequah, Okla.: E.L. Gilmore, 1986. 3/23/00. $20 including postage. hpcollectibles: e-bay. [BOX 10]

English to Cherokee. Cherokee to English Dictionary, by William Newton. [Lyerly, Georgia: Published by the author], 1999. [BOX 30]


[CHEWA: see NYANJA]


[CHEYENNE] English-Cheyenne student dictionary. Lame Deer, Montana: Northern Cheyenne Language and Culture Center Title VII ESEA Bilingual Education Program. Language Research Department, 1976. [BOX 31]


[CHIAPANECA] Diccionario de la lengua chiapaneca, by Mario Aguilar Penagos. Mexico, D.F : Gobierno del Estado de Chiapas, 1992. [BOX 23]


[CHICHEWA: see NYANJA]


[CHICHIMECA-JONAZ: see CHICHIMECA PAME, NORTHERN]


[CHICHIMECA PAME, NORTHERN, CHICHIMECA-JONAZ and PAME, CENTRAL] "Documents sur les langages pame et jonaz du Mexique central (Hidalgo, Querétaro, San Luis Potosi)," by Jacques Soustelle, in: Journal de la Société des Américanistes, Paris, Nouvelle Série, vol. XI (1951), pp. [1]-20. [BOX 14]

This issue also contains: "Une nouvelle langue tapuya de la région de Bahis (Brésil)," by A. Métraux, pp. [51]-58, with French-Katembri vocabulary, pp. 56-58.

This issue also contains: "Materials for an Aymara Dictionary," by Thomas Sebeok, pp. [89]-151. See listing of offprint under AYMARA.

This issue also contains: "Un nouveau dialecte arawak: le resigaro," by Paul Rivet and Robert de Wavrin, pp. [201]-[239], with map.


[CHICKASAW] Chickasaw. An Analytical Dictionary, by Pamela Munro & Catherine Willmond. Norman, Oklahoma: The University of Oklahoma Press, 1994. [BOX 20]


[CHIN] Essay on the language of the southern Chins and its affinities, by Bernard Houghton. Rangoon: Superintendent, Government Printing, Burma, 1892. [BOX 22]


[CHINANTECO] An Etymological Dictionary of the Chinantec Languages. Studies in Chinantec Languages 1, by Calvin R. Rensch. Arlington, Texas: The Summer Institute of Linguistics and the University of Texas at Arlington, 1989. [BOX 65]


[CHINANTECO, LEALAO] Diccionario Chinanteco de San Juan Lealao Oaxaca, by Jaime Rupp & Nadine de Rupp. Tucson, AZ: Instituto Linguistico de Verano, 1996. [BOX 25]


[CHINANTECO, PALANTLA] Diccionario Chinanteco de la diáspora del pueblo antiguo de San Pedro Tlatepuzco Oaxaca, by William R. Merrifield & Alfred E. Anderson et al. Tucson, AZ: Instituto Linguistico de Verano, 1999. [BOX 25]


[CHINESE, MIN DONG] Dictionary of the Foochow Dialect, by R. S. Maclay & C. C. Baldwin. Revised and enlarged by Samuel H. Ledger. Shanghai: Presbyterian Mission Press, 1929 ["U.S. Government Printing Office: 1945" at bottom of final page] [BOX 61]


[CHINESE PIDGIN ENGLISH] Pidgin-English Sing-Song or Songs and Stories in the China-English Dialect with a Vocabulary, by Charles G. Leland. London: Trübner & Co., 1876. [BOX 61]

A Vocabulary of Pidgin English and Words used on the China Coast, compiled by Joseph W. Graeme. Shanghai: U. S. S. Monterey, June, 1902. Nov. 2000. $250. Edward J. Lefkowicz. [BOX 31]


[CHINESE, YUE] An English-Cantonese pocket vocabulary: containing common words and phrases, printed without the Chinese characters or tonic marks, the sounds of the Chinese words being represented by an English spelling as far as practicable. Second edition, Revised and Enlarged, by J[ames] Dyer Ball [1847-1919]. Hongkong: Kelly & Walsh, 1894. [BOX 32]

The Cantonese Made Easy. Vocabulary. A small dictionary in English and Cantonese, containing words and phrases used in the spoken language, with the classifiers indicated for each noun, and definitions of the different shades of meaning, as well as notes on the different uses of some of the words where ambiguity might otherwise arise. Third edition, revised and enlarged, by J. Dyer Ball. Hong Kong: Kelly & Walsh, 1908. [BOX 15]

A pocket dictionary of Cantonese. Cantonese-English with English-Cantonese index, by Roy T. Cowles. Hong Kong: Kelly and Walsh, Ltd., 1914. [BOX 17]


[CHINOOK] A Dictionary of the Chinook Jargon, or, Trade Language of Oregon, by George Gibbs. New York: Cramoisy Press, 1863, bound together with Alphabetical Vocabulary of the Chinook Language, by George Gibbs. New York: Cramoisy Press, 1863. [BOX 15]


[CHINOOK JARGON: see CHINOOK WAWA; see also THOMPSON]


[CHINOOK WAWA: see also NEZ PERCE] Dictionary of Indian tongues, containing most of the words and terms used in the Tshimpsean, Hydah, & Chinook, with their meaning or equivalent in the English language. Victoria [B.C.]: Hibben & Carswell, 1862. [BOX 57]

A Dictionary of the Chinook Jargon, or, Trade Language of Oregon, prepared for the Smithsonian Institutionby George Gibbs. Washington: Smithsonian Institution, March, 1863. [BOX 43, BOX 49]

First edition, second issue: A Dictionary of the Chinook Jargon, or, Trade Language of Oregon, by George Gibbs. New York: Cramoisy Press, 1863. [BOX 45] Second copy. [BOX 45]

The canoe and the saddle: adventures among the north-western rivers and forests, and Isthmiana, by Theodore Winthrop [1821-1861]. Boston: Ticknor and Fields, 1863. [BOX 75]

Dictionary of the Chinook jargon or, Indian trade language of the North Pacific coast. Victoria, B.C. : T.N. Hibben & Co., [1877].

"New edition," 1883: Dictionary of the Chinook jargon or, Indian trade language of the North Pacific coast. Victoria, B.C. : T.N. Hibben & Co., 1883. [BOX 4]

Dictionary of the Chinook jargon as spoken on Puget Sound and the Northwest: with original Indian names for prominent places and localities with their meanings, historical sketch, etc., [attributed to Samuel Fuller Coombs]. Seattle, Wash.: Lowman & Hanford, [1891]. [BOX 71]

Chinook as spoken by the Indians of Washington Territory, British Columbia and Alaska. For the use of traders, tourists and others who have business intercourse with the Indians. Chinook-English. English-Chinook, by C[harles] M[ontgomery] Tate. Victoria, B.C.: M. W. Waitt & Co., [1889]. [BOX 43]

Second, revised edition, 1914: Chinook jargon as spoken by the Indians of the Pacific Coast. For the use of missionaries, traders, tourists and others who have business intercourse with the Indians, by C[harles] M[ontgomery] Tate. Victoria, B.C.: Printed by Thos.R. Cusack, 1914. [BOX 71]

The Wonders of Alaska, by Alexander Badlam. San Francisco: The Bancroft Company, 1890. 9/17/98. [BOX 37]

Dictionary of the Chinook Jargon, compiled by Frederick J. Long. Seattle: Lowman & Hanford Co., 1909. [BOX 71]

The Chinook Jargon and How to Use It. A Complete and Exhaustive Lexicon of the Oldest Trade Language of the American Continent, by Geo[rge] C[oombs] Shaw. Seattle: Rainer Printing Company, 1909. [BOX 79]

Issue in wrappers (1909): identical to the hardbound issue, but in original red wrappers, lettered and decorated in black, with the same mounted photo of a Chinook Indian on the front cover. [BOX 62]

Gill's dictionary of the Chinook jargon, with examples of use in conversation and notes upon tribes and tongues. Fifteenth Edition, compiled by John [Kaye] Gill. Portland, Or.: Published by J.K. Gill company, 1909. [BOX 71]

Seventeenth edition, 1933: Gill's dictionary of the Chinook jargon, with examples of use in conversation and notes upon tribes and tongues. Seventeenth Edition, compiled by John [Kaye] Gill. Portland, Or.: Published by J.K. Gill company, 1933. [BOX 71]

The Chinook book: a descriptive analysis of the Chinook jargon in plain words, giving instructions for pronunciation, construction, expression and proper speaking of Chinook with all the various shaded meanings of the words, by "El Comancho" W[alter] S[helley] Phillips [1867-1940]. Seattle: [R. L. Davis printing co.], 1913. [BOX 71]

Later issue by Binfords and Morts(n.d. ca. 1970): photographic reprint of text on different paper, bound in original orange-tan cloth over boards, lettered and decorated in blue; d.j. turquoise, white, tan, and black, lettered in white and black. D.j. gives "Binfords & Mort" of Portland as publishers; "Binfords & Mort" at base of spine. [BOX 71]

[cover title] A Dictionary of the Chinook Jargon, by B. J. Spalding. Pender Island, B.C.: [published by the author], 1947. [BOX 71]


[CHIN, TEDIM] Tiddim Chin. A Descriptive Analysis of Two Texts, by Eugénie J. A. Henderson. London: Oxford University Press, 1965. [BOX 18]


[CHINYANJA: see NYANJA]


[CHIPPEWA: see OBJIWA]


[CHIRIGUANO] El idioma chiriguano: gramatica, textos, vocabulario, By Wolf Dietrich. [Madrid]: Ediciones Cultura Hispanica, 1986. %/28/98. $45. Libros Latinos. [BOX 25]


[CHISWINA: see SHONA]


[CHITIMACHA: see TUNICA]


[CHOCTAW] Chahta leksikon. A Choctaw in English definition. For the Choctaw academies and schools, by AllenWright [1873-1880]. St. Louis: Printed by the Presbyterian Publishing Companry, [1880]. [BOX 57]

A Dictionary of the Choctaw Language[including Choctaw-English and English-Choctaw] by Cyrus Byington. Washington, D.C.: Washington Government Printing Office, 1915. [BOX 73]

English-Choctaw Dictionary, ed. Will T. Nelson. Oklahoma City: Oklahoma city Council of Choctaws, 1972. [BOX 73]


[CHOKOSI] A Dictionary of the Chokosi Language, compiled by Rev. A. C. Krass. University of Ghana, 1970. [BOX 35]


[CHOL, TUMBALA] Diccionario ch'ol de Tumbalá, Chiapas, con variaciones dialectales de Tila y Sanbanilla, compiled by H. Wilbur Aulie & Evelyn W. de Aulie, 1978, reedited by Emily F. Scharfe de Stairs, 1996. Second edition [revised and enlarged]. [BOX 25]


[CHONTAL OF OAXACA, HIGHLAND] Dictionary: Chontal to Spanish-English, Spanish to Chontal, by Paul [R.] Turner [1929- ] & Shirley Turner. Tucson: University of Arizona Press, 1971. [BOX 27]


[CHONTAL OF TABASCO] Diccionario chontal de Tabasco, by Kathryn C. Keller & Plácido Luciano G. Tucson, AZ:: Instituto Linguistico de Verano, 1997. [BOX 25]


[CHOPI] Dicionário Português-Chope e Chope-Português, by Luis Feliciano dos Santos. Lourenço Marques: Imprensa Nacional de Moçambique, 1950. [BOX 64]


[CHORT] Diccionario del idioma ch'orti', by Vitalino Perez Martinez et al. Antigua Guatemala: Proyecto Lingüistico Francisco Marroquin, 1996. [BOX 12]


[CHOROTE, IYO'WUJWA] Lengua chorote. Variedad no. 2. Estudio descriptivo-comparativo y vocabulario, by Ana Gerzenstein. [Buenos Aires]: Instituto de Linguistica, 1983. [BOX 67]


[CHUJ, SAN SEBASTIÁN COATÁN and SAN MATEO IXTATÁN] Diccionario del idioma chuj. Chuj-español, by Mateo Felipe Diego & Juan Gaspar Juan. Antigua Guatemala: Proyecto Linguistico Francisco Marroquin, 1998. [BOX 25]


[CHUMASH: see COSTANOAN]


[CHUTIYA: see DEORI]


[CHUUK] Trukese-English and English-Trukese Dictionary, With Notes on Pronunciation, Grammar, Vocabularies, Phrases, compiled by S[amuel] H. Elbert. [Pearl Harbor]: United States Naval Military Government, 1947. [BOX 21]

Trukese-English Dictionary. Pwpwuken Tettenin Fóós: Chuuk-Ingenes, compiledby Ward H. Goodenough & Hiroshi Sugita. Philadelphia: American Philosophical Society, 1980. [BOX 59]

Trukese-English Dictionary. Pwpwuken Tettenin Fóós: Chuuk-Ingenes. Supplementary Volume: English-Trukese and an Index of Trukese Word Roots, compiled by Ward H. Goodenough & Hiroshi Sugita. Philadelphia: American Philosophical Society, 1990. [BOX 63]


[CHUVASH] Thesaurus linguae Tschuvaschorum, by N[ikolai] I[vanovich] Ashmarin (1870-1933). Kazan: Izd. Narodnogo Komissariata po prosveshcheniiu Chuvashskoi A.S.S.R., 1928-1938, 12 vols. [BOX 10]

Deutsch-tschuwaschisches Wörterverzeichnis nebst kurzem tschuwaschen Sprachführer, ed. by Johannes Benzing. Berlin: Verlagsanstalt Otto Stollberg, 1943. [BOX 13]


[CIRCASSIAN: see also KABARDIAN] A dictionary of the Circassian language. In two parts: English-Circassian-Turkish, and Circassian-English-Turkish. Containing all the most necessary words for the traveller, the soldier, and the sailor; with the exact pronunciation of each word in the English character, by L[ouis] Loewe. London: George Bell, 1854. [BOX 22]


[CLALLAM] Alphabetical Vocabularies of the Clallam and Lummi, by George Gibbs. New York: Cramoisy Press, 1863. [BOX 28]


[COAHUILTECO] Linguistic Material from the Tribes of Southern Texas and Northeastern Mexico, by John R[eed] Swanton. Washington, D.C.: Government Printing Office, 1940. [BOX 59]


[COCOPA] Cocopa Dictionary, by James M. Crawford. Berkeley: University of California, 1989. [BOX 36]


[COEUR D'ALENE] "Stem-List of the Coeur d'Alene Language," by Gladys A. Richard, in: International Journal of American Linguistics, New York, Vol. 10, Nos. 2-3 (November 1939), pp. 92-108. [BOX 14]


[COLAC: see WATHAWURRUNG]


[COLOMBIAN INDIGENOUS LANGUAGES] Diccionario Indio del Gran Tolima, by Pedro José Ramirez Sendoya. Bogota: Editorial Minerva, 1952. [BOX 37]


[COMANCHE] Comanche Vocabulary. Trilingual Edition, compiled by Manuel Garcia Rejón, trans. and edited by Daniel J. Gelo. Austin, Texas: University of Texas Press, 1995. [BOX 26]

Paperback issue. [BOX 26]


[COMECRUDO: see COAHUILTECO]


[COMORIAN] Lexique comorien (shindzuani) français, by Mohamed. Ahmed Chamanga. Paris: Editions L'Harmattan, 1992. [BOX 11]

Dictionnaire français-comorien: dialecte shindzuani, by Mohamed Ahmed Chamanga. Paris: CEROI-INALCO; L'Harmattan, 1997. [BOX 11]


[CONCANIM: see KONKANI]


[CONGO LANGUAGES: POLYGLOT] Comparative Handbook of Congo Languages; being a comparative grammar of the eight principal languages spoken along the banks of the Congo river from the west coast of Africa to Stanley Falls, a distance of 1300 miles, and of Swahili, the "lingua franca" of the country stretching thence to the east coast, with a comparative vocabulary giving 800 selected words from these languages, with their English equivalents, followed by appendices on six other dialects, compiled and prepared for the Baptist Missionary Society, London, by Walter Henry Stapleton. Yakusu, Stanley Falls, Congo Independent State: [Baptist Missionary Society], 1903. [BOX 59]

Vocabulaire français-kituba-tshiluba-tshisonge-tshikuba-tshitetela, [by Henri Gabriel Vermeersch]. Lusambo: Imprimerie, Ecole professionelle, n.d. [ca. 1900]. [BOX 5]

Langues Sango, Banda, Baya, Mandjia. Notes grammaticales-Mots groupés d'après le sens. Phrases usuelles,--Vocabulaire, by A. P. Éboué. Paris: Emile Larose, 1918. [BOX 5]


[COOK ISLANDS MAORI: see RATOTONGAN]


[COOLY TAMIL: see TAMIL]


[CORA] Die Nayarit-expedition, Textaufnahmen und Beobachtungen unter mexikanischen Indianern. Erster Band: Die Religion der Cora-Indianer in Texten nebst Wörterbuch, by Konrad Theodor Preuss [1869-1938]. Leipzig: B.G. Teubner, 1912. [BOX 8]

"Wörterbuch Deutsch-Cora," by K[onrad] Th[eodor] Preuss [1869-1938], in: International Journal of American Linguistics, New York, Columbia University Press, Vol. 8, No. 2 (December 1934), pp. [81]-102. [BOX 14]


[COSTANOAN] The Mission Indian vocabularies of Alphonse Pinart, edited by R. F. Heizer. Berkeley and Los Angeles: University of California Press, 1952. [BOX 39]

The Mission Indian vocabularies of H[enry] W[etherbee] Henshaw[1850-1930], edited, with ethnographic notes by R. F. Heizer. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1955. [BOX 37]


[COTONAME: see COAHUILTECO]


[CREE] A dictionary of the Cree language, as spoken by the Indians of the Hudson's Bay Company's territories, by E[dwin] A[rthur] Watkins. London: Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge, 1865. [BOX 71]

Dictionnaire de la langue des Cris, by Albert Lacombe [1827-1916]. Montreal: C.O. Beauchemin & Valois, 1874. [BOX 55]

A Dictionary of the Cree Language as spoken by the Indianas in the Provinces of Quebec, Ontario, Manitoba, Saskatchewan and Alberta, based upon the foundation laid by E[dwin] A[rthur] Watkins, revised, enriched and brought up to date by J[ohn] A[lexander] Mackay, R[ichard] Faries, Edward Ahenakew, R. B. Horsefield, & J. G. Anderson. Toronto: Published under the direction of The General Synod of the Church of England in Candada, 1938. [BOX 64]


[CREE, WESTERN] Plains Cree Dictionary in the "y" Dialect, edited by Anne Anderson. Edmonton: [Published by the author], 1975. [BOX 77]

Alberta elders' Cree dictionary. Alperta ohci kehteyak nehiyaw otwestamakewin masinahikan, by Nancy LeClaire [1911-1986]. Edmonton: University of Alberta Press; Duval House Publishing, 1998. [BOX 13]


[CREOLES: see BAHAMIAN ENGLISH; BELIZEAN CREOLE; CAJUN; CARIBBEAN CREOLE; GUINEA-BISSAU CREOLE; HAITIAN CREOLE; JAMAICAN ENGLISH; KRIO; LINGALA; MARTINIQUE CREOLE; PAPIAMENTO; SANGO; ST. LUCIAN CREOLE; TRINIDAD & TOBAGO CREOLE]


[CRIMINAL ARGOT: see CALÓ]


[CUICATECO] Diccionario cuicateco: español-cuicateco, cuicateco-español, by E. Richard Anderson. Mexico, D.F.: Instituto Linguistico de Verano, 1983. [BOX 25]


[DAHOMEY FRENCH: see TOGO FRENCH]


[DAKOTA] Grammar and dictionary of the Dakota language, collected by the Members of the Dakota Mission, ed. by S[tephen] R[eturn] Riggs [1812-1883]. "Under the Patronage of the Historical Society of Minnesota." Washington City; New York : Smithsonian Institution; G. P. Putnam, 1852. [BOX 42]

An English and Dakota Vocabulary, by a Member of the Dakota Mission [Mary Ann Clark Riggs]. New York: A. B. C. F. M., 1852. [BOX 57]

Second edition of Dakota-English portion,1890: A Dakota-English Dictionary, by Stephen Return Riggs. Washington, D.C.: Government Printing Office, 1890. [BOX 76]

Second edition, revised and enlarged, of English-Dakota portion, 1902: An English-Dakota Dictionary. Wasicun ka Dakota Ieska Wowapi, compiled by John P. Williamson. New York: American Tract Society, 1902. [BOX 65]

Reissued by the Working Indians Civil Association (1969): An English-Dakota dictionary. Wasicun ka Dakota ieska wowapi. Ft. Pierre, S.D.: Working Indians Civil Association, 1969. [BOX 10]

An English-Dakota school dictionary. Waśicun qa dakota ieska wowapi, by John P[oage] Williamson [1835-1917]. Yankton Agency, D. T., Iapi Oaye Press, 1886. [BOX 72]

Dictionary of the Sioux Language, compiled with the aid of Charles Guerreu, Indian Interpreter, by Lieuts. J.K. Hyer & W.S. Starring. [New Haven]: Yale University Press, 1968. [BOX 65]

Sioux Indian Dictionary, over 4,000 words, pronunciation-at-a-glance, by Paul Warcloud. Sisseton, South Dakota: Paul Warcloud, 1971. [BOX 15]


[DALLEBURRA] Christison of Lammermoor, by. M. M. Bennett. London:

Alston Rivers: 1927. [BOX 23]


[DANGME] Adangme Vocabularies including a Klama Vocabulary, by T. N. Accam. Legon: Institute of African Studies, University of Ghana, 1966. [BOX 35]

The Writing of Dangme. The New Orthography, Spelling Rules and a Word List, by E. O. Apronti. Legon: University of Ghana, n.d. [c. 1970]. [BOX 35]


[DARGWA] Urus mezla-dargan mezla slovar. Russko-darginskii slovar. Slovar soderzhit 35 tysiach slov, by S. N. Abdullaev. Makhachkala: Izd-vo Dagestanskogo filiala Akademii nauk SSSR, 1950. [BOX 49]


[DARI: see PERSIAN]


[DAYAK, SEA: see IBAN]


[DEGEXIT'AN] Ten'a texts and tales from Anvik, Alaska, with vocabulary by Pliny Earle Goddard, by John W[ight] Chapman. Leyden: E. J. Brill, 1914. [BOX 26]


[DEHONG: see TAI HÜA]


[DEHU: see MINY]


[DELAWARE: see MUNSEE, UNAMI]


[DEORI] An Outline Grammar of the Deori Chutiya Language spoken in Upper Assam, with an introduction, illustrative sentences, and a short vocabulary, by W[illiam] B[arclay] Brown. Shillong: printed at the Assam Secretariat Printing Office, 1895. [BOX 4]


[DIEYERIE: see SOUTH AUSTRALIAN ABORIGINAL LANGUAGES]


[DJAGA: see CHAGA]


[DOGON] La langue secrète des Dogons de Sanga (Soudan français), by Michel Leiris [1901- ]. Paris: Institut d'Ethnologie, 1948. [BOX 30]

Dictionnaire Dogon (Dialecte T[reverse "c"]r[reverse "c"]) langue et civilisation, by Genviève Calame-Griaule. Paris: Librarie C. Klincksieck, 1968. [BOX 9]


[DOMAAKI] The Dumaki language: outlines of the speech of the Doma, or Bericho, of Hunza, by D[avid] L[ockhart] R[obertson] Lorimer [1876-1962]. Nijmegen: Dekker & van de Vegt, 1939. [BOX 51]


[DRASI DIALECT: see SHINA]


[DRAVIDIAN LANGUAGES] Dravidian borrowings from Indo-Aryan, by M[urray] B[amson] Emeneau & T[homas] Burrow [1904- ].Berkeley: University of California Press, 1962. [BOX 30]


[DUALA] Die Duala-Sprache in Kamerun: systematisches Wörterverzeichnis und Einführung in die Grammatik, by A[ugust] Seidel [1863-1916]. Heidelberg: Julius Groos, 1904. [BOX 11]

Wörterbuch der Duala-Sprache, by E[rnst] Dinkelacker. Hamburg: L. Friederichsen & Col, 1914. [BOX 54]


[DUAU: see MUYUW]


[DUTCH CREOLE] Het huidige Negerhollandsch (teksten en woordenlijst), J[an] P[etrus] B[enjamin] de Josselin de Jong [1886- ]. Amsterdam: Koninklijke Akademie van Wetenschappen te Amsterdam, 1926. [BOX 31]


[EBIRA] Igarra (Etuno) names: origin and meanings, by Patrick Ametu Amune. Wukari [Nigeria]: Amune Printing Press, 1991. [BOX 15]


[EDDYSTONE] The language of Eddystone Island (western Solomon Islands), by Peter A. Lanyon-Orgill. Stanley (Scotland): The Crichton Press, 1969.


[EDO] Anthropoligical Report on the Edo-speaking Peoples of Nigeria. Part I. Law and Custom. Part II. Linguistics, by Northcote W[hitridge] Thomas. London: Harrison and Sons, 1910. [BOX 72]

A Concise Dictionary of the Bini Language of Southern Nigeria, by Hans Melzian. London: Kegan Paul, Trench, Trübner and Co., 1937. [BOX 71]

"Comparative Edo Word Lists," by R.E. Bradbury, in: Research Notes from the Department of Linguistics and Nigerian Languages, University of Ibadan, pp. 1-31, June, 1968. [BOX 61]

An Edo-English Dictionary, by Rebecca N. Agheyisi. Benin City: Ethiope Publishing Corporation, 1986. [BOX 65]

Comparative Edoid: phonology and lexicon, by Ben Ohiomamhe Elugbe. [Nigeria]: University of Port Harcourt Press, 1989. [BOX 15]


[EFATE] The Asiatic origin of the oceanic languages: etymological dictionary of the language of Efate (New Hebrides) with an introduction, by the Rev. D[onald] MacDonald. Melbourne; London: Melville, Mullen and Slade, 262 and 264 Collins Street. London: 12 Ludgate Square, E.C., (Walker, May and Co., Printers, Mackillop Street, Melbourne), 1894. [BOX 71]

The Oceanic Languages: Their Grammatical Structure, Vocabulary, and Origin, by D. MacDonald. London: Henry Frowde, 1907. [BOX 64]


[EFIK] Dictionary of the Efik Language. Abridged edition. Calabar: Book Depot, Training Institution, 1906. [BOX 61]

English-Efik Dictionary. Efik-English Dictionary, by R.F.G. Adams. 2 vols. Liverpool: Philip, Son & Nephew, 1943. [2nd edition, revised. BOX 61]

A Learner's Dictionary of the Efik Language: Volume 1 (Efik-English), by [Efiong Ukpong Aye]. Ibadan, Nigeria: Evans Brothers, 1991. [BOX 3]


[EGYPTIAN ARABIC] An Arabic-English Vocabulary for the use of English students of modern Egyptian Arabic, by D[onald] A[ndreas] Cameron. London: Bernard Quartich, 1892. [BOX 54]

An Arabic-English Vocabulary of the Colloquial Arabic of Egypt, containing the venacular idioms and expressions, slang phrases, etc., etc., used by the native Egyptians, compiled by Socrates Spiro. Cairo; London: Al-Mokattam Printing Office; Bernard Quaritch, 1895. [BOX 63]

An English-Arabic Vocabulary of the Modern and Colloquial Arabic of Egypt, compiled by Socrates Spiro, of the Ministry of Finance. Cairo: Al-Miokattam Printing Office; London: Bernard Quartich, 1897.

An Arabic Vocabulary for Egypt, by F. E. Robertson. London: Samson Low, Marston & Co., 1898. [BOX 57]


[EKARI] Kapauku-Malayan-Dutch-English dictionary, by Marion Doble. The Hague: Martin Nijhoff, 1960. [BOX 21]


[EKELE] Vocabulary of Ekele. The language spoken by the Lokele tribe living between Yanjali and Stanleyville. Congo Belge, compiled by W. Millman. Yakusu: B[aptist] M[issionary] S[ociety], 1926. [BOX 67]


[EKOID BANTU] Ekoid Bantu Languages of Ogoja. Part I, by David W. Crabb. London: Cambridge University Press in association with the West African Languages Survey and the Institute of African Studies, Ibadan, 1965. [BOX 23]


[EKPEYE] Dictionary of Ekpeye proper names, by Maxwell S. Ikpe. [Ibadan]: Institute of African Studies, University of Ibadan, 1972. [BOX 3]


[EMAE] The Polynesian Language of Mae (Emwae), New Hebrides, by A[rthur] Capell. Auckland: Linguistic Society of New Zealand, 1962. [BOX 13]


[ENGGANO] Hans K¨a;hler: Enggano-Deutsches Wörterbuch aus dem Nachlaß herausgegeben und mit einem Deutsch-Enggano-Wörterverzeichnis versehen, by Hans Schmidt. Berlin. Hamburg Dietrich Reimer Verlag, 1987. [BOX 2]


[ERZYA] Mordwinische Chrestomathie mit Glossar und Grammatikalischen Abriss, by H[eikki] Paasonen. Helsingfors: Finnisch-Ugrinische Gesellschaft, 1909. [BOX 22]


[E-SAAN: see THAI]


[ESKIMO: see INUKTITUT, GREENLANDIC; INUKTITUT, WESTERN CANADIAN; YUPIK, CENTRAL]


[ESPERANTO] Franckhs Esperanto-Sprachführer. Enthaltend: Vollstndiges Taschenwörterbuch. Esperanto-Deutsch und Deutsch-Esperanto, einen Abriss der Grammatik und zahlreiche Übungen und Beispiele zur Konversation in der internationalen Hilfssprache. Stuttgart: Fransckh'sche Verlagsbundlung, 1908. [BOX 17]

The English-Esperanto Dictionary based upon the "Fundamento", the Esperanto Literature, and the National-Esperanto Dictionaries bearing Dr. Zamenhof's "Aprobo", by Joseph Rhodes. London, New York, Chicago: Fleming H. Revell Company, 1908. [BOX 19]

The Esperanto-English Dictionary, by Edward A. Millidge. Washington, D.C.: American Esperantist Society, 1912. [BOX 57]

[Cover title] Taschenwörterbuch Deutsch-Esperanto. Die zweite Sprache für Jeden, by Delkuro. [Munich: published by the author, ca. 1948]. [BOX 49]

Esperanto for Americans: a Comprehensive, Concise Textbook of the International Language, Second and revised edition with conversations for world travelers, by Stanley A. Klukowski. Milwaukee, Wisconsin: Esperanto Institute of America, [1956]. [BOX 57]


[ESSELIN: see COSTANOAN]


[ETHIOPIC: see GEEZ]


[EVEN] Slovar Russko-Lamutskii i Russko-Koriakskii. Petropavlovsk-on-Kamchatka: K.I.K., 1926. 3/99. Victor Kholodkov. [BOX 47]

Lamutische Grammatik mit Bibliographie, Sprachproben und Glossar, by Johannes Benzing. Wiesbaden: Franz Steiner Verlag, 1955. [BOX 59]


[EVENKI: see also ALTAIC LANGUAGES: POLYGLOT]

Evenkiisko-russkii slovar, by G[lafira] M[akarevna] Vasilevich. Moscow: Gos idz-vo inostrannykh i natsionalnykh slovarei, 1958. [BOX 47]


[EWE: see also GA] Lehrbuch der Ewhe-Sprache in Togo, Anglo-dialekt: mit Übungstücken, einem systematischen Vokabular und einem Lesebuch, by A[ugust] Seidel [1863-1916]. Heidelberg: Julius Groos, 1906. 9/26/99. 570 FF (inc. postage) (=$87.50). Wildman Press. [BOX 9]

Evefiala or Ewe-English Dictionary, by D[iedrich] Westermann. Berlin: Dietrich Reimer, 1928. [BOX 67]

Dictionary of Ewe Homonyms: Translated into French, English and German, by J.K. Adzomada. Accra, Ghana: Waterville Publishing House, 1969. [BOX 49]

Vocabulaire de la langue Ewe. I. Partie, Ewe-Français, by E. Riebstein. S.l.: n.p., n.d. Stenciled reprint of the edition of 1923. [BOX 74]


[EWONDO] Jaunde-Wörterbuch, by M[artin] Heepe [1887- ] in collaboration with H[ermann] Nekes [1875-1948]. Hamburg: L. Friederichsen & Co., 1926. [BOX 39]


[FANAGOLO] Miner's companion in Zulu, for the use of miners on the Witzatersrand gold mines. Johanesburg: Issued by the Prevention of Accidents Committee of the Rand Mutual Assurance Co., Ltd, 1920. [BOX 13]

Second edition, enlarged and revised, 1938: Miners' Companion in English, Afrikaans, Sesuto and Mine Kaffir for the use of miners on the gold mines of the Witwatersrand and extensions, issued by the Prevention of Accidents Committee of the Rand Mutual Assurance Co., Ltd, 1938. 1/19/99. $10. Africana Books. [BOX 5]

Kitchen-Kafir grammar & vocabulary, by B.G.Lloyd. [Johannesburg]: Central News Agency, Ltd., n.d. [ca. 1950]. [BOX 17]

Dictionary and phrase-book of Fanagalo (kitchen Kafir): the lingua franca of southern Africa as spoken in the Union of South Africa, the Rhodesias, Portuguese East Africa, Nyasaland, Belgian Congo, etc., by J[ohn] D[aniel] Bold. [Cape Town], South Africa: Central News Agency Ltd, 1955. Third edition, revised and enlarged. [BOX 17]


[FANG] Vocabulary of the Fan language in western Africa, south of the equator: with Spanish interpretation prepared on the spot, by Amado Osorio Zabala. London: Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge, 1887. [BOX 17]


[FANTE: see AKAN]


[FANTI: see AKAN]


[FARSI: see PERSIAN]


[FASU] Fasu (Námo Me)-English Dictionary, by Jean May & Eunice Loeweke. Ukrumpa, Papua New Guinea: Summer Institute of Linguistics, [1981]. [BOX 17]


[FIJIAN] A Compendious Grammar of the Feejeean Language [bound with] A Feejeean an English Dictionary: with examples of common and peculiar modes of expression, and uses of words. Also containing brief hints on native customs, proverbs, the native names of the natural productions of the islands, notices of the islands of feejee, and a list of the foreign words introduced, by D[avid] Hazlewood [d. 1855]. Vewa, Fiji: Printed at the Wesleyan Mission Press, 1850 [-1852]. [BOX 15]

Second edition, 1872: A Fijian and English and an English and Fijian Dictionary: with examples of common and peculiar modes of expression and uses of words, also containing brief hints of native customs, proverbs, the native names of natural productions, and notices of the Islands of Fiji, and a Grammar of the Language with examples of Native Idioms, by the late David Hazlewood, Wesleyan Missionary. Second Edition, with map, ed. by James Calvert. London: Sampson Low, Marston, and Co., 1872. [BOX 16]

A Practical Course to Facilitate the Study of the Fijian Language, by a Marist Brother. Westmead, N.S.W.: Printed at The Boys' Home, 1906. [BOX 15]

Handbook of Fijian language: a simple introduction to the grammar and construction of Fijian, with lists of useful sentences and phrases, sets of exercises, and a comprehensive vocabulary, by Harold Chambers. [Davuilevu]: [Methodist Book Depot?], 1936. [BOX 2]

A New Fijian Dictionary, compiled by A[rthur] Capell. Sydney: Australasian Medical Publishing Company, 1941. [BOX 57]

Fijian Plant Names, by B. E. V. Parham. Suva: F. W. Smith, Government Printer, 1942. [BOX 63]


[FIOTE: see VILI]


[FOE] The Culture and Language of the Foe. The People of Lake Kutubu, Southern Highlands Province, Papua New Guinea, by Murray Rule. Merewether, NSW.: Murray Rule, 1993. [BOX 17]


[FON-GBE] Manuel dahomeen: grammaire, chrestomathie, dictionnaire français-dahomeen et dahomeen-françaism, by Maurice Delafosse [1870-1926]. Paris: Ernest Leroux, 1894. [BOX 27]

Dictionnaire Fõ-Français, by B. Segurola. Cotonou, [Benin]: Procure de l'Archidiocèse, 1963. Two vols. [BOX 38]


[FOOCHOW DIALECT: see CHINESE, MIN DONG]


[FRAFRA: see GURMA]


[FRENCH, CAJUN] Louisiana-French, by William A. Read. Baton Rouge: Louisiana State University Press, 1931. [BOX 73]

A Dictionary of the Cajun Language, by Jules O. Daigle. Ann Arbor, Michigan: Edwards Brothers, [1984]. [BOX 63]


[FULA / FULANI: see FULFULDE]


[FULFULDE, ADAMAWA] A Fulani-Hausa Vocabulary, by F[rank] W[illiam] Taylor [1887- ]. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1927. [BOX 15]

A Fulani-English Dictionary, by F[rank] W[illiam] Taylor [1887- ]. London: Oxford University Press, 1932. Second copy: 5/27/99. $8.16. Powell's Book Store.[BOX 16]

An English-Fulfulde dictionary, by Paul Kazihisa Eguchi. Tokyo: Institute for the Study of Languages and Cultures of Asia and Africa (ILCAA), 1986. [BOX 34]


[FULFULDE, GOURMANTCHE] Dictionnaire Français-Peul (dialects de la Haute-Volta), by Jean Cremer. Paris: Paul Gueuthner, 1923. [BOX 8]


[FULFULDE, NIGERIAN] A Fulfulde English Dictionary, ed. by I. A. Mukosky. Lagos: Nigeria Educational Research and Development Council, 1991. [BOX 61]


[FULFULDE, PULAAR] Fulas do Gabú, by José Mendes Moreira. Bissau: Centro de Estudos da Guiné Portuguesa, 1948. [BOX 21]

Petit lexique peul-français de la faune et de la flore du Fouta Toro, by Oumar Ba. [Dakar]: Centre de Linguistique Appliquée de Dakar, 1968. [BOX 78]

Hippocrene Standard Dictionary Pulaar-English English-Pulaar, by Mamadou Niang. New York: Hippocrene Books, 1997. [BOX 15]


[FUTUNA, EAST] Dictionnaire Futunien-Français avec notes grammaticales, by [Isidore] Grézel. Paris: Maisonneuve et Cie, 1878. [BOX 62]

Tikisionalio Fakafutuna-Fakafalani. Dictionnaire Futunien-Français, by Karl H. Rensch. Canberra: Australian National University, 1986. [BOX 62]


[FUTUNIEN: see FUTUNA, EAST]


[GA-ADANGME-KROBO]


[GAAM] Preliminary Gaam-English-Gaam dictionary, by Malik Agarr Ayre & M[arvin] Lionel Bender. N.p.: n.p., 1980. [BOX 54]


[GADE] Gade-English dictionary: including English-Gade reference dictionary and summary of Gade grammar, Jan P. Sterk. Berlin: Dietrich Reimer, 1994. [BOX 13]


[GAFAT] Gafat Documents. Record of a South-Ethiopic Language. Grammar, Text and Comparative Vocabulary, by Wolf Leslau. New Haven: American Oriental Society, 1945. [BOX 5]


[GALELA] Woordenlijst, Galelareesch-Hollandsch, met ethnologische aanteekeningen, op de woorden, die daartoe aanleiding gaven, compiled by M.J. Van Baarda. 'S-Gravenhage: Martinus Nijhoff, 1895. [BOX 74]


[GALLA: see OROMO, BORANA-ARSI-GUJI]


[GAMILARAAY: see KAMILAROI]


[GANDA: see also BANTU LANGUAGES] Luganda-English and English-Luganda vocabulary, by G[eorge] R[obert] Blackledge. London: Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge, 1904. [BOX 24]

A Manual of Lu-Ganda, by W[illiam] A[rthur] Crabtree. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1921. [BOX 67]

A Luganda-English and English-Luganda Dictionary, compiled by A[rthur] L[eonard] Kitching & G[eorge] R[obert] Blackledge. Kampala; London: The Uganda Bookshop; Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge, 1925. [BOX 62]

Revised edition (1952): A Luganda-English and English-Luganda dictionary, being a revision by E. M. . Mulira & E. G. M. Ndawula of the dictionary compiled by A[rthur] L[eonard] Kitching & G. R. Blackledge. London: Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge, 1952. [BOX 12]

Luganda-English Dictionary, by R.A. Snoxall. Oxford: The Clarendon Press, 1965. [BOX 64]

Luganda-English Dictionary, by John D. Murphy. Washington, D.C.: The Catholic University of America Press, 1972. [BOX 68]


[GANGUELA: see NYEMBA]


[GAWAR-BATI] Notes on Gawar-Bati, by Georg Morgenstierne. Oslo: I Kommisjon Hos Jacob Dybwad, 1950. [BOX 6]


[GAYO] : Gajosch-Nederlandsch woordenboek, met Nederlandsch-Gajosch register, by G[odard] A[rend] J[ohannes] Hazeu. Batavia: Landsdrukkerij, 1907; rubberstamped 's-Gravenhage | Martinus Nijhoff. [BOX 18]


[GBANDI] Dictionnaire Ngbandi (Ubangi-Congo belge) Français-Ngbandi Ngbandi-Français, by Benjamin Lekens. Antwerp: Éditions de Sikkel, 1952 [BOX 62]


[GBANZIRI: see NGBAKA MA'BO]


[GBAYA, NORTHWEST: see also CONGO LANGUAGES, POLYGLOT] Vocabulaire de la langue Baya (Haute Sanga), by Léopold Landréau. Paris: Augustin Challamel, 1900. [BOX 65]

Vocabulaire Français-Gbéa, précédé d'éléments de grammaire, by J. Calloc'h. Paris: Librairie Paul Geuthner, 1911. [BOX 1]

The Gbeya Language: Grammar, Texts, and Vocabularies, by William J. Samarin. Original wrappers. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1966. [BOX 3]


[GEEZ] Za'ijob Ludalf mazegaba galate za-lesana gedeze zewe'etu lesana mashafa za'itjoseja =sive, Jobi Ludolfi I.C. Lexicon aethiopico-latinum : ex omnibus libris impressis, nonnullisque manuscriptis collectum : et cum docto quodam Aethiope relectum : accessit authoris Grammatica, cum aliis nonnullis quorum catalogum sequens pagina exhibebit, by Hiob Ludolf [1624-1704]. Londini: Apud Thomam Roycroft, LL. Orientalium Typographum Regium. A.S., 1661. [BOX 12]

The Book of Jonah in Four Semitic Versions: viz. Chaldee, Syriuac, Aethiopic and Arabic with corresponding Glossaries, by W[illiam] Wright [1830-1889]. London: Williams and Norgate, 1857. [BOX 14]

Lexicon linguae aethiopicae cum indice latino. Adiectum est vocabularium tigre dialecti septentrionalis comilatum a Wernern Munzinger, by Chr. Fr. August Dillmann [1823-1894]. Leipzig: T.O. Weigel, 1865. [BOX 16]

Ethiopic Grammar with Chrestomathy and Glossary, by Samuel A[lfred] B[rowne] Mercer [b. 1880]. Oxford: The Clarendon Press, 1920. [BOX 12]

Supplément au Lexicon linguae aethiopicae de August Dillmann (1865) et édition du lexique de Juste d'Urbin (1850-1855), by Sylvain Grébaut. Paris: Imprimerie Nationale, 1952. [BOX 20]


[GELA] A Dictionary of the Nggela Language (Florida, British Solomon Islands), by C[harles] E[lliot] Fox. Auckland, N.Z.: The Unity Press, 1955. [BOX 9]


[GEORGIAN] ] Vocabularie et grammaire de la langue Géorginne. Première partie, contenant le vocabulaire Géorgien-Français et Fr.-Géorgien, by J[ulius von] Klaproth. Paris: Dondey-Dupré Père et Fils, 1827. [BOX 43]

Karthul-Germanuli sitqvari = Georgisch-Deutsches Worterbuch., by Richard. Meckelein. Berlin: Walter de Gruyter, 1928. [BOX 9]

Georgian-English Dictionary, compiled by E. Cherkesi. Oxford: Printed for the Trustees of the Marjory Wardrop Fund, University of Oxford, 1950. [BOX 59]

Kartul-rusuli leksikoni, 3 vols., by Ketevan Datikasvili. [Tbilisi]: Saxelgami, 1953, 1959, 1967. [BOX 47]

English-Georgian Dictionary. Second edition, 8,000 words, by Thamar and Isidore Gvarjaladze. Additional title page in Russian. Tbilisi: State Publishing House, 1955. [BOX 47]

Georgisch-Deutsches Wörterbuch, 3 vols., by Kita Tschenkéli, continued after his death by Yolanda Marchev. Zurich: Amirani-Verlag, 1965, 1970, 1974. [BOX 10]

Kratkii russko-gruzinskii slovar, by A[leksandr] G[avrilovich] Torotadze. Tbilisi: "Sabchota Sakartvelo", 1969. [BOX 48]

English and Georgian Thematic Vocabulary (5,500 words approx), by Zinaida Garsevanidze. Tbilisi: Publishing House 'Ganatleba', 1973. [BOX 5]


[GIDABAL: see BANDJALANG]


[GIDHABAL: see BANDJALANG]]


[GIKUYU: see also KAMBA; LUO; UGANDAN LANGUAGES]

Tentative studies in Kikuyu grammar and idiom, by A. Ruffell Barlow. Edinburgh: Printed for the Foreign Mission Committee of the Church of Scotland and the Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge, London, by W. Blackwood, 1914. [BOX 26]

English-Kikuyu, Kikuyu-English vocabulary, by B[ethuel] M[areka] Gecaga & W. H. Kirkaldy-Willis. Dar es Salaam, Nairobi, Kampala: Eagle Press, n.d. [1953?]. Fall 2000. $15. [BOX 32]

Kikuyu-English Dictionary, edited by T.G. Benson. London: Oxford University Press, 1964. [BOX 64]


[GILBERTESE: see KIRIBATI]


[GILGITI DIALECT: see SHINA]


[GILYAK] Nivkhsko-russkii slovar. Svyshe 13 000 slov, by V[alentina] N[ikolaevna] Saveleva & C[huner] M[ikhailovich] Taksami. Moscow: "Sov. Entsiklopediia", 1970. [BOX 48]


[GIRYAMA] Giryama vocabulary and collections, by W[illiam] E[rnest] Taylor [1855 or 6- ]. London: Society for Promoting Christian knowledge, 1891. [BOX 3]


[GOLA] Die Gola-Sprache in Liberia. Grammatik, Texte und Wörterbuch, by Diedrich Westermann. Hamburg: L. Friederichsen & Co., 1921. [BOX 54]


[GOLD: see NANAI]


[GONDI, NORTHERN] Gondi Grammar and Vocabulary, by H[enry] D[rummond] Williamson. London: Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge, n.d. [c. 1890]. [BOX 57]

A comparative vocabulary of the Gondi dialects, by T[homas] Burrow & S[udhibhushan] Bhattacharya. Calcutta: The Asiatic Society,[1960]. [BOX 30]


[GONDI, SOUTHERN] First Gondi Manual, by S. B. Patwardhan. London: Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge, [1935]. [BOX 24]


[GORONTALO] Zur Holontalo-Sprache. Inaugural-Dissertation zur Erlangung der philosopischen Doktowürde an der Universit¨a;t Leipzig, by Whilhelm Joest [1852-1898]. Berlin: Druck von Gebr. Unger (Th. Grimm), 1883. [BOX 22]

Gorontalosche Woordenlijst, by E[ngelbertus] E[liza] W[illem] G[erards] Schröder. s'Gravenhage: Martinus Nijhoff, 1908. [BOX 43]


[GRAND COULI (NEW CALEDONIA)] Grand Couli Dictionary (New Caledonia), by G. W. Grace. Canberra: The Australian National University, 1976. [BOX 35]


[GREBO] A Grebo-English Dictionary, by Gordon Innes. London: Cambridge University Press, 1967. Also a second copy, reprinted 1969. [BOX 17, 2nd copy BOX 65]


[GREEN HMONG: see HMPNG NJUA]


[GREEN MIAO: see HMONG NJUA]


[GUAJAJÁRA] Dicionário de tupi moderno (Dialeto tembé-ténêtéhar do alto rio Gurupi), by Max H. Boudin. São Paulo: Governo do Estado, 1966. [BOX 29]


[GUARANÍ, PARAGUAYAN and GUARANÍ, MBYÁ]

Diccionario guarani-espanol y espanol-guarani, by Anselmo Jover Peralta & Tomas Osuna. Buenos Aires: Editorial Tupa, 1950. [BOX 10]

Diccionario Ñe'eryru Guaraní / Castellano = Castellano / Guarní, [by Lino Trinidad Sanabria]. Asunción, Paraguay: Editorial Omega, 1998. [BOX 8]

Gran diccionario katygara: guarani-castellano, castellano-guarani, by Felix de Guarania. Asuncion: Centro Editorial Paraguayo, 1998. 1/17/00. [BOX 42]


[GUAYMÍ] Guaymí Grammar and Dictionary with some Ethnological Notes, by Ephraim S. Alphonse. Washington, D.C.: Government Printing Office, 1956. [BOX 62]

Diccionario Guaymi Español-Ingles, by Ephraim S. J. Alphonse. Panama: Asamblea Espiritual Nacional de los Bahais de Panama, 1987 [BOX 14]


[GUERZÉ: see KPELLE]


[GUINEA-BISSAU CREOLE] Petit Dictionnaire Etymologique du Kriol de Guinée-Bissau et Casamance, by Jean-Louis Rougé. Bissau, Guinea-Bissau: Instituto Nacional de Estudos e Perquisa, 1988. [BOX 65]


[GUJARATI] An etymological Gujarati-English dictionary. Second edition, revised and enlarged, by Malhar Bhikaji Belsare. Ahmedabad: H.K. Pathak, 1904. [BOX 22]


[GULLAH: see SEA ISLANDS CREOLE ENGLISH]


[GUMAWANA: see MUYUW]


[GUNGABULA: see BIDYARA]


[GURESI DIALECT: see SHINA]


[GURMA] Die Gurenne-Sprache in Nordghana. Teil I. Einführung in das Gurenne. Sprichwörter der Gurense. Teil II. Wörterbuch Gurenne-Deutsch, by Eugen Ludwig Rapp. Leipzig: VEB Verlag Enzyklop¨a;die, 1966. [BOX 59]

Essaie pour une phonologie du Gurma parlé à Kpana (Nord-Togo), by Nicole Tersis[-Surugue]. Paris: SELAF [Societé d'études linguistiques et anthropologiques de France], 1967. Cover reads: 1972. [BOX 59]


[GWAMHI-WURI] A manuscript vocabulary list of approximately thirty English words and numbers 1-11, 100, 1000, with equivalents in Wuri, Pωñgω-Sωñgω, and Aba ("not Abo"), cir. 1920. [BOX 53]


[GWANDARA] An Outline of Gwandara Phonemics and Gwandara-English Vocabulary, by Sjuji Matsushita. [Tokyo]: [Institute for the Study of Languages and Cultures of Asia and Africa, 1972]. [BOX 37]

A comparative vocabulary of Gwandara dialects, by Shuji Masushita [1942- ]. [Tokyo]: Institute for the Study of Languages and Cultures of Asia and Africa, 1974. [BOX 34]


[GWICH'IN: see POLYGLOT: WORLD LANGUAGES] See Opuscula, by Robert Latham, for first published vocabulary of Gwhich'in.


[GYPSY: see ANGLO ROMANI, ROMANI]


[HAIDA: see also CHINOOK WAWA] Haida dictionary, compiled by Erma Lawrence. Fairbanks: Society for the Preservation of Haida Language and Literature, and the Alaska Native Language Center, University of Alaska, 1977. [BOX 28]


[HAISLA] Phonology, dictionary, and listing of roots and lexical derivates of the Haisla language of Kitlope and Kitimaat, B.C., 2 vols. by Neville J. Lincoln & John C. Rath. [Ottawa]: National Museums of Canada, 1986. [BOX 33]


[HAITIAN CREOLE FRENCH] Haitian Creole. Grammar. Texts. Vocabulary, by Robert A. Hall, Jr. S.l.: American Anthropological Association, 1953. [BOX 18]

Diksyonè Kréyòl Dictionary. Creole-English. Anglé-Kréyòl, by Edner A. Jeanty. Port-au-Prince: La Presse Evangélique, 1985. [BOX 9]

"Second edition", 1989: Diksyonè Kréyòl Dictionary. Creole-English. Anglé-Kréyòl, by Edner A. Jeanty. Port-au-Prince: La Presse Evangélique, 1985. [BOX 65]

Diksyone Kreyol Angle, by Féquière Vilsaint. Temple Terrace, FL: Educa Vision, 1991. [BOX 16]

Dictionary of Haitian Creole verbs: with phrases and idioms, by Emmanuel W. Vedrine. Cambridge, MA: Soup To Nuts Publishers, 1992. [BOX 21]

Haitian Creole-English Dictionary, by Jean Targète & Raphael G. Urciolo. Kensington, Maryland: Dunwoody Press, 1993. [BOX 54]

A Learner's Dictionary of Haitian Creole, by Albert Valdman, Charles Pooser, & Rozevel Jean-Baptiste. Bloomington, Indiana: Creole Institute, Indiana University, 1996. [BOX 68]

Haitian-English Dictionary, by Bryant C. Freeman & Jowel Laguerre. Lawrence, Kansas; Port-au-Prince: Institute of Haitian Studies, University of Kansas; La Presse Evangélique,1996. [BOX 20]


[HALAKKI KANNADA: see KANNADA]


[HALKOMELEM] [cover title] A vocabulary of native words in the Halkomelem language, as used by the native people of the Lower Fraser Valley, B.C.by Oliver N. Wells [1907-1970]. [British Columbia]: Oliver N. Wells, 1965. [BOX 29]

Second edition, 1969: A Vocabulary of Native Words in the Halkomelem Language as used by the Native People of the Lower Fraser Valley, B.C. [English-Halkomelem], by Oliver N. Wells. N.p [Sardis, B.C.]: n.pub. [Oliver Wells], n.d. [1969]. [BOX 65]


[HANI] Hani-English English-Hani Dictionary: Haqniqdoq-Yilyidoq, Doqlo-Soqdaoq, compiled by Paul W[hite] Lewis & Bai Bibo. London; New York; Leiden: Kegan Paul International; International Institute for Asian Studies, 1996. [BOX 34]


[HANUNÓO] Hanunóo-English Vocabulary, by Harold C. Conklin. Berkeley and Los Angeles: University of California Press, 1953. [BOX 61]


[HARARI] Etymological Dictionary of Harari, by Wolf Leslau. Berkeley: University of California, 1963. [BOX 4]


[HARSUSI] Harsusi Lexicon and English-Harsusi Word-list, by T[homas] M. Johnstone. London: Oxford University Press, 1977.[BOX 16]


[HAUSA] Essai de dictionnaire français-haoussa et haoussa-français, précedé d'un Essai de grammaire de la langue haoussa, Magana n haoussa [arabic script] renfermant les éléments du langage parlé par les négres du Soudan, accompagné d'une carte de l'Afrique septentrionale, by Jean Marie Le Roux [1846- ]. Alger: Adolphe Jourdan, 1886. Second copy with map, but spine rebound with unprinted brown cloth, utilizing original wrappers. [BOX 39]

Dictionary of the Hausa Language. Vol. I. Hausa-English. Vol. II. English-Hausa, 2 vols., by Charles Henry Robinson, assisted by W. H. Brooks. Cambridge: at the University Press, 1899-1900. [BOX 36]

Third edition, 1914, of volume II: Dictionary of the Hausa Language. Vol. II English-Hausa, by Charles Henry Robinson. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1914. [BOX 9]

Die sprache der Hausa. Grammatik, Übungen und Chrestomathie, sowie hausanisch-deutsches und deutsch-hausanisches Wörterverzeichniss, by Ernst C[arl Nikolaus] Marré [1874- ]. Vienna: A. Hartleben, [1901]. [BOX 17]

Wörterbuch der Hausasprache. 1. Teil: Hausa-Deutsch, by Adam Mischlich [1864- ]. Berlin: Georg Reimer, 1906. [BOX 10]

Die Haussasprache. La langue haoussa, The Hausa language: grammatik (deutsch) und systematisch Wörterbuch: haussa-deutsch-französisch-english. Grammaire (en francais) et vocabulaire systematique: Haoussa-allemand-français-anglais. Grammar (in English) and systematic vocabulary: Hausa-German-French-English, by A[ugust] Seidel [1863-1916]. Heidelberg: Julius Groos, 1906. [BOX 11]

Hausa Stories and Riddles, with Notes on theLanguage etc. and a concise Hausa Dictionary, by Hermann G. Harris. Weston-Super-Mare: The Mendip Press, [1908]. [BOX 11]

Dictionnaire haoussa, by M[oise Augustin] Landeroin & J[ean] Tilho [1875-1956]. Paris: Imprimerie nationale, 1909. [BOX 29]

A Practical Hausa Grammar, With Exercises, Vocabularies and Specimen Examination Papers, by F[rank] W[illiam] Taylor. Oxford: The Clarendon Press, 1923. [BOX 67]

A Hausa-English Dictionary and English-Hausa Vocabulary, compiled for the Government of Nigeria, by G.P. Bargery. London: Oxford University Press, 1934. [BOX 73]

Dictionary of the Hausa Language, by R[oy] C[live] Abraham & Malam Mai Kano. [London]: Published on behalf of the Government of Nigeria by the Crown Agents for the Colonies, 1949. [BOX 56]

Wörterbuch der Ewe-Sprache, Diedrich Westermann [1875-1956]. Berlin: Akademie-Verlag, 1954. [BOX 33]

Hanyar Tadi da Turanci: A Dictionary of English Conversation for Hausa Students. Zaria, Nigeria; London: Norla; Longmans, Green and Co., 1957. [BOX 64]

Khausa-russkii slovar: okolo 18000 slov, by D[mitrii] A[lekseevich] Olderogge. Moscow: Gos idz-vo inostrannykh i natsionalnykh slovarei, 1963. [BOX 52]

Kamus Na Turanci Da Hausa[Hausa-English Dictionary] compiled by Neil Skinner. Zaria, Nigeria: Gaskiya Corporation, 1965. [BOX 65]

The Learner's Russian-Hausa-Yoruba Dictionary: 2100 entries. Added title page in Russian: Uchebnyi russko-khausa-ioruba slovar. Foreword and introduction in Russian and English. Moscow: Yazyk Publishers, 1987. [BOX 15]

Wörterbuch Hausa-Deutsch, by Irmtraud Herms. Leipzig: VEB Verlag Enzyklop¨a;die, 1987. [BOX 10]

An English-Hausa Dictionary, by Roxana Ma Newman. New Haven: Yale University Press, 1990. [BOX 23]

Hausa in the media a lexical guide : Hausa-English-German, English-Hausa, German-Hausa, by Joseph McIntyre. Hamburg Helmut Buske Verlag, 1991. [BOX 33]

Sabon kamus na Hausa zuwa Turanci. Modern Hausa-English dictionary, compiled by Paul Newman and Roxana Ma Newman, assisted by Ibrahim Yaro Yahaya and Linda Dresel and Centre for the Study of Nigerian Languages, Bayero University College. Reprinted with corrections. Ibadan: University Press PLC, 1992. [BOX 12]


[HAVASUPAI- WALAPAI-YAVAPAI] Comparative Vocabularies and Parallel Texts in Two Yuman Languages of Arizona, by Leslie Spier. Albuquerque: The University of New Mexico Press, 1946. [BOX 27]


[HAWAIIAN] A Voyage Round the World, from 1806 to 1812; in which Japan, Kamschatka, the Aleutian Islands and the Sandwich Islands were Visited…With an Account of the Present State of the Sandwich Islands, and a Vocabulary of their Language, by Archibald Campbell. Edinburgh: A. Constable & Co., 1816. [BOX 62]

A dictionary of the Hawaiian language, to which is appended an English-Hawaiian vocabulary and a chronological table of remarkable events, by Lorrin Andrews [1795-1868]. Honolulu, H. I.: Printed by H. M. Whitney, 1865. [BOX 33]

Third edition (1922): A Dictionary of the Hawaiian Language, by Lorrin Andrews, revised by Henry H. Parker. Honolulu: The Board of Commissioners of Public Archives of the Territory of Hawaii, 1922. [BOX 70]

An Hawaiian-English Dictionary; with various useful tables; prepared for the use of Hawaiian-English schools, by H[arvey] R[exford] Hitchcock. San Francisco: Bancroft Company, 1887. [BOX 64]

English-Hawaiian words. Translations which will enable you to speak and more thoroughly understand the Hawaiian language, by O. Shaw. Honolulu: J. W. Driscoll & Co., distributors, 1938. 11/05/99. [BOX 17] [BOX 18]

The Hawaiian Language and Hawaiian-English Dictionary: a complete Grammarby Henry P. Judd. Honolulu: Hawaiian Service, 1939. [BOX 17]

Introduction to the Hawaiian Language. An English-Hawaiian Vocabulary...Hawaiian-English Vocabulary, by Henry P. Judd, Mary Kawena Pukui, & John F.G. Stokes. Honolulu: Tongg Publishing Company, 1943. [BOX 61]

Hawaiian-English Dictionary, by Mary Kawena Pukui & Samuel H. Elbert. Honolulu: University of Hawaii Press, 1957. [BOX 73]

English-Hawaiian Dictionary, by Mary Kawena Pukui & Samuel H. Elbert. Honolulu: University of Hawaii Press, 1964. [BOX 11]

Place Names of Hawaii and Supplement to the Third Edition of the Hawaiian-English Dictionary, by Mary Kawena Pukui & Samuel H. Elbert. Honolulu: University of Hawaii Press, 1966. [BOX 43]

Hawaiian Dictionary. Hawaiian-English. English-Hawaiian, by Mary Kawena Pukui & Samuel H. Elbert. Honolulu: University of Hawaii Press, 1971. [BOX 54]

"An Early Hawaiian Vocabulary,' in: The Hawaiian Journal of History, Vol. 25, 1991, pp. 21-30. Honolulu: Hawaiian Historical Society,1991. [BOX 29]


[HAWAI'I CREOLE ENGLISH] Pidgin to da max, by Douglans Simonson (Peppo), Ken Sakata & Pat Saski. Honolulu: Peppovision, 1981. [BOX 7]

ALSO: Pidgin to da max Hana Hou, by Douglans Simonson (Peppo), Ken Sakata, Pat Sasaki & Todd Kurosawa. Honolulu: Peppovision, 1982. Enlarged edition. [BOX 31]

Reissued in 1992: Honolulu: The Bess Press, 1992. [BOX 31]


[HEILTSUK] A Practical Heiltsuk-English Dictionary, John C. Rath. Two vols. Ottawa: National Museums of Canada, 1981. [BOX 78]


[HERERO] Wörterbuch und kurzgefasste Grammtik des Otji-Hérero mit Beifügung verwandter Ausdrücke und Formen des Oshi-Ndonga-Otj-Ambo, by [Peter] H[einrich] Brincker. ed. by C. G. Büttner. Leipzig: T. O. Weigel, 1886. [BOX 43]

Deutsch-Herero-Wörterbuch, by J[akob] Irle. Hamburg: L. Friederichsen & Co., 1917. [BOX 6]

Otjiherero. Woordeboek. Dictionary. Embo Romanbo, by J[ohannes] J[urgens] Viljoen & T.K. Kampupingene. Windhoek: Gamsberg, 1983. [BOX 55]


[HIMLAYAN DIALECTS] Linguistic Studies from the Himalayas, being Studies in the Grammar of Fifteen Himalayan Dialects, by T. Grahame Bailey. London: Royal Asiatic Society, 1915. [NOTE: 1920 is incorrectly printed on the cover] [BOX 49]


[HINDI / HINDUSTANI]

A Dictionary English and Hindoostanee to which is affixed a Grammar of the Hindoostanee Language, by John Gilchrist. Calcutta: printed by Stuart and Cooper, 1786, 1790. [BOX 46]

A dictionary, Hindustani and English, by John Shakespear. London: printed for the author, by Cox and Baylis, 1820. [BOX 7]

A Dictionary, Hindoostanee and English, abridged from the Quarto Edition of Major Joseph Taylor, as edited by the late W. Hunter, M.D., by William Carmichael Smyth. London: printed for the editor, 1820. [BOX 70]

A Dictionary, English and Hinduwee, by M.T. Adam. Calcutta: Printed at the School-Book Society's Press, 1833. [BOX 63]

An introduction to the Hindustani language comprising a grammar, and a vocabulary, English and Hindustani; also short stories and dialogues, short stories in Persian and Nagari characters with some grammatical analysis; Hindustani composition or facilities for translating English into Hindustanti and military words of command, Nagari and English, by John Shakespear. London: W. H. Allen & Co., 1845. [BOX 3]

A Dictionary, Hindustani & English: to which is added a reversed part, English and Hindustani, by Duncan Forbes. London: Wm. H. Allen and Co., 1848. [BOX 70]

Second edition, enlarged, 1866: A dictionary, Hindustani & English: accompanied by a reversed dictionary, English and Hindustani. The second edition, greatly enlarged., and much improved, by Duncan Forbes. London: W.H. Allen & Co., 1866. Second edition, enlarged and revised. [BOX 9]

A New Hindustani-English Dictionary, with illustrations from Hindustani Literature and Folk-Lore, by S. W. Fallon. Banaras; London: E. J. Lazarus and Co.; Trübner and Co., 1879. [BOX 56]

The English & Hindi Dictionary. An Etymological, Idiomatic and Illustrated Dictionary, by Thomas Craven. Lucknow: American Methodist Mission Press, 1882. [BOX 57]

A new English-Hindustani dictionary with illustrations from English literature and colloquial English, translated into Hindustani, by S.W. Fallon [1817-1880] and John Drew Bate. Banaras: Printed at the Banaras Medical Hall Press, sold by E.J. Lazarus, Barnaras and Trübner and Co., London, 1883. [BOX 32]

Hindustani Idioms with vocabulary and explanatory notes for the use of candidates for the higher standard, by A. N. Phillips. London: Kegan, Paul, Trench, Trübner and Co., 1892. [BOX 15]

An English-Hindustani Dictionary, by George S[peirs] A[alexander] Ranking. Calcutta: Thacker, Spink & Co., 1905. [BOX 22]

The Eng.-Hind. vocabulary of 3000 words for higher standard and proficiency candidates; or, "The right word in the right place," by D[ouglas] C[raven] Phillott [1860-1930]. Calcutta: Printed at the Baptist Mission Press, 1911. [BOX 28]

The Imperial Hindee and English Dictionary (with Pronunciations), by M. B. Trailokya. Bombay: Printed the Native Opinion Press, Girgaon, and published by Mokund Shantaram Naik, Girgaum, 1919. [BOX 24]

Abriss der Hindustani-Sprachlehre und deutsch-indisches Wörterverzeichnis, by the staff of the (Ind). I.R. 950. N.p. n.d. [circa 1910?] [BOX 34]

Guide to Hindustani. Lessons in Grammar. Key to Exercises. Vocabulary. Specially prepared for use in Fiji, by A. W. McMillan. Suva, Fiji: Government Press, 1947. [BOX 18]

Khindi-russkii slovar. okolo 35000 slov, by V[asilii] M[atveevich] Beskrovnyi. Moscow: Gos. izd-vo inostrannykh i natsional'nykh slovarei, 1953. [BOX 72]

Karmannyi russko-khindi slovar. 8000 slov, by Z[alman] M[ovshevich] Dymshits. Moscow: Gos. izd-vo inostrannykh i natsionalnykh slovarei, 1958. [BOX 47]

Karmannyi Khindi-russkii slovar. 9500 slov, by Z[alman] M[ovshevich] Dymshits. Moscow: Gos. izd-vo inostrannykh i natsionalnykh slovarei, 1958. [BOX 48]

The authentic senior dictionary, Anglo-Hindi, with over 1000 illustrations and about 1,70,000 references, comprising a modern English dictionary with correct pronunciations and accents in Devanagari script, definitions and explanations in English and Hindi, together with several useful appendices, B. C. Pathak, C. S. Pathak, and R[am] C[handra] Pathak. Varanasi: Hindi Pracharak Pustakalaya, 1958. [BOX 52]

The Oxford Progressive English-Hindi Dictionary. [transliteration] Oksafarda progresiva Angrezi-Hindi kosa, by S[hivendra] K[ishore] Verma & R.N. Sahai. Delhi: Oxford University Press, 1977. [BOX 55]

Build your Hindi vocabulary through English, by James R. Sookhoo. St. Augustine, Trinidad, W.I.: Industrial Laboratories Research, 1985. [BOX 2]

The Oxford Hindi-English Dictionary, ed. by R. S. McGregor. Oxford, Delhi: Oxford University Press, 1993. [BOX 74]

English Hindi Dictionary, by D. P. Pandey & V. P. Shamra. New Delhi: Indus, [1993]. [BOX 75]


[HMONG DAW] White Meo-English Dictionary, compiled by Ernest E. Heimbach. Ithaca, NY: Southeast Asia Program, Cornell University, 1969. [BOX 38]

Revised edition, 1979: White Hmong-English Dictionary, compiled by Ernest E. Heimbach. Ithaca, NY: Southeast Asia Program, Cornell University, 1979. [BOX 61]


[HMONG NJUA] A Dictionary of Mong Njua: a Miao (Meo) Language of Southeast Asia, by Thomas Amis Lyman. The Hague / Paris: Mouton, 1974. [BOX 35]

English-Mong-English Dictionary. Phoo Txhais lug Aakiv-Moob-Aakiv, by Lang xiong, Joua Xiong & Nao Leng Xiong. [Milwaukee, Wisconsin: published by the authors, printed by Hetrick Printing, Inc., 1983]. [BOX 19]


[HO] Ho Grammar (with vocabulary), by Lionel Burrows. Calcutta: Catholic Orphan Press, 1915. [BOX 63]


[HOKKIEN: see AMOY]


[HOLOHOLO] Esquisse de la langue Holoholo, by A. Coupez. Antwerp: Commission de Linguistique Africaine, 1955. [BOX 56]


[HOM-IDYOMO] Hom-idyomo: outline of an auxiliary international language without declinations and absolutely phonetic. Book first: practical grammar.--Book second: Hom-idyomo dictionary.--Book third: English and Hom-idyomo dictionary, by C[ipriano] Cardenas (1858- ). Leipzig: C. Cardenas, 1923. [BOX 2]


[HOPI] [Cover title] Ornithological vocabulary of the Moki Indians, by Edgar A[lexander] Mearns [1856-1916]. Washington, D.C.: Judd & Detweiler, Printers, 1896. [BOX 43]

Hopi domains: a lexical approach to the problem of selection, by Charles F[rederick] Voegelin [1906- ] & Flrorence M[arie Robinett] Voegelin [1927- ]. Baltimore: Waverly Press, 1957. [BOX 31]

"Hodge Hopi Lists (computed by P.D.S.) [Hopi-English & English-Hopi (draft]. [Cover title] "Hopi Lists, computed by P. D[avid] S[eaman] (HOPI-ENGLISH and ENG.-HOPI draft). 29 June 1982." Flagstaff, AZ: P. David Seaman, [1982]. [BOX 16]

Hopi Dictionary. Hopi-English English-Hopi. Grammatical Appendix, by P. David Seaman. Flagstaff, Arizona: Northern Arizona University, 1996. Revised edition. [BOX 16]

Hopi dictionary = Hopiikwa lavaytutuveni : a Hopi-English dictionary of the Third Mesa dialect with an English-Hopi finder list and a sketch of Hopi grammar, compiled by The Hopi Dictionary Project, Bureau of Applied Research in Anthropology, University of Arizona. Tucson: University of Arizona Press, 1998. [BOX 41]


[HOUAÏLOU: see AJIE] Vocabulaire et grammaire de la langue Houaïlou, by Maurice Leenhardt. Paris: Institut d'Ethnologie, 1935. [BOX 38]


[HUAVE, SAN MATEO DEL MAR] Diccionario huave de San Mateo del Mar, by Glenn Albert Stairs Kreger & Emily Florence Scharfe de Stairs. Mexico, D.F.: Instituto Linguistico de Verano, 1981. [BOX 25]


[HUITOTO, MI+NI+CA; HUITOTO, MURUI] Religion und Mythologie der Uitoto. Textaufnahmen und Beobachtungen bei einem Indianerstamm in Kolumbien, Südamerika, 2 vols., by Konrad Theodor Preuss [1869-1938]. Göttingen; Leipzig: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht; J. C. Hinrichs, 1921 1923. [BOX 32]


[HUITOTO, NO+PODE] Vocabulario Huitoto Muinane, compiled by Eugene E. Minor & Dorothy Hendrich de Minor. [Yarinachocha, Peru]: Instituto Linguistico de Verano, 1971. [BOX 25]


[HULA] The phonetics and grammar of the Hula language, with vocabulary and translation and notes of other dialects of the Hood Bay District, by Lillian Mary Theakston Short. Adelaide: Libraries Board of South Australia, 1965. [BOX 45]


[HUNDE: see also KIVU PGYMY] Vocabulaire Hunde / [Japanese characters: Fundego goisho], by Shigeki Kaji. Tokyo: Institute for the Study of Languages and Cultures of Asia and Africa (ILCAA), Tokyo University of Foreign Studies, 1992. [BOX 74]


[HURON] Le grand voyage du pays des Hurons: situé en l'Amérique vers la Mer douce, ès derniers confins de la Nouvelle France dite Canada avec un dictionnaire de la langue huronne par F. Gabriel Sagard Theodat... Nouv. ed.(two vols), published by Emile Chevalier. Paris: Librarie Tross, 1865. [Volume I BOX 17, Volume II BOX 49]


[IAAI] Dictionnaire Iaai-Français (Ouvéa, Nouvelle-Calédonie), suivi du'n lexique français-iaai, by Françoise Ozanne-Rivierre. Paris: Société d'Études Linguistiques et Anthropologiques de France (SELAF), 1984. [BOX 62]


[IBAN: see also under DAYAK, LAND]

A Dictionary of Sea Dayak, by N.C. Scott. London: School of Oriental and African Languages, University of London, 1956. [BOX 56]


[IBANI] Ibani bibi dawo diri. Studies in the Ibani Dialect of Ijo, by Adadonye Fombo. [Port Harcourt, Nigeria; Rivers State, Nigeria: University of Port Harcourt, Rivers Readers Project; Rivers State Council for Arts and Culture], 1975. [BOX 77]


[IBO: see IGBO]


[IDOMA] The Idoma language, Idoma wordlists, Idoma chrestomathy, Idoma proverbs, by R[oy] C[live] Abraham. Nigeria: Published by the author on behalf of the Idoma Native Administration, Government of Nigeria, 1951. [BOX 15]


[IGALA] "Two Dialects of Igala, and Yoruba: Some Comparisons," by E. M. Fresco, in: Research Notes from the Department of Linguistics and Nigerian Languages, University of Ibadan, pp. 32-46, June, 1968. [BOX 61]


[IGBO] English, Ibo and French Dictionary, by The Fathers of the Holy Ghost. Roman Catholic Mission, Onitsha, Southern-Nigeria. Salzburg: Missionary printing-office. of the Sodality of St. Peter Claver, 1904. [BOX 57]

Dictionary of Ibo Language: English-Ibo, [by Thomas John Dennis]. Lagos: Church Missionary Society Bookshop, 1923. [BOX 5]

Igbo Language Course(3 vols). Rev. G. E. Igwe & M. M. Green. Ibadan: Oxford University Press, 1967. [BOX 21]

Igbo: A Learner's Dictionary, by Beatrice F. Welmers & William E. Welmers. Los Angeles: [African Studies Center, University of California], 1968. [BOX 38]

Igbo-English Dictionary: A Comprehensive Dictionary of the Igbo Language, with an English-Igbo Index, by Michael J. C. Echeruo. New Haven and London: Yale University Press, 1998. [BOX 21]


[IGOROT] A Vocabulary of the Sagada Igorot Dialect, by William Henry Scott. [Chicago]: Philippine Studies Program, Department of Anthropology, University of Chicago, [1957]. [BOX 38]


[IJO, SOUTHEAST] A Nembe-English dictionary, 2 vols., by M. H. I. Kaliai. [Ibadan]: Institute of African Studies, University of Ibadan, 1964, 1966. [BOX 14]

Nembe Language Made Easy. Mie Lokomote Nembebibi, by L. Awotua Efebo. Ibadan: University of Ibadan, 1967. [BOX 65]


[ILA] A Handbook of the Ila Language (commonly called the Seshukulumbwe) spoken in North-western Rhodesia South-Central Africa comprising grammar, exercises, specimens of Ila tales, and vocabularies, by Edwin W. Smith. London, New York and Toronto: Henry Frowde, Oxford University Press, 1907. [BOX 64]


[ILOCANO] Ilocano. Ilocano-English / English/ Ilocano Dictionary and Phrasebook, by Carl. R. Galvez Rubino. New York: Hippocrene Books, 1998. [BOX 22]


[ILOKO: see ILOCANO]


[INDIA, LANGUAGES OF: POLYGLOT] Linguistic Survey of India, 11 volumes in 19, ed. by Sir G[eorge] A[braham] Grierson [1851-1941]. Calcutta: Office of the Superintendent of Government Printing, India, 1903-1927.

Volume I, Part I: Linguistic Survey of India. Vol. I. Part I. Introductory, by Sir George Abraham Grierson [1851-1941]. Calcutta: Government of India Central Publication Branch, 1927. [BOX 44]

Volume I, Supplement II: (issued separately): Linguistic Survey of India. Volume I. Supplement II. Addenda et Corrigenda Minora. Calcutta: Government of India Central Publication Branch, 1927. [BOX 44]

Volume I, Part II: Linguistic Survey of India. Vol. I. Part II. Comparative Vocabulary, by Sir George Abraham Grierson [1851-1941]. Calcutta: Government of India Central Publication Branch, 1928. [BOX 44]

Volume II: Linguistic Survey of India. Vol. II. MÇn-Khm'r and Siamese-Chinese Families (including Khassi and Tai), ed. by Sir G[eorge] A[braham] Grierson [1851-1941]. Calcutta: Office of the Superintendent of Government Printing, India, 1904. [BOX 44]

Volume III, Part II: Linguistic Survey of India. Vol. III. Tibeto-Burman Family. Part II. Specimens of the Bodo, Naga, and Kachin Groups, ed. by Sir G[eorge] A[braham] Grierson [1851-1941]. Calcutta: Office of the Superintendent, Government Printing, India, 1903. [BOX 44]

Volume IV: Linguistic Survey of India. Vol. IV. Munda and Dravidian Languages, ed. by Sir G[eorge] A[braham] Grierson [1851-1941], this volume prepared by Sten Konow. Calcutta: Office of the Superintendent of Government Printing, 1906. [BOX 44]

Volume V, Part I: Linguistic Survey of India. Vol. V. Indo-Aryan Family. Part I. Specimens of the Bangali and Assamese Languages, ed. by Sir G[eorge] A[brahma] Grierson [1851-1941]. Calcutta: Office of the Superintendent, Government Printing, India, 1903. [BOX 44]

Volume VI: Linguistic Survey of India. Vol. VI. Indo-Aryan Family. Mediate Group. Specimens of the Eastern Hindi Language, ed. by Sir G[eorge] A[braham] Grierson [1851-1941]. Calcutta: Office of the Superintendent of Government Printing, India, 1904. [BOX 44]

Volume VII: Linguistic Survey of India. Vol. VII. Indo-Aryan Family. Southern Group. Specimens of the Mar∼th§ Language, ed. by Sir G[eorge] A[braham] Grierson [1851-1941]. Calcutta: Office of the Superintendent of Government Printing, India, 1905. [BOX 45]

Volume IX, Part I: Linguistic Survey of India. Vol. IX. Indo-Ayran Family. Central Group. Part 1. Western Hindi and Panjabi, by Sir G[eorge] A[brahma] Grierson [1851-1941]. Calcutta: Superintendent Government Printing, 1916. [BOX 45]

Volume IX, Part II: Linguistic Survey of India. Vol. IX. Indo-Aryan Family. Central Group. Part II. Specimens of the Rajast∼n§ and Gujar∼t§, ed. by Sir G[eorge] A[braham] Grierson [1851-1941]. Calcutta: Superintendent Government Printing, India, 1908. [BOX 45]

Volume IX, Part III: Linguistic Survey of India. Vol. IX. Indo-Aryan Family. Central Group. Part III. The Bh§l Languages, including Kh∼nd's§, Banj∼r§ or Labh∼n§, Bahrãpi∼, &c., ed. by Sir G[eorge] A[braham] Grierson [1851-1941]. Calcutta: Office of the Superintendent of Government Printing, India, 1907. [BOX 45]

Volume XI: Linguistic Survey of India. Vol. XI. Gipsy Languages, ed. by Sir G[eorge] A[brahma] Grierson [1851-1941]. Calcutta: Superintendent Government Printing, India, 1922. [BOX 45]


[INDO-AYRAN LANGUAGES] A comparative dictionary of the Indo-Aryan languages, by R. Lister Turner. London: Oxford University Press, 1962-1969. [BOX 43]

Avahattha and comparative vocabulary of new Indo-Aryan languages, Tsuyoshi Nara. Tokyo: Institute for the Study of Languages and Cultures of Asia and Africa, 1979. [BOX 29]


[INDO-IRANIAN FRONTIER LANGUAGES] Ishkashmi, Zebaki, and Yazghulami: an Account of Three Eranian Dialects, by George A. Grierson. London: Royal Asiatic Society, 1920. [BOX 54]

Indo-Iranian Frontier Languages. Vol. II Iranian-Pamir Languages (Yidgha-Munji, Sanglechi-Ishkashmi, and Wakhi), by George Morgenstierne. Oslo: H. Aschehoug & Co. (W. Nygaard), 1938. [BOX 46]

Ishkashimskii Jazyk, by T.N. Paxalina. Moscow: Akadmii Nauk, 1959. [BOX 56]


[INDONESIAN] Woordenboek bahasa Indonesia-Nederlands, by H. D. van Pernis. Groningen; Jakarta: J.B. Wolters, 1950. [BOX 1]

Indonesisch-Nederlands woordenboek, by W. J. B. Poerwadarminta & A. Teeus. Groningen; Jakarta: J.B. Wolters, 1950. [BOX 1]

Van Goor's Pandu Bahasa. Indonesia-Inggeris dan Inggeris-Indonesia, compiled by Ach. Sulaiman. 's-Gravenhage: G.B. Van Goor Zonen, 1951. [BOX 57]

Van Goor's Concise Indonesian Dictionary. English-Indonesian. Indonesian-English = Van Goor's Kamus Inggeris Ketjil, by A.L.N. Kramer. The Hague / Jakarta: G.B. Van Goor Zonen, n.d. [1952]. [BOX 64]

Kamus Bahasa Indonesia-Inggeris dan Inggeris-Indonesia, by A[bdul] K[arim] Lathief. Cover Title: The New Method Dictionary. Indonesian-English and English-Indonesian. [Takamatsu, Japan]: Merapi Trading Company, 1953. [BOX 67]

Kamus Inggeris. Part I: English-Indonesian. Bagian I: Inggeris-Indonesia. Part II. Indonesian-English. Bagian II: Indonesia-Inggeris, 2 vols., by E. Pino & T. Wittermans. Jakarta / Gronigen: J. B. Wolters, 1955. Second edition. [BOX 67]

Moderne indonesische Ausdrücke. Nachtrag zum malaischen Wörterbuch, by Gerhard Kahlo [1893- ]. Berlin: Akademie-Verlag, 1956. 10/5/99. $25.00. Hackenberg Bookselles. [BOX 17]

An Indonesian-English Dictionary, by John M. Echols & Hassan Shadily. Ithaca, NY: Cornell University Press, 1961. [BOX 22]

An English-Indonesian Dictionary, by John M. Echols & Hassan Shadily. Ithaca and London: Cornell University Press, [1975]. [BOX 21]

Contemporary Indonesian-English Dictionary: a Supplement to the Standard Indonesian Dictionaries with Particular Concentration on New words, Expressions, and Meanings, by A. Ed. Schmidgall-Tellings & Alan M. Stevens. Athens, Ohio: Ohio University Press, 1981. [BOX 3]


[INGALIK: see DEGEXITAN]


[INGUSH] Russko-ingushskii slovar: 40000 slov, by I.. A. Ozdoev. Moscow: Russkii iazyk 1980. [BOX 78]


[INTERLINGUA] Interlingua-English: a dictionary of the international language, prepared by the research staff of the International Auxiliary Language Association under the direction of Alexander Gode. New York: Storm Publishers, 1951. [BOX 3]

Vocabularie Mathematic in Interlingue con traduction in angles (English_, frances (français) e german (Deutsch), by C. E. Sjöstedt. Uppsala: Interlingue-Fundation, 1970. [BOX 14]

Demographic Dictionary in Interlingua, English and French, ed. by Hannes Hyrenius, translations to Interlingua by John Nordin. Gothenburg: Demographic Institute, University of Gothenburg, Sweden, 1971. [BOX 22]


[INUKTITUT, GREENLANDIC] Den grønlandske ordbog, by Otto Fabricius [1744-1822]. Copenhagen: Carl Frid. Schubart, 1804. 10/8/98. DM900 (=$532) Theodor Ackerman, Munich. [BOX 72]

The Eskimo tribes. Their distribution and characteristics, especially as regards language. With a comparative vocabulary, and a map, by H[inrich] Rink [1819-1893]. London; Copenhagen: Williams and Norgate; C.A. Reitzel, 1887. 12/14/99. [BOX 29]

Dictionary of the West Greenland Eskimo Language, by [Christian Wilhelm] Schultz-Lorentzen [1873- ]. Copenhagen: C. A. Reitzel, 1927. [BOX 30]

Five Hundred Eskimo Words. A Comparative Vocabulary from Greenland and Central Eskimo Dialects, by Kaj Birket-Smith. Copenhagen: Gyldendalske Boghandel, Nordisk Forlag, 1928. [BOX 35]


[INUKTITUT, WESTERN CANADIAN] Across the sub-Arctics of Canada, a journey of 3,200 miles by canoe and snow-shoe through the barren lands. Including a list of plants collected on the expedition, a vocabulary of Eskimo words, a route map and full classified index. With illustrations from photographs taken on the journey, and from drawings by Arthur Heming, by J[ames] W[illiams] Tyrrell. Toronto: Williams Briggs, 1897. [BOX 29]

American issue, 1898: Across the sub-Arctics of Canada, a journey of 3,200 miles by canoe and snow-shoe through the barren lands. Including a list of plants collected on the expedition, a vocabulary of Eskimo words, a route map and full classified index. With illustrations from photographs taken on the journey, and from drawings by Arthur Heming, by J[ames] W[illiams] Tyrrell. New York: Dodd, Mead and Co., 1898. [BOX 27]

Report of the Canadian Arctic Expedition 1913-18. Volume XV: Eskimo Language and Technology. Part A: Comparative Vocabulary of the Western Eskimo Dialects. Southern Party- 1913-16, by D[iamond] Jenness. Ottawa: F. A. Acland, 1928. [BOX 10]

English-Eskimo, Eskimo-English dictionary, by Arthur Thibert. Ottawa: Research Center of Amerindian Anthropology, University of Ottawa, 1954. [BOX 33]

French translation, 1955: Français-Esquimau Dictionnaire Esquimau-Français, by Arthur Thibert. Ottawa: Centre de Recherches d'Anthropologie Amérindienne, Université d'Ottawa, 1955. [Box 15]

Revised English edition, 1958: English-Eskimo, Eskimo-English dictionary. Revised Edition, by Arthur Thibert. Ottawa: Research Center of Amerindian Anthropology, University of Ottawa, 1958. [BOX 33]

Dictionnaire alphabético-syllabique du langage esquimau de l'Ungava, et contrées limitrophes, by Lucien Schneider. Quebec: Presses de l'Université Laval, 1966. [BOX 13]

Second, augmented edition (1970): Dictionnaire esquimau-français du parler de l'Ungava et contrées limitrophes. Nouvelle édition augmentée, by Lucien Schneider. Quebec: Presses de l'Université Laval, 1970. [BOX 28]

English language edition (1985): Ulirnaisigutiit. An Inuktitut-English Dictionary of Northern Quebec, Labrador and Eastern Arctic Dialects (with an English-Inuktitut Index), by Lucien Schneider, trans. from the French and transliterated by Dermot Ronan F. Collis. Quebec: Les Presses de l'Université Laval, 1985. [BOX 4]

Dictionnaire français-esquimau du parler de l'Ungava et contrées limitrophes, by Lucien Schneider. Quebec: Presses de l'Université Laval, 1970. [BOX 13]

Kangiryuarmiut uqauhingita numiktittitdjutingit. Basic Kangiryuarmiut Eskimo dictionary, by Roanld Lowe. Inuvik, Northwest Territories: Committee for Original Peoples Entitlement, 1983. [BOX 36]


[INUKTITUT, NORTH ALASKAN] English-Eskimo and Eskimo-English vocabularies, preceded by Ethnographical Memoranda concerning the Arctic Eskimos in Alaska and Siberia, by Roger Wells & John W. Kelly. Washington, D.C.: Government Printing Office, 1890. [BOX 11]

Inupiat Eskimo dictionary, by Donald H[umphry] Webster [1930- ] & Wilfried Zibell. Fairbanks, Alaska: Summer Institute of Linguistics, 1970. Also, a second copy. [BOX 4]


[IRAQI ARABIC] Colloquial Arabic of Iraq. Grammar, Exercises and Vocabulary, by Peter Hayes. [Beirut: The Catholic Press], 1956. [BOX 17]

ALSO: A Dictionary of Iraqi Arabic: Arabic-English, ed. by D. R. Woodhead & Wayne Beene. Washington, D.C.: Georgetown University Press, [1967]. [BOX 20]


[IROQUOIAN: see also DELAWARE; HURON] Lexique de la langue iroquoise, by J[ean] A[ndré] Cuoq [1821-1898]. Montreal: J. Chapleau & fils, 1882. [BOX 79]

Second edition, 1883: Lexique de la langue iroquoise, avec notes et appendices, by J[ean] A[ndre] Cuoq [1821-1898], Prétre de St.-Suplice. Montreal: J. Chapleau & fils, [1883]. [BOX 26]


[IRULA] Phonology of Irula with vocabulary, R. Perialwar. Annamalainagar: Annamalai University, 1979. [BOX 33]


[ISHKASHMI: see INDO-IRANIAN FRONTIER LANGUAGES]


[ISNAG] Isneg-English Vocabulary, by Morice Vanoverbergh. [Honolulu]: University of Hawaii Press, 1972. [BOX 66]. A second copy, signed by the author. [BOX 20]


[ITAWIT] Itawis-English Wordlist with English-Itawis Finderlist, by James A. Tharp & Mateo C. Natividad. New Haven, Conn. : Human Relations Area Files, 1976. [BOX 77]


[ITZAJ] Itzaj Maya-Spanish-English Dictionary. Diccionario Maya Itzaj-Español-Ingles, by Charles Andrew Hofling & Félix Fernando Tesucún. Salt Lake City, Utah: The University of Utah Press, 1997. [BOX 6]


[IXCATECO] Diccionario ixcateco, by Teresa Fernádez de Miranda. Mexico City: Instituto Nacional de Antropologia e Historia, 1961. [BOX 67]


[IXIL, CHAJUL] A' u u' uva'a uva' molel ca ink'a kuyolb'al atz tuch' yolb'al castiiya. Diccionario ixil de Chajul-espanol, espanol-ixil de Chajul, by Dwight David Jewett & Marcos Willis. [Guatemala]: Instituto Linguistico de Verano, 1996. [BOX 13]

Diccionario ixil de San Gaspar Chajul. Ixil-espanol, by Lucas Asicona Ramirez. Guatemala: Proyecto Linguistico Francisco Marroquin, 1998. [BOX 25]


[IXIL, NEBAJ] Diccionario del idioma ixil. Ixil Español. [Cover title] Diccionario del idioma ixil de Santa María Nebaj, by Antonio Cedillo Chel & Juan Ramirez. Antigua, Guatemala: Proyecto Linguistico Francisco Marroquin, 1998. [BOX 12]


[IXIL, SAN JUAN COTZAL] Aq'b'al elu'l yol vatzsaj = Diccionario ixil. San Juan Cotzal [Guatemala]: El Programa, 1995. [BOX 6]


[JABAL NAFUSAH] Il berbero Nefusi di Fassato: grammatica, testi raccolti dalla viva voce, vocabolarietti. 2. edizione, riveduta e migliorata, by Francsco Beguinot [1979-1953]. Rome: Istituto per l'Oriente, 1942. [BOX 11]


[JACALTECO] Diccionario del idioma jakalteko, by José Ramírez Pérez, Andrés Montejo, and Baltasar Díaz Hurtado. La Antigua Guatemala: Proyecto Linguistico Francisco Marroquin, 1996. [BOX 23]

Diccionario Hak'xub'al-Kastiya. Español-Jacalteko. Un diccionario de hablantes, by Eleanore frankle Hecht. Mexico City: Potrerillos Editores, 1998. [BOX 9]


[JAMAICAN ENGLISH] Dictionary of Jamaican English, ed. by F.G. Cassidy & R.B. Le Page. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1967. [BOX 19]


[JAVANESE] Een klein woordenboek der Hollandsche, Engelsche en Javaansche talen: A vocabulary of the Dutch, English and Javanese languages, by G[ottlob] Bruckner. Batavia: Parapattan, 1842. [BOX 16] [BOX 27]

Javaansch-Nederduitsch Woordenboek, compiled by J[ohann] F[riedrich] C[arl] Gericke, enlarged and improved by T[aco] Roorda. Amsterdam: Johannes Müller, 1847. [BOX 33]

Javaansch-Nederduitsch Handwoordenboek, by J[ohann] F[riedrich] C[arl] Gericke, continued by T[aco] Roorda and A[lbert] C[ornelius] Vreede. Amsterdam: Johannes Müller, 1875. [BOX 19]. A second copy, binding variant [BOX 66]

Supplement op het Javaansch-Nederduitsch handwoordenboek van Gericke-Roorda, by P[ieter] Jansz (1820-1904). Samarang; Amsterdam: G.C.T. van Dorp; Scheltema & Holkema's Boekhandel, 1883. [BOX 33]

Praktische Grammatik der Javanischen Sprache mit Lesestücken, einem javanisch-deutschen und deutsch-javanischen Wörterbuch, by H[anns] Bohatta. Vienna; Pest; Leipzig: A. Hartleben's Verlag, [1892]. [BOX 57]

Javaansche woordenlijst bevattende woorden in Midden-Java in gebruik vergeleken met het Javaansch in de residentie Soerakarta, by H. A. de Nooy with the assistance of Mas Padmasoesastra. 's Gravenhage: Nijhoff, 1893. [BOX 36]

Nederlandsch-javaansch woordenboek. Vijfde weder vermeerderde druk, by P[ieter] Jansz (1820-1904). Semarang: G. C. T. van Dorp & Co., [1899]. [BOX 9]

Javaans-nederlands handwoordenboek, compiled by Th[eodore] [Gauthier] Pigeaud.[1899- ].Groningen; Batavia: Bij J. B. Wolters uitgevers-maatschappij n. v.,: 1938. [BOX 1]

Nederlands-Javaans en Javaans-Nederlands Zakwoordenboekje, voorafgegaan door een kort begrip van de Javaanse spraakkunst, compiled by Th[eodore] [Gauthier] Pigeaud. Groningen: J.B. Wolters, 1948. [BOX 17]


[JAWSHAQAN: see PERSIAN DIALECTS]


[JIBBALI] Jibbali Lexicon, by T.M. Johnstone. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1981. [BOX 8]


[JINGPHO] A dictionary of the Kachin language, by O[la] Hanson [1864-1929]. Rangoon: American Baptist Mission Press, 1906. [BOX 13]


[JIVARO] Gramatica teorico-practica y vocabulario de la lengua jibara, by Juan Ghinassi. Quito, Ecuador: Talleres graficos de educacion, 1938. [BOX 15]


[JUKUN] Jukun of Wukari and Jukun of Takum, by William E[verett] Welmers. Ibadan: Institut of African Studies, University of Ibadan, 1968. [BOX 67]


[JUR] Dizionario Giur-Italiano-Inglese, by Gaetano Briani. Verona: Editrice Nigrizia, 1953. [BOX 64]


[KABARDIAN] Kabardinsko-russkii slovar, by B[uba] M[atsikovich] Kardanov. Moscow: Gos idz-vo inostrannykh i natsionalnykh slovarei, 1957. [BOX 48]


[KABI] Vocabularies of the Four Representative Tribes of South Eastern Queensland [Kabi, Yugumbir, Yugarabul, Wakka] with Grammatical Notes thereof and some Notes on Manners and Customs. Also A List of Aboriginal Place Names and their Derivations, by F. J. Watson. Supplement to Journal of the Royal Geographical Society of Australasia (Queensland), No. 34, Vol. XLVIII, n.d. [1958]. [BOX 19]. A second copy, with some discoloration around the edges of the first few pages. [BOX 19]


[KABYLE] Lexique Kabyle-français: glossaire extrait de la deuxième année de langue Kabyle, by A. S. Boulifa. Alger: Adolphe Jourdan, 1913. [BOX 23]


[KACHIN: see JINGPHO]


[KADUGLI] Kadugli Language and Language Usage, by Abdalla Ibrahim Abdalla. University of Khartoum, 1969. [BOX 37]


[KAFIR: see ZULU]


[KAILI, LEDO] Handleiding voor de eoefening der Ledo-taal inleiding, teksten met vertaling en aanteekeningen en woordenlijst, S[amuel] J[onathan] Esser [1900-1944]. Bandoeng: A.C. Nix & Co., 1934. 1/25/99. Fl65 (=$33). Gert Jan Bestebreurtje. [BOX 33]


[KALENJIN] Kalenjin-English Dictionary, by C[harles] C. Ng'elechei. Nairobi: Thomson Press, [1972]. [BOX 23]


[KALIHNA] Dictionnaire galibi. Dictionarium gallice, latine et galibi. Digestum e libro: Dictionnaire galibi, presente sous deux formes, 1 commencant par le mot françois, 2 par le mot galibi, precédé d'un essai de grammaire, [by M. de (Simon Philibert) La Salle de l'Etang [ca. 1700-1765]], ed. by Fr. Ph. de Martius [Karl Friedrich Philipp von Martius, 1794-1868]. n.p., n.d. [ca. 1860]. [BOX 3]


[KALULI] Bosavi-English-Tok Pisin dictionary (Papua New Guinea). Bosabi towo:liya: Ingilis towo:liya: Pisin towo:liya: bugo: Tok ples Bosavi, Tok Inglis, na Tok Pisin diksineli, by Bambi B. Schieffeln & Steven Feld.. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics, 1998. [BOX 49]


[KAMAS] Kai Donners Kamassisches Wörterbuch, nebst Sprachproben und Hauptzügen der Grammatik, edited by A[ulis] J[ohannes] Joki. Helsinki: Suomalais-Ugrilainen Seura, 1944. [BOX 3]


[KAMBA: see also BANTU LANGUAGES] Vocabularies of the Kamba and Kikuyu languages of East Africa, by Hildegarde [Beatrice Ginsburg] Hinde (Mrs. Sidney L. Hinde). Cambridge [Eng.]: University Press, 1904. 8/14/2000. $130. Harvest Book Company. [BOX 7]

English-Kamba Vocabulary, compiled by John S. Mbiti. Nairobi: Eagle Press, 1959. [BOX 61]


[KAMBERA (EAST SUMBA): see SUMBA]


[KAMILAROI] Kámilarói, and other Australian languages. Second edition, revised and enlarged by the author; with comparative tables of words from twenty Australian languages, and songs, traditions, laws and customs of the Australian race, by William Ridley. Sydney: T. Richards, government printer, 1875. [BOX 31]

A Reference Dictionary of Gamilaraay, Northern New South Wales, by Peter Austin. Bundoora, Australia: La Trobe University, Department of Linguistics, 1993. [BOX 37]

Yuwaalaraay / Gamilaraay Wordlist, ed. by John Giacon. Walgett, N.S.W., Australia: Walgett High School, Yuwaalaraay-Gamilaraay Language Program, 1999. [BOX 39]


[KANARESE: see KANNADA]


[KANJOBAL, EASTERN] Diccionario del idioma q'anjob'al, by Diego de Diego Antonio, et al. La Antigua Guatemala: Proyecto Linguistico Francisco Marroquin, 1996. [BOX 23]


[KANJOBAL, WESTERN] Diccionario akateko-espanol, by Domingo Andrés, Karen Dakin, José Juan, Leandro López, & Fernando Peñalosa. Rancho Palos Verdes, Calif. : Ediciones Yax Te, 1996. 4/15/99. $20.00. Libros Latinos. [BOX 23]


[KANNADA] A Dictionary, Canarese and English, by W[illiam] Reeve, revised, corrected and enlargedby Daniel Sanderson. Bangalore: Printed at the Weselyn Mission Press, 1858. [BOX 59]

A Kannada-English Dictionary, by F[erdinand] Kittel. Mangalore: Basel Mission book and tract depository, 1894. [BOX 69]

Halakki Kannada, by A. S. Acharya. Poona: Deccan College, 1967. [BOX 21]


[KANURI, YERWA] African native literature, or Proverbs, tales, fables, & historical fragments in the Kanuri or Bornu language. To which are added a translation of the above and a Kanuri-English vocabulary, by S[igismund] W[ilhelm] Koelle. London: Church Missionary House, 1854. [BOX 29]

A Study of the Kanuri Language: Grammar and Vocabulary, by Johannes Lukas. London, New York, Tornoto: Published for the International Institute of African Languages & Cultures by Oxford University Press, 1937. [BOX 64]

Dictionary of the Kanuri Language, ed. by Norbert Cyffer & John Hutchison. Dordrecht, Holland ; Providence, RI, U.S.A : Nigeria : Foris Publications ; University of Maiduguri, 1990. [BOX 20]


[KAPAMPANGAN] Kapampangan Dictionary, by Michael L. Forman. Honolulu: University of Hawaii Press, 1971. [BOX 27]


[KAPAUKU: see EKARI]


[KAPINGAMARANGI] Kapingamarangi Lexicon, by Michael D. Lieber & Kalio H. Dikepa. Honolulu: University Press of Hawaii, 1974. [BOX 20]


[KARA: see YULU]


[KARACHAY-BALKAR] Russko-Karachaevo-balkarskii slovar: okolo 35 000 slov, by I[bragim] K[hadzhi-Muratovich] Suiunchev & Kh. O. Urusbiev. Moscow: Izdatelstvo Sovetskaia Entsiklopediia, 1965. [BOX 49]


[KARAKALPAK] Karakalpaksko-russkii slovar: olkolo 30000 slovar, by N[ikolai] A[leksandrovich] Baskakov. Moscow: Gos. izd-vo inostrannykh i natsionalnykh slovarei, 1958. [BOX 55]


[KARANG: see MALIMBA]


[KARANKAWA: see also COAHUILTECO] The Karankawa Indians, the coast people of Texas, by Albert S[amuel] Gatschet (1832-1907]. Cambridge, Mass.: Peabody Museum of American Archæology and Ethnology, 1891. [BOX 36]


[KARIRI-XOCÓ] Matériaux pour servir a l'établissement d'une grammaire comparée des dialectes de la famille Kariri, by Lucien Adam. Paris: J. Maisonneuve, 1897. [BOX 37]


[KASHMIRI] English-Kashmiri. A Vocabulary of the Kashmiri Language, by Ernest F[rederic] Neve. Mysore City: The Wesley Press and Publishing House, n.d. [c. 1935]. [BOX 55]


[KÂTE] Wörterbuch der Kâte-Sprache gesprochen in Neuguinea. Dictionary of the Kâte-Language as spoken by New-Guinea, Christian Keysser. Berlin; Hamburg: Verlag von Dietrich Reimer (Ernst Vohsen); C. Boysen, 1925. [BOX 63]


[KATEMBRI: see CHICHIMECA PAME, NORTHERN]


[KATTANG: see WORIMI]


[KATU: see KATUIC]


[KATUIC-BRU, KUI, PAKOH, KATU]: Katuic Comparative Dictionary, by Ilia Peiros. Canberra: The Australian National University, 1996. [BOX 62]


[KAURNA] Outlines of a Grammar, Vocabulary, and Phraseology of the Aboriginal Language of South Australia spoken by the Natives in and for Some Distance around Adelaide, by Christian Gottlieb Teichelmann & Clamor Wilhelm Schürmann. Adelaide: Published by the authors at the Native Location, 1840. [BOX 65]


[KAUVERAVISH] "Expeditie naar het Nassau-Gebergte in Centraal Noord Nieuw Guinee," by Ch. Le Roux. 1926. [BOX 22]


[KAW: see AKHA]


[KAWAIISU] Kawaiisu: A Grammar and Dictionary with Texts, by Maurice L. Zigmond, Curtis G. Booth, & Pamela Munro. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1991. [BOX 36]


[KAWESQAR] Analytical and Critical Bibliography of the Tribes of Tierra del Fuego and adjacent Territory, by John M[ontgomery] Cooper. Washington, D.C.: Government Printing Office, 1917. [BOX 26]


[KAWI] Oudjavaansch-Nederlandsche Wordenlijst, by H[endrik] H[erman] Juynboll. Leiden: E. J. Brill, 1923. [BOX 51]


[KAZAKH] Russko-kazakhskii slovar. 50000 slov, by N. T. Sauranbaev. Moscow: Gos. izd-vo inostrannykh i natsionalnykh slovarei, 1954. [BOX 31]

Oryssha-qazaqsha sozdik: 65.000 soz. I Tom (A-O). II Tom (O-a), by G[ainetdin] G[alievich] Musabaev. Two. vols. Additional title page: Russko-kazakhskii slovar. Almaty: Qazaq Sovet Entsiklopediiasynyng bas redaktsiiasy, 1978 1981. [BOX 49]


[KEKCHI] A Fragment of an Early K'ekchi' Vocabulary with Comments on the Cultural Content, ed. By Ray A. Freeze. Columbia, Missouri: University of Missouri-Columbia, 1975. [BOX 7]

Diccionario q'eqchi', by Miguel Sam Juarez, Ernesto Chen Cao, Crisanto Xal Tec, Domingo Cuc Chen, & Pedro Tiul Pop. La Antigua Guatemala: Proyecto Linguistico Francisco Marroquin : K'ulb'il Yol Twitz Paxil, 1997. [BOX 23]


[KEREWO: see PAPUA NEW GUINEA LANGUAGES]


[KET] M. Alexander Castrén's Versuch einer Jenissei-ostjakischen und kottischen Sprachlehre nebst Wörterverzeichnissen aus den genannten Sprachen, edited by Anton Schiefner. St. Petersburg: Buchdruckerei der Kaiserlichen Akademie der Wissenschaften,1858. [BOX 10]


[KHALKHA: see MONGOLIAN]


[KHANTY] Über die Sprache, Nord-Ostjaken: Sprachtexte, Wörtersammlung und Grammatik, by August [Engelbrekt] Ahlqvist. Helsingfors: G.W. Edlund, 1880. [BOX 10]

Ocherki dialektov khantyiskogo iazyka. [Description of the Dialects of the Language Khanty], by N[ikolai] I[vanovich]Tereshkin. Leningrad: Izd-vo Akademii nauk SSSR, 1961. [BOX 48]


[KHARIA] Introduction to the Kharia Language, by Gagan Chandra Banerjee. Calcutta: Printed at the Bengal Secretariat Press, 1894. [BOX 63]

Kharia. Phonology, Grammar and Vocabulary, by Hemmige Shriniwasarangachar Biligiri. Poona: [Deccan College Postgraduate and Research Institute], 1965. [BOX 56]


[KHMER, CENTRAL] Dictionnaire khmer-français, E[tienne François] Aymonier [1844- ]. Saigon: 1878. [BOX 45]

Contemporary Cambodian Glossary, by Kem Soss, Lim Hak Kheang & Madeline E. Ehrman. Washington, D.C.:Foreign Service Institute, US Department of State, 1975. [BOX 5]

Kratkii Russko-Kkhmerskii slovar. 2 700 slov, by Long Seam & R.S. Plam. Moscow: "Russkii iazyk", 1987. [BOX 48]

Cambodian-English English-Cambodian Dictionary, [by Kim Sos, Lim Hak Kheang, & Madeline E. Ehram]. New York: Hippocrene Books, [1990]. [BOX 63]

Tuttle Practical Cambodian Dictionary. English-Cambodian. Cambodian-English, by David Smyth & Tran Kien. Rutland, Vermont: Charles E. Tuttle, 1995. [BOX 5]

An English-Spoken Khmer Dictionary with Romanized Writing System, Usage and Idioms, and Notes on Khmer Grammar and Speech, by Allen P.K. Keesee. London and New York: Kegan Paul International, 1996. [BOX 3]


[KHOWAR] Grammar and Vocabulary of the Khowar Dialect (Chitrali). Third edition, by D[onatus] J[ames] T[homond] O'Brien. Delhi: Manager of Publications, 1937. Third edition. [BOX 3]


[KHUF: see SHUGHNI]


[KHWAREZMIAN] a Fragment of a Khwarezmian Dictionary, by the late W[alter] B[runo] Henning, edited by D. N. MacKenzie. London: Lund Humphries, 1971. 9/14/98. $33.00. G. J. Askins. [BOX 23]


[KHYANG] Les Khyang des collines de Chittagong (Pakistan oriental), Matériaux pour l'étude linguistique des Chin, by Densie and Lucien Bernot. Paris: Plon, 1958. [BOX 67]


[KIKAPOO] Kickapoo vocabulary, by Paul H. Voorhis. Winnipeg: Algonquian and Iroquoian Linguistics, 1988. [BOX 14]


[KIKUYU: see GIKUYU]


[KILIVILA] Kilivila: The Language of the Trobriand Islanders, Gunter Senft. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter, 1986. [BOX 70]


[KILIWA] Kiliwa Dictionary, By Mauricio J. Mixco. Salt Lake City: University of Utah Press, 1985. [BOX 69]


[KILOLO: see MONGO]


[KIMBUNDU: see MBUNDU]


[KIM MUN] The Mun language of Hainan Island: its classified lexicon = Hai-nan tao Men yu fen lei tzu hui chi, Tadahiko Shintani [1946- ] & Shao Yang. Tokyo: Institute for the Study of Languages and Cultures of Asia and Africa (ILCAA), 1990. 10/15/98. $38.00. Elm City Books. [BOX 31]


[KINAI] Leopold Radloff's Wörterbuch der Kinai-Sprache, ed. by A[nton] Schiefner [1817-1879]. St. Petersburg: Académie Impériale des Sciences, 1874. [BOX 3]


[KINIASSA: see MAMBA]


[KIOWA] Vocabulary of the Kiowa Language, by John P. Harrington. Washington, DC: Government Printing Office, 1928. [BOX 73]


[KIRIBATI] A Gilbertese-English dictionary, by Hiram Bingham [1831-1908]. Boston: American Board of Commissioners for Foreign Missions, 1908. [BOX 11]

A Gilbertese Grammar and Vocabulary, edited by a member of The Sacred-Heart-Mission. [printed in Tilburg, Holland]: Catholic-Mission Gilbert Islands (Central Pacific), n.d. [c. 1927]. [BOX 55]

The Structure of Gilbertese, by Reid Cowell. Beru, Gilbert Islands: Rongorongo Press, 1951. [BOX 18]

Gilbertese-English Dictionary, originally compiled in French by E. Sabatier, and translated [into English] by Sister Oliva. Tarawa: Sacred Heart Mission, 1971. [BOX 18]


[KIRMANJKI: see POLYGLOT: WORLD LANGUAGES]


[KISWAHILI: see SWAHILI]


[KITUBA: see CONGO LANGUAGES, POLYGLOT]


[KIVU PGYMY] I. Expedition zu den Zentralafrikanischen Kivu-Pygm¨a;en. I. Die physische und soziale Umwelt der Kivu-Pygm¨a;men (Twiden), by Peter Schumacher. Brussels: Librarie Falk, succ. Georges van Campenhout, 1949. [BOX 38]


[KLAMA: see DANGME]


[KLAMATH] The Klamath Indians of Southwestern Oregon, by Albert Samuel Gatschet. Washington, D.C.: Government Printing Office, 1890. [BOX 79]

Klamath Dictionary, by M[uhammad] A[bd-al-]R[ahman] Barker. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1963. [BOX 18]


[KOASATI] Koasati Dictionary, by Geoffrey D. Kimball. Lincoln: The University of Nebraska Press, 1994. [BOX 70]


[KODAGU] Phonology of Kodagu with vocabulary, by Ramaswami Balakrishnan [1943- ]. Annamalainagar: Annamalai University, 1976. [BOX 27]


[KOHISTANI, INDUS] Vocabularies and Specimens of some S.E. Dardic Dialects, by F. Barth and G[eorge] Morgenstierne. Offprint from Norsk Tidsskrift for Sprogenvidenskap, Olso, Vol. 18 (1958), pp. [118]-136. [BOX 10]

Kanyawali: Proben eines Maiya-Dialektes aus Tangir (Hindukusch), by Georg Buddruss. Munich: In Kommission bei J. Kitzinger, 1959.]. [BOX 2]


[KOHISTANI, SHINA: see SHINA]


[KOIARI] A First Dictionary of Koiari, by Tom Dutton. Canberra: The Australian National University, 1991. [BOX 62]


[KOL] Grammar of the Kol Language, by A[lfred] Nottrott [1837-1924], trans. by Paul Wagner, with an appendix of phrases by A. G. F. Fitzgerald. Ranchi: G. E. L. Mission Press, 1905. [BOX 24]


[KOLA] Koelawische taalstuden. Deel 1. Overzicht der spraakkunst, gesprekken en verhalen met verhalen met vertaling.- deel 2. Aanteekeningen bij de teksten in deel l met etymologisch aanhangsel.- deel 3. Nederlandsch-koelawisch-lindoesche woordenlijst. 3 vols., by N[icholaus] Adriani [1865-1926]& S[amuel] J[onathan] Esser [1900- ]. Bandoeng: Nix, 1939. [BOX 29]


[KOMBE] Diccionario Español-Kômbè, by L[eoncio] Fernádez. Madrid: Instituto de Estudios Africanos, 1951. [BOX 20]


[KOMI-PERMYAK: see KOMI-ZYRIAN]


[KOMI-ZYRIAN] Syrj¨a;nisch-deutsches Wörterbuch nebst einem wotjakishch-deutschen im Anhange und einem deutschen Register, by F[erdiand J[ohann] Wiedemann [1805-1887]. St. Petersbur: Commissionare der Kaiserlichen Akademie der Wissenschaften, 1880. [BOX 28]


[KONGO] Collecção de observações grammaticaes sobre a lingua bunda, ou angolense, by Bernardo Maria de Cannecattim. Lisbon: na Impressào Regia, 1859: Collecção de observações grammaticaes sobre a lingua bunda, ou angolense e Diccionario abreviado da lingua congueza. Segunda edição, by Bernardo Maria de Cannecattim. Lisbon: Imprensa Nacional, 1859. [BOX 18]

Dictionary and grammar of the Kongo language, as spoken at San Salvador, the ancient capital of the old Kongo empire, West Afrika [and Appendix] Compiled and prepared for the Baptist mission on the Kongo River, West Africa, 2 vols., by W. Holman Bentley. London: The Baptist Missionary Society and Trübner & Co., 1887, 1895. [BOX 72]

Petit Vocabulaire Français-Congolais Congolais-Français. Extrait d'une grammaire Française en congolais, by Madame Bentley. Wathen, Lutete: Baptist Missionary Society, 1904. [BOX 65]

La langue congolaise: grammaire, vocabulaire systematique, phrases graduees et lectures, by A[ugust] Seidel [1863-1916] & I[von] Struyf. Paris: Jules Groos, 1910. [BOX 29]


[KONKANI] A Dictionary of Concanim into English, by Aeixo Caetano Jose Francisco. Bombay: R. Anthony Lobo, [1916]. Lacking last four pages. [BOX 57]

Konknni-Inglish Shabd-Sangraha (Konkani-English Vocabulary), by Sylvester Menezes. Manglaore: [Printed by the Codiyalbail Press, Manglore, and Published by Rev. C. C. A. Pai, S. J.], 1967. [BOX 57]

Vocabulario de lingoa Canarina com versam portugueza. Lisbon: Junta de Invertigações do Ultramar, 1973. [BOX 6]


[KPELLE, GUINEA] I. - R. P. J. Casthelain. La Langue Guerzé. Grammaire (p. 7) - Dictionnaire (p. 105). II. - R. P. P. Lassort. Grammaire Guerzé (p. 303). Dakar: IFAN, 1952. [BOX 78]


[KPELLE, LIBERIA] The Kpelle Language in Liberia. Grammatical Outline. Colloquial Sentences and Vocabulary, by D[iedrich] Westermann & H[ans] J[oachim] Melzian. Berlin: Dietrich Reimer / Ernst Vohsen, 1930. [BOX 61]


[KRACHI: see AWUTU]


[KRIO] A Krio-English Dictionary, compiled by Clifford N. Fyle & Eldred D. Jones. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1980. [BOX 77]


[KRU] "'Le Langaige de Guynee': A Sixteenth Century Vocabulary from the Pepper Coast," by David Dalby and P.E.H. Hair, in: African Language Studies V, Collected Papers in Oriental and African Studies. London: School of Oriental and African Studies, University of London, 1964, pp. [115]-191. [BOX 26]


[KUANUA]

A New Guinea Language Book (Blanche Bay Dialect), compiled by J. H. L[awry] Waterhouse. Sydney: Australian National Research Council / Australasian Medical Publishing Company, 1939. [BOX 15]

A dictionary of the Raluana language (New Britain, S.W. Pacific). Raluana-English, with an Introduction and English-Raluana Index, by Peter A. Lanyon-Orgill. Victoria, B.C.: Published by the author, 1960. [BOX 12]

[KUI (Mon Khmer family): see KATUIC]


[KUI (Dravidian family)] Kuvinga Bassa. The Khond language as spoken by the Parjas (and kindred tribes) of the Madras Presidency, by A. G. Fitzgerald. Calcutta: [Printed and Published for for Proprietor by M. Apel, at The Catholic Orphan Press], 1913. [BOX 3]


[KUMAK] La langue des Nenemas et des Nigoumak (Dialectes de Poum et de Koumac, Nouvelle Caledonie), by André-G[eorges] Haudricourt. Auckland: Linguistic Society of New Zealand, 1963. [BOX 31]


[KUMIÁI] Dictionary of Mesa Grande Diegueño. 'Lipay Aa-English / English - 'Lipay Aa, by Ted Couro and Christina Hutcheson, with introduction and notes by Margaret Langdon. Illustration by Leanne Hinton. Morongo Indian Reservation, Banning, California: Malki Museum Press, 1973. [BOX 41]


[KUMZARI] The Kumzari dialect of the Shihuh tribe, Arabia and a vocabulary, Bertram Thomas [1892- ]. London: The Royal Asiatic society, 1930. [BOX 11]


[KUNA, BORDER] Ethno-linguistic Cuna dictionary, with indices and references to A critical and comparative Cuna grammar (Etnologiska studier 14) and The grammatical sketch in Cuna chrestomathy (Etnologiska studier 18), by Nils M[agnus] Holmer [1904- ]. Goteborg: Etnografiska Museet, 1952. [BOX 34]


[KUNA, SAN BLAS] Grammar and Glossary of the Tule Language of Panama, by J. Dyneley Prince. Lancaster, Penn.: The New Era Printing Company, 1913. 1/00. $51 including postage. Argosy Books. [BOX 10]

ALSO: Diccionario de la Lengua Kuna, Jesus Erice. [S.l.: s.n.], Impresora de la Nacion, 1985. [BOX 1]


[KURDI] Kurdish-English dictionary, dialect of Sulaimania, Iraq, by Ernest N[asseph] McCarus [1922- ]. Ann Arbor: University of Michigan Press, 1967. [BOX 14]


[KURDISH: see KURDI; KURMANJI]


[KURMANJI] Grammatica e Vocabolario della lingua Kurda, compiled by Maurizio Garzoni. Rome: Stamperia della Sacra Congregazione di Propaganda Fide, 1787. [BOX 57]

Kurdische Sammlungen: Erz¨a;hlungen und Lieder im Dialekte des Tur 'Abin, ed. and trans. by Eugen Prym [Heinrich Eugen] & Albert Socin. St. Petersburg: Commissionnaires de l'Akdémie Impériale de sciences, etc., 1887-1890. [BOX 56]

Grammar of the Kurmanji or Kurdish Language, by E[ly] B[anister] Soane. London: Luzac & Co., 1913. [BOX 64]

Kurdsko-russkii slovar: okolo 14000 slov, by Ch[erkes] Kh[udoevich] Badaev. Moscow: Gos. izd-vo inostrannykh i natsionalnykh slovarei, 1957. [BOX 55]

IAzyk azerbaidzhanskikh kurdov, by Ch[herkes] Kh[udoevich Badaev. Moscow: Izd-vo "Nauka," 1965. [BOX 54]

Kurdish-English. English-Kurdish (Kurmancî) Dictionary. Ferhang Kurdî-Îngîlîzî. Îngîlîzî-Kurdî, by Baran Rizgar [M.F. Onen]. London: [published by the author], 1993. [BOX 27]


[KURUMBARU, ALU] Alu-Kurumbaru Nayan: die Sprache der Alu-Kurumbas: Grammatik, Texte, Wörterbuch, by Dieter B. Kapp. Wiesbaden: Otto Harrassowitz, 1982. [BOX 11]


[KURUX] Kurukh (Or∼t)-English dictionary. Part I., by Ferd[inand] Hahn. Calcutta: Bengal Secretariat Press, 1903. [BOX 24]

An Oraon-English Dictionary in the Roman character with numerous phrases illustrative of sense and idiom and notes on tribal customs, beliefs, etc., by A. Grignard. St. Gabriel-Mödling near Vienna, Austria: Administration of "Anthropos." 1924; For India: Calcutta: sold at the Catholic Orphan Press, 1924. [BOX 20]

An English-Uraon Dictionary, compiled by several missionaries in collaboration, ed. by C. Bleses. Ranchi: Dharmik Sahitya Samiti, 1956. [BOX 59]


[KUVI] Vocabulary of Kuvi-Kond Language with short sentences on general subjects for conversational purposes, by F. V. P. Schulze. Madras: Printed by Graves, Cookson & Co., 1913. [BOX 59]


[KWAKIUTL] Ethnology of the Kwakiutl, by Franz Boas, in: Thirty-Fifth Annual Report of the Bureau Of American Ethnology to the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution, 1913-1914. Two volumes. Washington, D.C.: Government Printing Office, 1921. [BOX 43]


[KWANGALI] Bukenkango. Rukwangali-English English-Rukwangali Dictionary, compiled by J. K. Kloppers, expanded by D. Nakare & L. M. Isala. Windhoek, Namibia: Gamsberg Macmillan, 1994. [BOX 55]


[KWANYAMA] Wörterbuch der Ovambo-Sprache. Osikuanjama-Deutsch, by Hermann Tönjes. Berlin: Georg Reimer, 1910. [BOX 13]

ALSO: English-Kwanyama Dictionary, compiled by G. W. R. Tobias & B. H. C. Turvey. Johannesburg: Witwatersrand University Press, 1965. [BOX 65]

ALSO: Kwanyama-English Dictionary, compiled by B. H. C. Turvey. Johannesburg: Witwatersrand University Press, 1977. [BOX 19]


[KWOMA] A dictionary of Kwoma: a Papuan language of north-east New Guinea, by Ross Bowden. Canberra, A.C.T., Australia: Pacific Linguistics, Research School of Pacific and Asian Studies, Australian National University, 1997. [BOX 49]


[LABI: see TO]


[LAHU] The Dictionary of Lahu, by James A. Matisoff. Berkeley: Unversity of California Press, 1988. [BOX 74]


[LAKHER] Grammar and Dictionary of the Lakher or Mara Language, by Reginald Arthur Lorrain. Gauhati, Assam: Government of Assam, Department of Historical and Antiquarian Studies, 1951. [BOX 62]


[LAKOTA] A dictionary of the Teton Dakota Sioux language; Lakota-English, English-Lakota, with considerations given to Yankton and Santee. Oie wowapi wan Lakota-Ieska, Ieska-Lakota, by Eugene Buechel, ed. by Paul Manhart. Pine Ridge, S.D.: Red Cloud Indian School, Holy Rosary Mission, 1970. [BOX 10]

Lakota Primer Sioux Indian Translation, by Bonnie C. Manley. Chadron, Nebraska: Dawes Co. Circulating Library, 1971. [BOX 7]

Everyday Lakota. An English-Sioux Dictionary for Beginners, ed. by Joseph S. Karol & Stephen L. Rozman. St. Francis, S.D.: Rosebud Educational Society, 1974. [BOX 54]

Elementary Bilingual Dictionary: English-Lakhóta / Lakhóta-English. Boulder, CO: University of Colorado Lakhóta Project, 1976. [BOX 37]

Dictionary of Modern Lakota (Lakota Eyapi Ognayan Wašicun Wicoiye Kin Yuieskapi), by Edward Starr. Kendall Park, N.J.: Lakota Books, 1994. [BOX 39]


[LALA-BISA] Wisa handbook: a short introduction to the Wisa dialect of North-East Rhodesia, by A[rthur] C[ornwallis] Madad [b. 1846]. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1906. [BOX 2]

Lala-Lamba handbook, a short introduction to the south-western division of the Wisa- Lala dialect of northern Rhodesia, with stories and vocabulary, by A[rthur] C[ornwallis] Madan. Oxford: The Clarendon Press, 1908. [BOX 2]


[LAMBA] English-Lamba Vocabulary, compiled by Clement M. Doke. Johannesburg: Witwatersrand University Press, 1933. [BOX 61]


[LAMUT: see EVEN]


[LANGO] The Lango. A Nilotic Tribe of Uganda, by J[ack] H[erbert] Driberg. London: T. Fisher Unwin Ltd., 1923. [BOX 71]


[LAO] Mission Pavie. Exploration de l'Indo-Chine: mémoires et documents…Tome II: Litterature et linguistique. Deuxième fascicule: Dictionnaire laotien, by M. Massie. Paris: Ernest Leroux, 1894. [BOX 39]

Lexique français-laocien, by Marie Joseph Cuaz [1862- ]. Hongkong: Société des mission étrangères, 1904. [BOX 17]

English-Lao: Lao-English Dictionary, by Russell Marcus. Bangkok: Russell Marcus, 1968. [BOX 75]

English-Lao Phrasebook with Useful Wordlist (for Laotians). Arlington, Virginia: Center for Applied Linguistics, [1980]. [BOX 57]


[LARAGIA] "Remarks on the Native Tongues in the Neighborhood of Part Darwin," by T. A. Parkhouse, in: Transactions of the Royal Society of South Australia, Vol. 19, Part 1 (with three plates), (July 1895), pp. [1]-18. [BOX 10]


[LARTE: see AWUTU]


[LAU] Grammar and vocabulary of the Lau language, Solomon Islands, by Walter G[eorge] Ivens [1871- ]. Washington: Carnegie Institution of Washington, 1921. [BOX 3]


[LEFANA] Lefana, Akpafu and Avatime with English gloss, by M. E. Kropp. Legon: Institute of African Studies, University of Ghana, 1967. [BOX 35]


[LENAKEL] Lenakel Dictionary, by John Lynch. Canberra: Australian National University, 1977. [BOX 5]


[LESSER ANTILLEAN CREOLE ENGLISH] Duppies Is: some accounting of the capricious activities of the Cayman Islands' friendly ghosts...and...a dictionary of words and phrases of the Islanders, by Robert S[evier] Fuller. Grand Cayman: Cayman ARTventures, c. 1981. Later edition. [BOX 22]


[LESSER ANTILLEAN CREOLE FRENCH] Le Vocabulaire de parler Créole de la Martinique, by Élodie Jourdain. Paris: C. Klincksieck, 1956. [BOX 59]

ALSO: Creole-English/English-Creole (Caribbean), by Stephanie Ovide. New York: Hippocrene Books, 1996. [BOX 13]


[LEUANGIUA: see ONTONG JAVA]


[LIMBA, EAST] Limba-English Dictionary, by Mary Lane Clarke. Freetown: Government Printer, 1929. [BOX 32]


[LINDU: see KOLA]


[LINGALA: see also BANGALA] Maloba ma lokóta. Dictionnaire Lingála Lingála-Français Français-Lingála, by René van Everbroeck. Kinshasha, Zaire: Éditions l'Epiphanie, 1985. [BOX 65]

Lingala-English. English-Lingala, by Thomas A. Akowuah. New York: Hippocrene Books, 1996. [BOX 16]


[LINGAO] Le vocabulaire Bê de F. M. Savina [1876-1941], ed. by A. G. Haudricourt. Paris: École Française d'Extrême-Orient, 1965. [BOX 41]


[LISU] A Dictionary of the Northern Dialect of Lisu (China and Southeast Asia), by David Bradley. Canberra: The Australian National University, 1994. [BOX 62]


[LOGBARA] A Study of the Logbara (Ma'di) Language. Grammar and Vocabulary, by J[oseph] P[asquale] Crazzolara. London, New York, Toronto: Published for the International African Institute by Oxford University Press, 1960. [BOX 57]


[LOGONE] Die Logone-Sprache im zentralen Sudan, mit Beitr¨a;gen aus dem Nachlass von Gustav Nachtigal, by Johannes Lukas. Leipzig: Deutsche Morgenl¨a;ndische Gesellschaft, im Kommission bei F. A. Brockhaus, 1936. [BOX 20]


[LOMONGO: see MONGO]


[LOMWE] A Vocabulary of Kilolo as spoken in the Bankundum a section of the Balolo tribe, at Ikengo (Equator), Upper Congo, by Jas.[James] B. Eddie. [London]: East London Institute for Home and Foreign Missions, [1887]. [BOX 66]


[LONDO] The Londo Word: Its Phonological and Morphological Structure, by Juliana Kuperus. Tervuren, Belgium: Musee Royal, 1985. [BOX 6]


[LONIU] A Grammar and Lexicon of Loniu, Papua New Guinea, by Patricia J. Hamel. Canberra: Australian National University, 1994. [BOX 74]


[LONTOMBA: see NTOMBA]


[LONWOLWOL] Ambrym (Lonwolwol) Dictionary, by W. F. Paton. Canberra: Department of Linguistics, Research School of Pacific Studies, The Australian National University, 1973. [BOX 39]


[LOU] "A Lou Vocabulary. With Phonological Notes," by Robert Blust, in Papers in Austronesian LinguisticsNo. 5, (1998), ed. by Darrell Tryon, pp. 35-99. [BOX 12]


[LOUISIANA CREOLE FRENCH] Dictionary of Louisiana Creole, by Albert Valdman, Thomas A. Klinger, Margaret M. Marshall & Kevin J. Rottet. Bloomington, Ind.: Indiana University Press, 1998. [BOX 30]


[LOUISIANA FRENCH: see CAJUN]


[LOZI] An English-Lozi vocabulary, by J. P. Burger. Mongu, Barotseland Protectorate: Book Depot of P[aris] M[issionary]S[ociety], Sefula, 1960. [BOX 17]

English-Silozi Dictionary, by Owen O'Sullivan. Lusaka: Zambia Educational Publishing House, 1993. [BOX 55]


[LUBA-KASAI: see also CONGO LANGUAGES, POLYGLOT] Grammar and dictionary of the Buluba-Lulua language as spoken in the upper Kasai and Congo basin, by W[illiam] M[cCutchan] Morrison [1867-1918]. New York: American Tract Society, 1906. [BOX 33]


[LUBA-KATANGA]


[LUCHUAN: see OKINAWAN, CENTRAL]


[LUGANDA: See GANDA]


[LUMMI: see CLALLAM]


[LUO] Elementary Lessons in Dho-Luo, by [G]eorge [W]ynn [B]rereton Huntingford. London: School of Oriental and African Studies, University of London, 1959. [BOX 59]

A glossary in English, Kiswahili, Kikuyu and Dholuo. Kamusi ya lugha ya Kiingereza, Kiswahili, Kikuyu na Kijaluo. Mutaratara wa ciugo cia Githungu, Githweri, Gikuyu na Kijaluu. Cheno mar weche ma olok e Dhowasungu, Swahili, Kikuyu gi Dholuo, by T[homas] P[atrick] Gorman. London: Cassell, 1972. [BOX 24]


[LUSHOOTSEED] Dictionary of Puget Salish, by Thom Hess. Seattle and London: University of Washington Press, 1976. [BOX 33]

Lushootseed Dictionary, by Dawn Bates, Thom Hess, & Vi Herbert. Seattle: University of Washington Press, 1994. [BOX 35]


[LWOO: see ACOÓLI]


[MAASAI] The Masai: their language and folklore, by [Sir] A[lfred] C[laud] Hollis [1874- ]. Oxford: The Clarendon Press, 1905. [BOX 72]

A Masai Grammar with vocabulary, by A[rchibald] N[orman] Tucker & J[ohn] Tomp Old Mpaayei. London; New York; Toronto: Longmans, Green and Co., 1955. [BOX 19]


[MACUA: see MAKUWA]


[MADAGLASHTI: see PERSIAN DIALECTS]


[MADI: see LOGBARA]


[MAGINDANAON] A primer and vocabulary of the Moro dialect (Magindanau), by R[alph] S[tribling] Porter. Washington, D.C.: Government Printing Office, 1903. [BOX 22]

A Grammar of the Maguindanao Tongue according to the manner of speaking it in the interior and on the south coast of the island of Mindanao, by J[acinto] Juanmarti, trans. by C[ornelius] C[ole] Smith. Washington, D.C.: Government Printing Office, 1906. [BOX 15]


[MAHICAN: see MOHEGAN-MONTAUK-NARRAGANSETT] Schmick's Mahican Dictionary, ed. By Carl Masthay. [Philadelphia]: American Philosophical Society, 1991. [BOX 69]


[MAIDU] Maidu Texts and Dictionary, by William F. Shipley. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1963. [BOX 56]


[MAILU] A Dictionary of the Mailu Language, edited and enlarged from the researches of the Rev. W. J. V. Saville and the Comte D'Argigny, by Peter A. Lanyon-Orgill. London: Luzac & Co., 1944. [BOX 14]


[MAITHILI] Basic colloquial Maithili:a Maithili-Nepali-English vocabulary with some structure notes, by Alice Irene Davis. Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1984. [BOX 28]


[MAIYA: see KOHISTANI, INDUS]


[MAKASSAR] Makassaarsch-Hollandsch Woordenboek, met Hollandsch-Makassaarsche Wordenlijst, opgave van Makassaarsche Plantennamen, en verklaring van een tot opheldering bijgevoegden ethnographischen Atlas, by B[enjamin] F[rederik] Matthes. Amsterdam: Het Nederlandsch Bijbelgenootschap, bij Ferderik Muller, 1859. [BOX 31]

Makassaars-Nederlands woordenboek, by A. A. Cense & Abdoerrahim. 's-Gravenhage: Martinus Nijhoff, 1979. [BOX 34]


[MAKUWA-METTO]

Dicionário Português-Macua, by Alexandre Valente de Matos. Lisbon: Junta de Investigações Científicas do Ultramar, 1974. [BOX 73]


[MALA: see PAPUA NEW GUINEA LANGUAGES]


[MALAGASY] A dictionary of the Malagasy language in two parts: Part I, English and Malagasy, by J[oseph] J[ohn] Freeman [1794-1851]. An-Tananarivo: Press of the London Missionary Society, by R. Kitching, 1835. 7/7/99. NLG 550 (=$270). Smitskamp. [BOX 77]

A grammar of the Malagasy language, in the Ankova dialect, by David Griffiths. Woodbridge: Printed by Edward Pite, 1854. [BOX 2]

A New Malagasy-English Dictionary, compiled by Rev. J[ames] Richardson. Antananarivo: The London Missionary Society, 1885. Also a second copy. [BOX 16]

Cours pratique de langue malgache. Deuxième Partie. Dialogues usuels et vocabulaire français-malgaches, by Basilide Rahidy. Paris: Librairie africaine et coloniale, Joseph André et Cie., 1895. [BOX 57]

Dictionnaire français-malgache. Nouvelle édition, by V. Malzac. Paris: Augustin Challamel, 1899. 9/14/99. FF1200 (=$190). Chapitre.com.

Malgashko-russkii slovar: 21000 slov, by Lev A[leksandrovich] Korneev. Moscow: Sovetskaia entsiklopediia, 1966. [BOX 48]


[MALAY] Nederduitsch en maleisch woordenboek: onder goedkeuring en begunstiging der hooge regering en Nederlandische indie, by P[hilippus] P[ieter] Roorda van Eysinga [1796-1856]. Batavia: Ter Lands drukkery, 1824. [BOX 27]

Dictionnaire malai, hollandais et français, par C. P. J. Elout [1795-1843], traduit du dictionnaire malais et anglais de W[illiam] Marsden [1754-1836]. Harlem: Jean Enschedé et fils, 1825. [BOX 46]

Dictionnaire hollandais et malai, suivi d'un Dictionnaire français et malai, de C. P. J. Elout [1795-1843], d'apres le dictionnaire anglais et malais de W[illiam] Marsden [1754-1836]. Added title page in Dutch. Harlem: J. Enschedé et fils, 1826. [BOX 46]

Maleisch-nederduitsch woordenboek naar het werk van Dr, W. Marsden en andere Bronnen, compiled by J[an] Pijnappel [1822-1901]. Haarlem, Amsterdam: Joh. Entschedé en Zonen; Frederik Muller, 1863, bound with Supplement op het Maleisch-Nederduitsch Woordenboek van Dr. J. Pijnappel, Gz., by H[illebrandus] C[ornelius] Klinkert, 1869, with separate title page. [BOX 35]

Nieuw Hollandsch-Maleisch, Maleisch-Hollandsch woordenboek . Derde, veel vermeerderde en verbeterde druk, by A. H. L. Badings. Schoonhoven: Nooten, 1879. [BOX 15]

Vocabulaire Français-Malais et Malais-Français, precédé par un précis de grammaire malaise, by J. Montano, by J[ohn] Errington de la Croix [1848-1905]. Paris: Ernest Leroux, 1889. [BOX 27]

Nieuw Maleisch-Nederlandsch Zakwoordenboek, ten behoeve van hen, die het Maleisch met Latijnsch karakter beoefenen, by H[illebrandus] C[ornelius] Klinkert. Leiden: E. J. Brill, 1892. [BOX 17]

Lijst van Woorden in het Maleish, Hollandsch, Rottineesche en Timoreesch, by E. F. Kleian. Batavia: Albrecht & Rusche, 1894. [BOX 18]

Vocabulary of the English and Malay Languages with notes. Third edition. Vol. I- English-Malay, by Frank A[thelstane] Swettenham. Paris: Ernest Laroux, 1894. Third edition. [BOX 29]

Revised edition (1896): Vocabulary of the English and Malay Languages with notes. Revised edition (Vol. II), by Frank A[thelstane] Swettenham. London: W. B Wittingham, 1896. [BOX 18]

Malay-English vocabulary: containing 6500 Malay words or phrases with their English equivalents together with an appendix of household, nautical and medical terms, etc., by W[illiam] G[irdlestone] Shellabear [1862-1947]. Singapore: American Mission Press, 1902. [BOX 16]

Second, revised and enlarged edition (1912): Malay-English vocabulary containing over 7000 Malay words or phrases with their English equivalents, together with an appendix of household, nautical and medical terms, etc., by W[illiam] G[irdlestone] Shellabear. Singapore: Printed and Published by The Methodist Publishing House, 1912. Second revised and enlarged edition. [BOX 6]

A Malay-English dictionary [Part I]; Part II (Sin to Nya); Part III. Appendices, Index, Addenda and Corrigenda, by R[ichard] J[ames] Wilkinson [1867-1941]. Singapore: Kelly & Walsh, 1903, 1902-3. [BOX 46]

Bijdragen tot de kennis van het Midden Maleisch (Besemahsch en Serawajsch dialect), by O[scar] L[ewis] Helfrich. Batavia: Landsdrukkerij, 1904. [BOX 27]

Kelly & Walsh's Handbook of the Malay Language for the use of tourists and residents (Third edition). Singapore: Kelly & Walsh, 1906. [BOX 13]

An abridged Malay-English dictionary (romanised), by R[ichard] J[ames] Wilkinson [1867-1941]. Kuala Lumpur: Printed at the F.M.S. Government Press,

1908. [BOX 1]

Nieuw praktisch Nederlandsch-Maleisch woordenboek, by W. H. Ridderhof & C. D. L. Janssen. Zutphen: W. J. Thieme & Co., 1934. [BOX 17]

Nieuw praktisch Maleis-Nederlands woordenboek, by W. H. Ridderhof. Zutphen: W. J. Thieme & Co., 1936.[BOX 16]

Dictionary of Colloquial Malay (Malay-English & English-Malay), by R[ichard] O. Winstedt. Singapore: Kelly & Walsh Limited, 1937. [BOX 67]

A Dictionary of Malayan Medicine, by John D[esmond] Gimlette & H[enry] W[agstaffe] Thomson. London, New York, Toronto: Oxford University Press, 1939. [BOX 19]

A simple but complete grammar of the Malay language including an English-Malay vocabulary, a Malay-English dictionary, three appendices and a number of translation exercises, by James Pearce. Perth: [the author?] Service Printing Co., 1944. [BOX 17]

Handbook of the Malay Language containing Phrases, Grammar and Dictionary with special attention to Military and Vocational Requirements, by Eduard F[erdinand] Winckel. South Pasedena, California: P.D. and Ione Perkins, 1944. [BOX 21]

Dictionary of Standard Malay (Malay-English), by Vernon E[dwards] Hendershot & W[illiam] G[irdlestone] Shellabear. Mountain View, California: Pacific Press Publishing Association, 1945. [BOX 15]

A Practical Modern Malay-English Dictionary with an Appendix of Arabic Spellings, by Sir Richard Winstedt. Singapore: Kelly & Walsh Limited, [1953]. [BOX 75]

Buku Kata Tiga Bahasa Melayu-Inggeris-China Dengan Bunyi Melayu dan China. Vocabulary in Three Languages, Malay-English-Chinese (with Pronunciation). [Title also in Chinese characters], by Jamaluddin bin Haji Ibrahim. Seremban: Anika Store, [1957]. [BOX 57]

A Dictionary of English-Malay and Malay-English, by Sulaiman Bin Ahmad. Kuala Lumpur: Jubilee (Book) Store, 1958. [BOX 67]

An Unabridged English-Malay Dictionary, by Richard Winstedt. Singapore: Marican & Sons, 1958. [BOX 17]

Malay-English. English-Malay Dictionary. No place, no publisher, n.d. [pre-1968]. [BOX 33]


[MALAYALAM: see also INDIA, LANGUAGES OF: POLYGLOT]

A dictionary of high and colloquial Malayalim and English, dedicated by permission to His Highness the Rajah of Travancore, by B[enjamin Bailey [1791-1871]. Cottayam: Printed at the Church Mission Press, 1846. [BOX 32]

A Malayalam and English dictionary, by Hermann Gundert (1814-1893). Mangalore; London: C. Stolz; Trubner & Co., 1871-1872. [BOX 49]

Anglo-Malayalam dictionary. Second Edition, by Tobias Zacharias, revised and enlarged by his son, Oliver Zacharias. Mangalore: Basel Mission Book and Tract Depository, 1933. [BOX 28]

Malaialam-russkii slovar. okolo 40 000 slov, Mikhail Sergeevich Andronov. Moscow: "Sov. entsiklopediia," 1971. [BOX 48]


[MALAYO-POLYNESIAN LANGUAGES: POLYGLOT

Kleines vergleichendes malayo-polynesisches Wörterbuch, by Gerhard Kahlo [1893- ]. Leipzig: Otto Harrassowitz, 1941.`` [BOX 10]


[MALDIVIAN] Say it in Maldivian (Dhivehi), by H[assan] A[hmed] Maniku & J[ayaratna] B[anda] Disanayaka. Colombo, Sri Lanka: Lake House Investments, 1990. [BOX 67]


[MALE: see also BONGU]


[MALECITE-PASSAMAQUODDY] Maliseet vocabulary, by Montague Chamberlain [1844-1924]. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard Cooperative Society, 1899. [BOX 11]


[MALIMBA] Die Sprache der Mbaka-Limba, Mbum und Lakka: Wörterlisten und Grammatik, by Günter Tessman [1884- ]. Berlin: Seminars für Orientalische Sprachen, 1930. [BOX 29]


[MALTESE] A Maltese-Arabic Word-list, Showing which of the corresponding Arabic roots are shared by other Semitic Tongues or used in the Quran, C.L. Dessoulaby. London: Luzac & Co, 1938. [BOX 56]

Maltese-English Dictionary, Vol. One A-l, Vol. Two M-Z and Addenda, by Joseph Aquilina. Malta: Midsea Books Ltd, 1987. [BOX 26]


[MAMBWE-LUNGU] Mambwe-English Dictionary, by Andrezej Halemba. Ndlola, Zambia: Mission Press, 1994. [BOX 18]


[MAMPRULI] Diccionario analitico del Mampruli, Evangelina Arana Swadesh & Mauricio Swadesh. Mexico City: Museo de las culturas, Instituto nacional de Antropologia e Historia, S.E.P., 1967. [BOX 21]


[MANCHU] Handwörterbuch der Mandschusprache. I. Lieferung (A-gunggung). II. Lfg. (gunghun-niyalamaingge). III. Lierferung (niyalmangge-z'urz'ung), in three parts, by Erich Hauer [1878-1936]. Tokyo: Verlag Deutsche Gesellschaft für Natur- und Völkerkunde Ostasiens, 1952 [Parts I-II], 1955 [Part III]. [BOX 11]

A Concise Manchu-English Lexicon, by Jerry Norman. Seattle: University of Washington Press, 1978. [BOX 6]

Deutsch-mandjurisches Wörterverzeichnis: nach H[ans] C[anon] von der Gabelentz' Mandschu-deutschem Wörterbuch, ed. by Hartmut Walravens & Martin Grimm. Wiesbaden: Franz Steiner, 1978. [BOX 28]


[MANDA] Dictionary of the Kiniassa Language, compiled by Rev. John Rebman. Westmead: Gregg Press, 1967. [BOX 64]


[MANDINGO: see MANDINKA]


[MANDINKA] La langue mandingue et ses dialects (Malinke, Bambara, Dioula). I. Introduction, grammaire, lexique français-mandingue. 2° volume. Dictionnaire Mandigue-français, by Maurice Delafosse. Paris: Librairie Orientaliste Paul Geuthner, 1929, 1955. Two vols. [BOX 55]

Étude dialectologique des parlers "mandingues" du Sénégal, by Abdoulaye Balde. 2 vols. Niamey: Centre d'études linguistiques et historiques par tradition orale; Organisation de l'unité africaine, 1982. [BOX 78]


[MANDOBO] Kaeti en Wambon: twee Awju-dialecten, by P[eter] Drabbe [1887- ]. 's-Gravenhage: Martin Nijhoff, 1959. [BOX 30]


[MANGAIA: see RAROTONGAN]


[MANG'ANJA: see NYANGA]


[MANGAREVA] A Dictionary of Mangareva (or Gambier Islands), by Edward Tregear. Wellington, N.Z.: John McKay, Government Printing Office, 1899. [BOX 62]

Essai de grammaire de la langue des iles Gambier, ou Mangareva, by the Catholic Missionaries of the archipelago. Braine-le-Comte: Imprimèrie Zech, 1908. [BOX 49]

Tikitionario 'Arani-Mangareva. Dictionnaire Français-Mangarevien, by Karl H. Rensch. Canberra: Archipelago Press, 1991. [BOX 62]


[MANGAREVIEN: see MANGAREVA]


[MANGBETU] La Langue des Makere, des Medje et des Mangbetu, by A. Vekens. Ghent: Éditions Dominicaines 'Veritas', 1928. [BOX 37]

Grammaire des dialectes mangbetu et medje, suivie d'un manuel de conversation et d'un lexique, by J. Larochette. Tervuren: Commission de Linguistique Africains, 1958. [BOX 30]


[MANGGARAI] Kamus Manggarai. I. Manggarai-Indonesia. II. Indonesia-Manggarai, two vols., by Jilis A.J. Verheijen. 's-Gravenhage: Martinus Nijhoff, 1967, 1970. [BOX 34]


[MANGYAN][cover title] Notes on the Mangyan Language, by E. E. Schneider. Manila: Bureau of Printing, 1912. [BOX 74]


[MANOBO, DIBABAWON] Dibabaon-Mandayan Vocabulary, by Myra Lou Barnard & Jannette Forster. Manila: Summer Institute of Linguistics, in cooperation with the Bureau of Public Schools and the Institute of National Language of the Department of Education, 1954. [BOX 14]


[MANOBO, MATIGSALUG] Malepet ne diksunari te hep-at ne lalag = A short four-language dictionary : MatigSalug Manobo, Cebuano Visayan, Pilipino, English. Manila, Philippines: The Institute, 1984. [BOX 11]


[MANOBO, WESTERN BUKIDNON] A Vocabulary of Central Mindanao Manobo, by Richard E. Elkins & Mrs. Elkins. Manila: The Summer Institute of Linguistics in cooperation with The Bureau of Public schools and The Institute of National Language of The Department of Education, 1954. [BOX 14]

Manobo-English Dictionary, by Richard E. Elkins. Honolulu: University of Hawaii Press, 1968. [BOX 27]


[MANSAKA] Mansaka Vocabulary, by Gordon Svelmoe & Norman Abrams. Manila: Summer Institute of Linguistics University of North Dakota in cooperation with the Bureau of Public Schools and the Institute of National Language of the Department of Education, 1955. [BOX 14]


[MANZA: see CONGO LANGUAGES, POLYGLOT]


[MAORI] A Dictionary of the New-Zealand Language, and a concise grammar; to which are added a selection of colloquial sentences, by William Williams. Paihia: Printed at the Press of the C. M. Society, 1844. [BOX 1]

Second edition, 1852: A Dictionary of the New-Zealand Language, and a concise grammar; to which is added a selection of colloquial sentences. Second edition, by William Williams. London: Williams and Norgate, 1852. [BOX 26]

Third edition, 1871: A Dictionary of the New Zealand Language; to which is added a selection of colloquial sentences, by William Williams. London and Edinburgh: Williams & Norgate, 1871. [BOX 77]

Fourth edition, 1892: A Dictionary of the New Zealand Language, by William Williams. Aukland and Edinburgh: Upton & Co. and Williams & Norgate, 1892. [BOX 62]

[Abridged] Fourth edition (1915): A Dictionary of the New Zealand Language, by the Right ReverendWilliam Williams, D.C. L., Bishop of Waiapu, New Zealand. Fourth edition, with numerous additions and corrections and an introduction, by W. L. Williams. Wellington: Whitcombe & Tombs, 1915. [BOX 2]

Maori and English Dictionary, by Richard Taylor. Aukland: George T. Chapman, [ca. 1871]. [BOX 57]

First lessons in the Maori language: with a short vocabulary, by W[illiam] L[eonard] Williams [1829-1916]. Auckland: Upton & Co., 1872. Second edition. [BOX 41]

New and complete manual of Maori conversation: containing phrases and dialogues on a variety of useful and interesting topics, together with a few general rules of grammar; and a comprehensive vocabulary, by S[ister Marie Joseph] A[ubert]. Wellington, N.Z.: Lyon & Blair Printers, 1885. Also: Binding variant: original blue cloth over boards, lettered and decorated in red. [BOX 17] [BOX 57]

The Maori-Polynesian comparative dictionary, by Edward Tregear. Wellington, N.Z.: Lyon and Blair, 1891. 2/14/00. AU$148 (=$91). Basilisk Bookshop. [BOX 13]

Complete Manual of Maori Grammar and Conversation with Vocabulary, edited by A. T. Ngata. Revised and enlarged edition. Christchurch, Wellington, and Dunedin: Whitcombe and Tombs Limited, [1918]. [BOX 64]

Reeds' Concise Maori Dictionary Maori-English English-Maori, by A. H. & A. W. Reed. Wellington, N.Z.: A. H. & A. W. Reed, 1948. [BOX 61]

Second edition (1949): Reeds' Concise Maori Dictionary. Maori-English. English-Maori, by A. H. & A[lexander] W[yclif] Reed. Wellington, N.Z.: A. H. & A. W. Reed, 1949. [BOX 67]

Reeds' Lilliput Dictionary. Maori-English. English-Maori, by A. H. & A[lexander] W[yclif] Reed. Wellington, N.Z.: A. H. & A. W. Reed, 1960. [BOX 71]

Lilliput Maori Place Names, by A[lexander] W[yclif] Reed. Wellington: A. H. & A. W. Reed, [1962]. [BOX 71]

Maori picture dictionary, by A[lexander] W[yclif] Reed [1908- ]. Wellington; Auckland: A.H. & A.W. Reed, 1965. [BOX 16]

English-Maori Dictionary, by Bruce Biggs. Auckland, N.Z.: A. H. & A. W. Reed, 1966. [BOX 67]

Aboriginal place names and their meanings, by A[lexander] W[yclif] Reed. [Artarmon] Sydney, Wellington: A. H. & A. W. Reed, 1967. [BOX 6]

A word-list of South Island Maori, by Ray Harlow. [Auckland]: Linguistic Society of New Zealand, 1985. [BOX 29]

The Complete English-Maori Dictionaryby Bruce Biggs. Auckland University Press / Oxford University Press, 1985. [BOX 65]

Dictionnaire néo-zélandais - français. New Zealand - French dictionary, by Ewen Jones & Myreille Pawliez. Paris; Montreal: Éditions L'Harmattan, 1998. [BOX 36]


[MAPUCHE: see MAPUDUNGUN]


[MAPUDUNGUN] Diccionario Hispano Chileno, by Andres Febres, enlarged by Antonio Hernandez y Calzada. Santiago: Imprenta del Progreso, 1846. [BOX 17]

Diccionario Comentado Mapuche-Español. Araucano Pehuenche Pampa Pichunche Rancülche Huilliche, by Esteban Erize. [Bahia Blanca]: Instituto de Humanidades, Universidad Nacional del Sur, 1960. [BOX 61]

Diccionario ilustrado: mapudungun, español, ingles, by Arturo Hernández Sallés, Nelly Ramos Pizarro, and Carlos Cácamo Luna, illustrator. Providencia, Santiago, Chile: Pehuen, 1997. [BOX 14]


[MARA (CHIN LANGUAGE): see LAKHER]


[MARA (AUSTRALIAN ABORIGINE)] Basic Materials in Mara: Grammar, Texts and Dictionary, by Jeffrey Heath. Canberra: Department of Linguistics, Research School of Pacific Studies, The Australian National University, 1981. [BOX 3]


[MARANAO] A Maranao Dictionary, compiled by Howard P. McKaughan & Batua A. Macaraya. Honolulu: University of Hawaii Press, 1967. [BOX 69]


[MARATHI] A Comprehensive Dictionary, English and Marathi. New edition, improved and enlarged, by Baba Padmanji. Bombay: Education's Society Press, 1870 [BOX 39]


[MARATINO: see COAHUILTECO]


[MARICOPA: see HAVASUPAI]


[MARI, LOW] An eastern Cheremis manual phonology, grammar, texts and glossary, by Thomas A[lbert] Sebeok [1920- ] & Frances J. Ingemann. Bloomington: Indiana University, 1961. 12/24/98. $21. Black Oak Books. [BOX 28]


[MARIND] Marindineesch-Nederlandsch woordenboek, by H[enricus] Geurtjens. Bandoeng: A. C. Nix & Co., 1933. [BOX 5]


[MARQUESAN] See TAHITIAN: Buschmann, 1843 for first published vocabulary of Marquesan. [BOX 17]

Grammaire et Dictionnaire de la Langue des Iles Marquises. Marquisien-Français, 2 vols., by René Ildefonse Dordillon. Paris: Insitut d'Ethnologie, 1931-1932. [BOX 51]

Pona te'ao tapapatina = Lexique marquisien-français/ Author: Le Cléac'h, Hervé. Publication: Papeete, Tahiti : [s.n.], 1997 [BOX 60]


[MARSHALLESE] [Cover title] English Marshallese Dictionary. N.p.: [EML Division of the Transport Company of Texas, 1963]. [BOX 7]

Tikjinere-Dictionary. Kajin Majöl & Kajin Inlij. Marshallese & English. Kwajalein Island, Marshall Islands: Kwajalein Education Committee, 1968. [BOX 34]


[MARTINIQUE CREOLE: see LESSER ANTILLEAN CREOLE FRENCH]


[MATLATZINCA, ATZINGO and MATLATZINCA, FRANCISCO DE LOS RANCHOS] Diccionario matlatzinca-español, compiled by Roberto Escalante Fernandez. Toluca, Mexico: Instituto Mexiquense de Cultura, 1997. [BOX 13]


[MATTOLE] Mattole: an Athabaskan language, by Fang-kuei Li. Chicago: The University of Chicago Press, 1930. [BOX 11]


[MAUNG] Maung grammar: texts and vocabulary, by Arthur Capell & H.E. Hinch. The Hague Paris: Mouton, 1970. [BOX 33]


[MAYAN LANGUAGES: see also CAKCHIQUEL; ITZAJ; K'EKCHI'; QUICHÉ; TZOTZIL]

Das nördliche Mittel-Amerika nebst einem Ausflug nach dem Hochland von Anahuac. Reisen und Studien aus den Jahren 1888-1895, by Karl Sapper [1866-1945]. Braunschweig: Friedrich Viewig und Sohn, 1897. [BOX 34]

Pequeño diccionario de voces guatemaltecas, ordenadas etimologicamente, by Jorge Luis Arriola. Guatemala, C.A.: [Tipografia nacional], 1941. [BOX 9]

Diccionario español-maya, by Ermilo Solis Alcala. [Ochil? Mexico]: Yikal Maya Than, 1950. [BOX 29]

Diccionario etnolingüístico del idioma maya yucateco colonial. I. Mundo Fisico. II. Aprovechamiento de los recoursos naturales, two vols., by Cristina Álvarez. Mexico: Universidad Nacional Autónoma de México, Instituto de Investigaciones Filológicas, Centro de Estudios Mayas, 1980. [BOX 25]

Vocabulario de Mayathan. Mayan Dictionary. Maya-English English-Maya, by Dorothy Andrews Heath de Zapata. Merida, Yucatan, Mexico: [s.n.], 1980. [BOX 18]

Maya t'an. Spoken Maya. Introduction to Grammar, Common Phrases, Special Vocabularies, English-Maya-Glossary, by William J. Litzinger & Robert D. Bruce. [Mexico City]: Ediciones Euroamericanas, 1997. [BOX 26]

A dictionary of the Maya language as spoken in Hocabá, Yucatan, compiled by Victoria R[eifler] Bricker [1940- ], Eleuterio Po§ot Yah, & Ofelia Dzul de Po§ot. Salt Lake City: University of Utah Press, 1998. [BOX 53]

,br>

[MAZAHUA] Diccionario mazahua-español, by the Colegio de lenguas y literatura indígenas. [Cover title] Diccionario Español-Mazahua. .Mexico: Toluca, Edo. de Mexico: Gobierno del Estado de Mexico; Instituto Mexiquense de Cultura, 1997. [BOX 9]


[MAZATECO DE CHIQUIHUITLAN] Diccionario mazateco de Chiquihuitlan, Oaxaca, by Carole Jamieson Capen. Tucson, AZ: Instituto Linguistico de Verano, 1996. [BOX 25]


[MBAI: see SARA]


[MBALA] Vocabulaire mbala, by Pius Ndolo & Florence Malasi. Tervuren: Musée royal de l'Afrique centrale, 1972. [BOX 10]


[MBUM: see MALIMBA]


[MBUTI PYGMY] "Vocabulary of the Language of the Pigmies of the Ituri Forest (Wambutti)," by Dr. J. David from a paper on "Notizen über die Pygm¨a;en des Ituri Waldes" in "Globus" (Friedrich Vieweg und Sohn, Brunswick) (Band 46. No. 12) 22 September 1904. One page typescript. [BOX 53]


[MEHRI] Die Mehri-Sprache in Südarabien. Texte und Wörterbuch, by Alfred Jahn. Vienna: Alfred Hölder, 1902. [BOX 40]


[MEIME: see PERSIAN DIALECTS]


[MELANESIAN LANGUAGES: POLYGLOT] The Melanesian languages, by R[obert]H[enry] Codrington [1830-1922]. Oxford: The Clarendon Press, 1885. [BOX 11]


[MELANESIAN PIDGIN ENGLISH: see NEO-MELANESIAN]


[MELE-FILA] A dictionary of the Mele language (atara imere), Vanuatu, by [D.] Ross Clark. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics, Research School of Pacific and Asian Studies, Australian National University, 1998. [BOX 31]


[MENDE] The Mende Language containing Useful Phrases, Elementary Grammar, Short Vocabularies, Reading Materials, by F[rederick] W[illiam] H[ugh] Migeod. London: Kegan Paul, 1908. [BOX 64]

Mende Natural History Vocabulary, by F[rederick] W[illiam] H[ugh] Migeod. London: Kegan Paul, Trench, Trübner & Co., 1913. [BOX 57]

A Hand-book of the Mende Language, by Rev. A. T. Sumner. Freetown: Government Printing Office, 1917. [BOX 31]

A View of Sierra Leone, by F[rederick] W[illiam] H[ugh] Migeod [1872- ]. New York: Brentano's, 1927. [BOX 29]

A Mende-English Dictionary, by Gordon Innes. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1969. [BOX 63]


[MENOMINI] "The Menomini Indians," by Walter James Hoffman in: Fourteenth Annual Report of the Bureau of Ethnology to the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution 1892-93 in Two Parts: Part I, by J. W. Powell. Washington: Government Printing Office, 1896, pp. 11-295. [BOX 42]

Menominee Lexicon, by Leonard Bloomfield, ed. by Charles F. Hockett. Milwaukee: Milwaukee Public Museum, 1975. [BOX 69]


[MEROLU TELUGU: see TELUGU]]


[MIAMI] Shawnee Stems and the Jacob P. Dunn Miami Dictionary, by C[harles] F[rederick] Voegelin [1906- ]. Parts I-V. Indianapolis: Indiana Historical Society, 1938-1940. 7/21/99. $80. Michael Ginsberg Books. [ALL FIVE PARTS BOX 32]

Part I. Stems in p-. Prehistory Research Series, Vol. I, No. 1, January 1938.

Part II. Stems in t- and ...-. Prehistory Research Series, Vol. I, No. 3, June 1938.

Part III. Stems in k- and š- and 2- with appendix, non-initial elements. Prehistory Research Series, Vol. I, No. 8, October 1939.

Part IV. Stems in l-, m-, and n-. With appendix. Gestalt Technique of Stem Composition in Shawnee, by B. L. Worf. Prehistory Research Series, Vol. I, No. 9, April 1940.

Part V. Stems in w- and h- vowel. With index, Parts I-V. Prehistory Research Series, Vol. I, No. 10, August 1940.

Kaskaskia Illinois-to-French dictionary, by Carl Masthay. 757 p. : ill. ; 29 cm. St. Louis, MO: C. Masthay, [2002]. [BOX 66]


[MICMAC] Dictionary of the language of the Micmac Indians who reside in Nova Scotia, New Brunswick, Prince Edward Island, Cape Breton and Newfoundland, by Rev. Silas Tertius Rand. Halifax: Nova Scotia Printing Co., 1888. [BOX 4]

Micmac Dictionary, by Albert D. DeBlois. Hull, Quebec: Canadian Museum of Civilization, 1996. [BOX 23]


[MIDOB] Tìdn-Áal: A Study of Midob (Darfur-Nubian), by Roland Werner. Berlin: Dietrich Reimer Verlag, 1993. [BOX 3]


[MIGAAMA] Lexique migama: migama-français et français-migama (Guera, Tchad) avec une introduction grammaticale, by Hermann Jungraithmayr & Abakar Adams. Berlin: Dietrich Reimer, 1992. [BOX 12]


[MINANGKABAU] Minangkabausch-Maleisch-Nederlandsch woordenboek, J[ohannes] L[udovicus] van der Toorn. 's Gravenhage: Martinus Nijhoff, 1891. [BOX 32]


[MINNESOTA OJIBWA: see OJIBWA]


[MINY] Le Miny: "Langue des chefs" de l'île de Lifou (Iles Loyauté - Nouvelle Calédonie). Lexique Miny-Drehu-Français Drehu-Miny-Français, by Maurice H. Lenormand. Nouméa: Editions Populaires, 1990. [BOX 65]


[MINYUNG: see AWABAKAL]


[MISIMA-PANEATI: see MUYUW]


[MISKITO: see also SUMO] Grammar of the Miskito language with exercises and Vocabulary, compiled by H[ermann] Berckenhagen. Bluefields, Moskito Coast: G. Winter, 1894. [BOX 67]

"Notes on the Miskto and Suma Languages of Eastern Nicaragua an Honduras," by Eduard Conzemius, in: International Journal of American Linguistics, New York, Vol. 5, No. 1 (March 1929), pp. 57-115. [BOX 14]

Diccionario miskito-español, español-miskito, by C. R. Heath & W. G. Marx. Tegucigalpa, Honduras: Calderon, 1953. [BOX 34]

Diccionario elemental Miskito-Español Español-Miskito. [Managua, Nicaragua]: Centro de Investigación y Documentación de la Costa Atlántica, [1986]. [BOX 20]


[MISSION INDIAN VOCABULARIES: see COSTANOAN; SALINAN]


[MITCHIF] The Michif dictionary: Turtle Mountain Chippewa Cree, Patline Laverdure & Ida Rose Allard, ed. by John C. Crawford. Winnipeg, Manitoba: Pemmican Publications, 1983. [BOX 11]

[MITUKU] Esquisse de la langue Mituku, by Leo Stappers. Tervuren, Belgium: Musée Royal de l'Afrique Centrale, 1973. [BOX 78]


[MIWOK, CENTRAL SIERRA] Central Sierra Miwok Dictionary with Texts, by L. S. Freeland & Sylvia M. Broadbent. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1960. [BOX 61]


[MIWOK, COAST] Bodega Miwok Dictionary, by Catherine A. Callaghan. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1970. [BOX 36]


[MIWOK, LAKE] Lake Miwok Dictionary, by Catherine A. Callaghan. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1965. [BOX 61]


[MIWOK, NORTHERN SIERRA] Northern Sierra Miwok Dictionary, by Catherine A. Callaghan. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1987. [BOX 36]


[MIWOK, PLAINS] Plains Miwok dictionary, by Catherine A. Callaghan. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1984. [BOX 36]


[MIXTECO] Arte en Lengva mixteca, compiled by Antonio de los Reyes. Alençon: Comte H. de Charencey, 1889. [BOX 65]


[MIXTECO DE SAN JUAN COLORADO] Diccionario mixteco de San Juan Colorado, by Sara Stark Campbell, Andrea Johnson Peterson & Filiberto Lorenzo Cruz. Mexico, D.F.: Instituto Linguistico de Verano, 1986. 10/19/98. $9.00. SILing. [BOX 25]


[MLABRI] Minor Mlabri: a hunter-gatherer language of northern Indochina, by Jørgen Rischel. Copenhagen: Museum Tusculanum Press, University of Copenhagen, 1995. 3/16/99. $44.50. Coachman Enterprises. [BOX 37]


[MOBILIAN (MOBILIAN JARGON)] The Mobilian Trade Language, by James M[ack] Crawford. Knoxville, TN: The University of Tennessee Press, 1978. [BOX 59]

"Mobilian Jargon:linguistic, sociocultural, and historical aspects of an American Indian lingua franca," by Emanuel J. Drechsel. Ph.D. Thesis, University of Wisconsin, Madison, 1979. [BOX 14]

"An Intergrated Vocabulary of Mobilian Jargon, a Native American Pidgin of the Mississippi Valley," by Emanuel J. Drechsel, in: Anthropological Linguistics, Vol. 38, No. 2 (Summer 1996), pp. 248-354. [BOX 59]


[MOCA: see SHAKACHO]


[MOHAVE] A Mojave Dictionary, by Pamela Munro, Nellie Brown, & Juidth G. Crawford. Los Angeles: Department of Lingusitics, UCLA, 1992. [BOX 14]


[MOHAWK] Radical Words of the Mohawk Language with their Derivatives, by James Bruyas. S.l.: s.n., n.d. [ca. 1862]. [BOX 27]

English-Mohawk Lexicon. A Spelling Wordlist of Six Nations Mohawk using the Isaac Orthography, by Ruth Isaac, Ima Johnson, Vina Loft & Claudine VanEvery-Albert. Brantford, Ontario: The Woodland Indian Cultural-Educational Centre, 1986. [BOX 15]

One Thousand Useful Mohawk Words, by David Kanatawakhon Maracle. Guildford, Conn.: Audio-Forum, 1992. [BOX 14]


[MOKILESE] Mokilese-English Dictionary, by Sheldon P. Harrison & Salich Albert. Honolulu: The University Press of Hawaii, 1977. [BOX 65]


[MOKULU] Lexique mokilko: Mokilko-francais et francais-mokilko (Guera, Tchad), by Herrmann Jungraithmayr. Berlin: D. Reimer, 1990, [BOX 29]


[MON] A Dictionary of Modern Spoken Mon, by H. L. Shorto. London: Oxford University Press, 1962. [BOX 4]


[MONASTIC SIGN LANGUAGE] The Cistercian sign language: a study in non-verbal communication, by Robert A. Barakat. Kalamazoo, Mich.: Cistercian Publications, 1975. [BOX 13]


[MONGO-NKUNDU] Dictionary of the Lomongo language, by E[dward] A[lgernon] Ruskin [b. 1871] & L[ily Adele Waldron Wall] Ruskin [1871 -]. London: Christian Literature Society, n.d. [1928]. [BOX 13]

Dictionnaire Français-Lomongo (Lonkundo), by G. Hulstaert. Antwerp: Éditions de Sikkel, 1952. [BOX 65]

Dictionnaire Lomongo-Français A-J. K-Z., two vols., by G. Hulstaert. Tervuren, Belgium: Musée Royale du Congo Belge, 1957. [BOX 56]


[MONGOLIAN, HALH: see also ALTAIC LANGUAGES: POLYGLOT]

Wörterbuch der heutigen mongolischen Sprache mit kurzem Abriss der Grammatik und ausgew¨a;hlten Sprachproben, by R[obert] Bleichsteiner [1891-1954] & W[alther] Heissig in collaboration with W[ilhelm] A[lexios] Unkrig. Vienna, Peking: Siebenberg-Verlag, 1941. [BOX 22]

Khalkha-Mongolische Grammatik mit Bibliographie, Sprachproben und Glossar, by Nikolaus Poppe. Wiesbaden: Franz Steiner Verlag, 1951. [BOX 21]

Mongolsko-russkii slovar. okolo 22 000 slov, by A. Luvsandendev. Moscow: Gosudarstvennoe Izdatelstvo Inostrannykh i Natsionalnykh Slovarei, 1957. [BOX 48]

Russko-mongolskii slovar. okolo 30 000 slov, by A[leksandr] R[inchinovich] Damba-Rinchine. Moscow: Gos. izd-vo inostrannykh i natsionalnykh slovarei, 1960. [BOX 47]

The Zirni Manuscript. A Persian-Mongolian Glossary and Grammar, by Shinobu Iwamura, with the collaboration of Natsuki Osada and the late Tadashi Yamasaki. Kyoto: Kyoto University, 1961. [BOX 37]

A Concise English-Mongolian Dictionaryby John G. Hangin. Bloomington, Indiana: Indiana University, 1970.[BOX 65]

Mongolian-English Dictionary, compiled by Charles Bawden. London & New York: Kegan Paul International, 1997. [BOX 59]


[MONGONDOW] Bolaang Mongondowsch-Nederlandsch Woordenboek, mit Nederlandsch-Bolaang Mongondowsch register, by W. Dunnebier. 's-Gravenhage: Martinus Nijhoff, 1951. [BOX 19]


[MONJAMBO: see NGBAKA MA'BO]


[MONO] Mono-Alu folklore: (Bougainville Strait, Western Solomon islands), by Gerald [Clair William] Camden Wheeler [1872- ]. London: George Routledge, 1926. [BOX 52]


[MONTAGNAIS] Dictionnaire Français-Montagnais, avec un vocabulaire Montagnais-Anglais, une courte liste de noms geographiques et une grammaire Montagnaise, compiled by Geo[rge Joseph Guyon] Lemoine. Boston: W.B. Cabot and P. Cabot, 1901. [BOX 21]

Issue in wrappers (1901):except for two additional blank leaves at beginning and end of volume, identical to issue in limp tan cloth, but issued in gray wrappers, lettered in black; spine and rear cover blank. [BOX 4]


[MONUMBO] Die Monumbo-Sprache. Grammatik und Wörterverzeichnis, by Franz Vormann & Wilh. Scharfenberger. Vienna: Mechitharisten-Buchdruckerei, 1914. [BOX 20]


[MOPÁN MAYA] [Cover title] Diccionario bilingue: maya mopan y espanol ; espanol y maya mopan, [by Mateo and Rosemary Ulrich]. [Guatemala]: [Instituto Linguistico de Verano], 1976. [BOX 9]


[MORDVIN: see ERZYA]


[MÒORÉ] Étude sur la langue des Mossi (Boucle du Niger) suvie d'un vocabulaire & de textes, by F[ernand] Froger. Paris: Ernest Laroux, 1910. [BOX 3]

Les noms individuels chez les Mosi, by Maurice Houis. Dakar: [printed in Limoges, France], 1963. [BOX 29]


[MOROCCAN ARABIC] A Dictionary of Moroccan Arabic: English-Moroccan, ed. by Harvey Sobelman & Richard S. Harrell. Washington, D.C.: Georgetown University Press, 1963. [BOX 22]

A Dictionary of Moroccan Arabic: Moroccan-English, ed. by Richard S. Harrell. Washington, D.C.: Georgetown University Press, 1966. [BOX 37]


[MOSETENO] Moseteno Vocabulary and Treatises, by Benigno Bibolotti. Evanston and Chicago: Northwestern University, 1917. [BOX 68]


[MOSQUITO: see MISKITO]


[MOSSI: see MÒORÉ]


[MOTA] A dictionary of the language of Mota, Sugarloaf Island, Banks' Islands, with a short grammar and index, by R[obert] H[enry] Codrington & J[ohn] Palmer. London: Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge, 1896. [BOX 6]


[MOTU] Grammar and Vocabulary of the Language Spoken by Motu Tribe (New Guinea), by W[illiam] G[eorge] Lawes. Sydney: Charles Potter, 1888. Second edition. [Box 8]

Third edition: Grammar and Vocabulary of the Language Spoken by Motu Tribe (New Guinea), by Rev. W. G. Lawes. Sydney: Charles Potter, 1896. [BOX 68] ALSO a second copy with dust jacket. [BOX 68]

A Grammar of the Motu Language of Papua, by R. Lister-Turner & J.B. Clark, second edition, edited Percy Chatterton. Sydney: A.H. Pettifer, [1941]. [BOX 73]

A Dictionary of the Motu Language of Papua, by R. Lister-Turner & J. B. Clark, second edition, edited by Percy Chatterton. Sydney: A. H. Pettifer, [1941]. [BOX 20]


[MOUNTAIN PIMA] "A Sketch of the Structure of Oob No'ok (Mountain Pima)," by David Leedom Shaul, in: Anthropological Linguistics, Vol. 36, No. 3 (Fall 1994), pp. 277-365. [BOX 59]


[MOVIMA] Movima y castellano, compiled by Roberto Judy & Judit Emerich de Judy. Cochabamba, Bolivia: Publicado por el Instituto Linguistico de Verano en colaboracion con el Ministerio de Asuntos Campesinos y el Ministerio de Educacion y Bellas Artes, Oficialia Mayor de Cultura, Departamento de Arqueologia, Etnologia, y Folkloro, 1962. [BOX 25]


[MUN: see KIM MUN]

[MUNA] Muna-English dictionary, by René van den Berg, in collaboration with La Ode Sidu. Leiden: KITLV Press, 1996. [BOX 33]


[MUNDANI] Mundani-English Lexicon, compiled by Elizabeth Parker & Christine Durant. Yaounde: Société Internationale de Linguistique, 1990. [BOX 65]


[MUNDARI] A Mundari-English Dictionary, by Manindra Bhusan Bhaduri. Calcutta: Calcutta University Press, 1931. [BOX 54]


[MUNJI: see INDO-IRANIAN FRONTIER LANGUAGES]


[MUNSEE] Delaware-English English-Delaware Dictionary, by John O'Meara. Toronto: University of Toronto Press, 1996. [BOX 54]


[MURUI] ] Diccionario Huitoto Murui. Tomo I, compiled by Shirley Burtch. Yarinacocha, Pucallpa, Peru: Ministerio de Educacion : Instituto Linguistico de Verano, 1983. [BOX 3]


[MUSKOGEAN: see ALABAMA]


[MUTSUN] A Vocabulary or phrase book of the Mutsun language of Alta California, by Felipe Arroyo de la Cuesta. New York: Cramoisy Press, 1862. [BOX 46]

ALSO: [cover title] The Mutsun Dialect of Costanoan based on the Vocabulary of De la Cuesta, by J[ohn] Alden Mason. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1916. [BOX 43]


[MUYU, NORTHERN: see MANDOBO]


[MUYU, SOUTHERN: see MANDOBO]


[MWAGHAVUL (SURA)] A dictionary of Mupun, by Zygmunt Frajzyngier. Berlin: Reimer, 1991. [BOX 12]


[MYENE] A Grammar of the Mpongwe Language, with Vocabularies, by the Missionaries of the A. B. C. F. M., Gaboon Mission, Western Africa. New York: Snowden & Prall, 1847. [BOX 43]

Dictionnaire Mpongwe-français, suivi d'élements de grammaire. Dictionnaire Français-Mpongwe, suive d'élements de grammaire, by André Raponda-Walker [1871- ]. Metz; Brazzaville: La Libre Lorraine; Imprimerie Saint-Paul, 1934, 1961. Two volumes. [BOX 34]


[NAGA] Notes on the Naga Tribes, in communication with Assam, by John Owen. Calcutta: W. H. Carey and Co., 1844. [BOX 15]


[NAHALI] Nahali: A Comparative Study, by F[ransiscus] B[ernardus] J[acobus] Kuiper. Amsterdam: N.V. Nord-Hollandsche Uitgevers Maatschappij, 1962. [BOX 14]


[NAHUATL] Glossarium azteco-latinum et latino-aztecum cura et studio Bernardini Biondelli collectum ac digestum, by Bernardino Biondelli [1804-1886]. Milan: Valentiner et Mues, 1869. [BOX 14]

Arte mexicana, by Antonio del Rincon [1556-1601]. Cover titla: Gramatica y vocabulario mexicanos. 1595. Reimpresion de 1885, ed. by Antonio Peñafiel . Mexico City Oficina tip. de la Secretaría de fomento, 1885. [BOX 3]

Llave del Náhuatl: colección de trozos clásicos, con gramática y vocabulario, para utilidad de los principiantes, by Angel Mariá Garibay K[intana]. Otumba, Mexico: [Imprenta Mayli, s.a.], 1940. BOUND WITH: Vocabulario mejicano de la Sierra de Zacapoaxtla, Puebla, compiled by Harold Key & Mary Ritchie de Key. Illustrated by Alberto Beltran & Catarina Voigtlander. Mexico: Instituto Linguistico de Verano, 1953. [BOX 18]

Aztekische Schriftsprache. Grammatik (mit Lautlehre), Text und Glossar, by Jakob Schoembs. Heidelberg: Carl Winter Universit¨a;tsverlag, 1949. [BOX 21]

Los mil elementos del mexicano clásico: base analitica de la lengua nahua, by Mauricio Swadesh {1909-1967] & Madalena Sancho . Mexico City: Universidad Nacional Autonóma de México, Instituto de Investigaciones Históricas, 1966. [BOX 14]

An Analytical Dictionary of Nahuatl, by Frances Karttunen. Austin: University of Texas Press, 1983. [BOX 21]

A Nahuatl-English Dictionary and Concordance to the Cantares Mexicanos with an Analytical Transcription and Grammatical Notes, by John Bierhorst. Stanford, California: Stanford University Press, 1985. [BOX 21]

Diccionario analitico del Nahuatl. Espanol-nahuatl, nahuatl-espanol, by Ausencio Alva Hernandez. [Puebla, Mexico]: Secretaria de Cultura, 1996. [BOX 26]


[NAM] Nam: an Ancient Language of the Sino-Tibetan Borderland. Text, with Introduction, Vocabulary and linguistic studies, by F[rederick] W[illiam] Thomas. London: Oxford University Press, 1948. [BOX 27]


[NAMA] Deutsch-Nama Wörterbuch: nebst Anhang Afrikaans-Duitse woorderlys van die vernaamste Duitse woorde in die Deutsch-Nama Wörterbuch, by Fr[iedrich] Rust.

Windhoek: Rheinische Mission in Sudwestafrika, 1960. [BOX 11]


[NANAI] Goldisch-deutsches Wörterverzeichniss mit vergleichender Berücksichtigung der übrigen tungusischen Dialekte, by Wilhelm Grube[1855-1908]. St. Petersburg: Bei den Commissionaren der Kaiserlichen Akademie der Wissenschaften, 1900. [BOX 3]

Goldsko-Russkii slovar, by P. Protodiakonov. Vladivostok: Parovay tipo-litografia, 1901. [BOX 48]


[NANDI] The Nandi. Their language and folk-lore, by [Sir] A[lfred] C[laud] Hollis [1874- ] Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1909. [BOX 4]


[NARO] A Nharo Wordlist, by Alan Barnard. Durban: University of Natal Department of African Studies, 1985. [BOX 15]


[NASS-GITKSIAN] A short practical dictionary of the Gitksan language, by Lonnie Hindle & Bruce Rigsby.. Moscow, Idaho: s.n., 1973. [BOX 14]


[NATICK: see WAMPANOAG]


[NATIVE AMERICAN LANGUAGES] Tribes of the extreme Northwest, by William Healey Dall [1845-1927], and Tribes of western Washington and northwestern Oregon, by George Gibbs [1818-1873]. Washington: Government Printing Office, 1877. Series: Contributions to North American ethnology, Vol. 1. Department of the Interior. U.S. Geographical and Geological Survey of the Rocky Mountain Region. [BOX 41]

Comparative Vocabularies of the Indian Tribes of British Columbia, with a Map illustrating Distribution, by W[illiam] Fraser Tolmie & George M[ercer] Dawson. Montreal: Dawson Brothers, 1884. Also a second copy with different binding. [BOX 6]

Indian local names, with their interpretation, by Stephen G[ill] Boyd. York, Pa: The author, 1885. [BOX 31]


[NAVAHO] A Vocabulary of the Navaho Language, by The Franciscan Fathers. St. Michaels, Arizona: The Franciscan Fathers, [1912]. 2 Vols. [BOX 68]

A Stem Vocabulary of the Navaho Language. Navaho-English, Volume One. English-Navaho. Volume Two, by Berard Haile. St. Michaels, Arizona: St. Michaels Press, 1950, 1951. [BOX 34]

A Vocabulary of Colloquial Navaho, by Robert W. Young & William Morgan. [Washington, D.C.]: United States Indian Service, 1951. Vol. Two: [BOX 67]

Navajo-English Dictionary, by Leon Wall & William Morgan. Window Rock, Arizona: Navajo Agency, Branch of Education, 1958. [BOX 7]

A Navajo Lexicon, by Harry Hoijer. Berkeley: University of California Press,

1974. [BOX 36]

The Navajo language: a grammar and colloquial dictionary, by Robert W. Young [1912- ]. Albuquerque: University of New Mexico Press, 1980. [BOX 42]

Analytical Lexicon of Navajo, by Robert W. Young & William Morgan, Sr., with the assistance of Sally Migette. Albuquerque: University of New Mexico Press, 1992. [BOX 79]


[NDEBELE] Dictionary of the Tebele & Shuna Languages. With illustrative sentences and some grammatical notes, by W[illiam] A[llen] Elliott. London: David Nutt, 1897.[BOX 16]

Second edition, 1910: Notes for a Sindebele dictionary and grammar, with illustrative sentences. Second edition, by W[illiam] A[llan] Elliot. Bristol: Sindebele Publishing Company, [ca. 1910]. [BOX 2]


[NEMBE: see IJO, SOUTHEAST]

[NENETS: see also SAMOYED LANGUAGES] Nenetsko-russkii slovar: okolo 22000 slov, by N[ataliia] M[itrofanovna] Tereshchenko. Moscow: Izd-vo sovetskaia entsklopediia, 1965. [BOX 48]


[NENGONE] Nengone Dictionary. Part I. Nengone-English. Part II English-Nengone, by D[arrell] T. Tryon & M[arie]-J[oseph] Dubois. Two vols. Canberra: The Australian National University, 1969, 1971. Part 1-[BOX 32] [Part 2-BOX 35]


[NEO-MELANESIAN / PIDGIN ENGLISH: see TOK PISAN]

[NEPALI / PAHARI] Nepali Grammar and Vocabulary, by A[rchibald] Turnbull. London; Calcutta: W. Thacker & Co.; Thacker, Spink & Co., 1923. Third edition. [BOX 20]

English-Nepali Dictionary, from material collected by R[obert] Kilgour, revised and arranged by H.C. Duncan, with the assistance of G.P. Pradhan. Darjeeling: Government Branch Press, 1923. [BOX 3]

Tea Districts Labour Association Language Hand-Book Nepali. Printed for private circulation only. Calcutta: Begg Dunlop & Co.; printed by P. A. Bonardi at the Catholic Orphan Press, 1927. [BOX 12]

A Comparative and Etymological Dictionary of the Nepali Language, by Ralph Lilley Turner. London: Kegan Paul Trench, Trubner & Co., 1931. [BOX 76]

Colloquial Nepali, by G.G. Rogers. Calcutta: Thacker Spink, 1950. [BOX 73]

Dictionary of Roman Gurhkali and English, by D[uncan] C. Forbes. Singapore: Published by the Author, 1955. [BOX 61]

Basic Gurkhali Dictionary (Roman Script), by M. Meerendonk. N.p.[Malaya?]: [published by the author], 1960. [BOX 61]

Nepali-English Dictionary, by Gabriel Rana. Darjeeling: Shyam Brothers, 1968. [BOX 55]

Nepalsko-russkii slovar. 38 000 slov, by I[zrail] S[avelevich] Rabinovich. Moscow: "Sov. entsiklopediia," 1968. [BOX 48]

Nepali-English Dictionary (with pronunciation in Roman Nepali), compiled by Chandra Lal Singh & Matshyandra Lal Singh. Kathmandu: Educational Enterprise, Ltd., 1983. [BOX 64]

Nepali Vocabulary [With an Introduction to the Nepali Language] [English-Roman-Nepali], by Dinesh Shrestha 'Ashrit'. Kathmandu: Rajani Prakashan, 1986. [BOX 61]

Ajanta's Comprehensive Dictionary English-English-Nepali (comprising explanatory illustrations) with Characteristic Meanings, along with Explanations mostly viewed in English, English and Nepali Sense as well commonly used basis important phrases, idioms and abbreviations, edited by K.L. Karmacharya & P.R. Vaidya. Delhi: Ajanta Prakashan, n.d. [BOX 64]


[NEWARI] A Dictionary of Classical Newari, by Hans Jørgensen. Copenhagen: Levin & Munksgaard, 1936. [BOX 15]

Newari-English Dictionary: Modern Language of Kathmandu Valley, by Thakur Lal Manandhar. Dehli: Agam Kala Prakashan, 1986. [BOX 78]

A Concise Dictionary Newar-English, by S[resthacharya] Iswaranand. Kathmandu, Nepal: Pilgrims Book House, 1995. [BOX 24]


[NEZ PERCE] Journal of an exploring tour beyond the Rocky Mountains, under the direction of the A.B.C.F.M. performed in the years 1835, '36 containing a description of the geography, geology, climate, and productions; and the number, manners, and customs of naives. With a map of the Oregon Territory, by Samuel Parker [1779-1866]. Ithaca, N.Y.: Published by the author; Mack, Andrus & Woodruff, printers, 1838. [BOX 75]

A Dictionary of the Numipu or Nez Perce language, by a missionary of the Society of Jesus in the Rocky Mountains. Part I English-Nez Perce [no further parts issued], [by Father Anthony Morvillo, S.J.] N.p.: St. Ignatius Mission Print, Montana, 1895. [BOX 62]

Nez Perce dictionary, by Haruo Aoki. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1994. [BOX 35]


[NGAJU] Wörterbuch der Priestersprache der Ngaju-Dayak: (Bahasa Sangiang--Ngaju-Dayakisch--Bahasa Indonesia--Deutsch), by Martin Baier [1934- ], August Hardeland [1814-1891] & Hans Scharer [1904-1947]. Dordrecht, Holland; Providence, U.S.A.: Foris Publications, 1987. [BOX 29]


[NGALOOMA: see NGARLUMA]


[NGANDI] Ngandi grammar, texts, and dictionary, by Jeffrey Heath. Canberra: Australian Institute of Aboriginal Studies, 1978. [BOX 61]


[NGARINYIN] Ngarinjin-English Dictionary. Volume I. A-I., by H.H.C. Coate and A.P. Elkin. Sydney: University of Sydney, 1974. [BOX 4]


[NGARLUMA] A Partial Vocabulary of the Ngalooma Aboriginal Tribe, by Harold Aubrey Hall, with concordance and commentary by C.G. von Brandenstein. Canberra: Australian Institute of Aboriginal Studies, 1971. [BOX 36]


[NGARRUGU] Vocabulary of the Ngarrugu Tribe N.S.W., by R.H. Mathews. Original printed pale orange stapled wrapprs, lettered and decorated in black. Pp. 335-342 (offprint from the Journal and Proceedings of the Royal Society of N.S. Wales, Vol. XLII, [Sydney, 1908]). 8/10/97. A$20 (=$12.50). Berkelouw. [BOX 67]


[NGBAKA] Vocabulaire Français-Ngbaka, by Védaste Maes. Tervuren, Belgium: Musée Royal de l'Afrique Centrale, 1968. [BOX 6]


[NGBAKA MA'BO] Vocabulaire français-gmbwaga-gbanziri-monjombo, precedé d'éléments de grammaire, by J. Calloc'h. Paris: Paul Geuthner, 1911. [BOX 1]


[NGGELA: see GELA]


[NGIZIM] A Dictionary of Ngizim, by Russell G. Schuh. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1981. [BOX 74]


[NGOMBE] Ngombe-Nederlands-Frans woordenboek. Dictionnaire ngombe-neerlandais-francais, by N. Rood. Tervuren, Belgium: [Koninklijk Museum van Belgisch-Congo], 1958. [BOX 28]


[NHANG] The Yay Language. Glossary, Texts, and Translations, ed. by Thomas John Hudak. Ann Abor, Michigan: Center for South and Southeast Asian Studies, University of Michigan, 1991. [BOX 19]


[NHARO: see NARO]


[NIAS] Niassisch-deutsches Wörterbuch. Unter Mitwirkung H. Lagemann (Lahagoe, Nias) und W. Frickenschmidt (Poeloe Tello) für den südlichen Dialekt. Mit Anhang: Zur Vergleichung des Niassischen mit anderen malaio-polynesischen Sprachen, by H[einrich] Sundermann [1849-1919]. Moers: Druck von J.W. Spaarmann, 1905. [BOX 41]


[NICOBARESE, CAR] Dictionary of the Car-Nicobarese Language, by G[eorge]Whitehead. Rangoon: American Baptist Mission Press, 1925. [BOX 69]


[NICOBARESE, CENTRAL] A Dictionary of the Nancowry Dialect of the Nicobarese Language; in two parts: Nicobarese-English and English-Nicobarese, by F[rederik] A[dolph] deRoepstorff, edited by Mrs. DeRoepstorff. Calcutta: Printed at the Home Department Press, 1884. [BOX 54]


[NIGERIAN ARABIC] A Dictionary of Nigerian Arabic, by Alan S. Kaye. Fullerton, California: California State University, Department of Linguistics, 1979. [BOX 61]

Nigerian Arabic - English Dictionary, by Alan S. Kaye. Malibu, CA: Undena Publications, 1986 [check date]. [BOX 37]


[NIGERIAN LANGUAGES: POLYGLOT] In the Shadow of the Bush, by P[ercy] Amaury Talbot [1877-1945]. London: William Heinemann, 1912. [BOX 34]

First American edition, 1912 (sheets of British edition): In the Shadow of the Bush, by P[ercy] Amaury Talbot [1877-1945]. New York; London: George H. Doran; William Heinemann, 1912. [BOX 52]

Specimens of languages from Southern Nigeria, by Northcote W[hitridge] Thomas[1868- ]. London: Harrison, 1914. [BOX 30]

Vocabulary of Nigerian Names of Trees Shrubs and Herbs, [by officers of the Colonial Field Service in Nigeria]. Lagos: Printed and published by the Government Printer, 1936. [BOX 43]


[NIGERIAN SLANGS] Nigerian Slangs: A Dictionary of slangs and unconventional English used in Nigeria, by C.N.C. Asomugha. Onitsha, Nigeria: Abic Publishers, 1981. [BOX 64]


[NIRRANYERI: see WIRNAGU]


[NISENAN] Nisenan Texts and Dictionary, by Hans Jørgen Uldall & William Shipley. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1966. [BOX 36]


[NISKWALLI/ NISQUALLI: see NATIVE AMERICAN LANGUAGES]


[NITLAKAPAMUK: see THOMPSON]


[NIUE] Vocabulary and grammar of the Niue dialect of the Polynesian language Part I. A grammar of Niue. Part II. Niue-English. Part III. English-Niue, by Edward Tregear [1846-1931] & S[tephenson] Percy Smith [1840-1922]. Wellington: John Mackay, Government Printer, 1907. [BOX 24]

Niue Dictionary, by J. M. McEwen. Wellington, N.Z.: Department of Maori and Island Affairs, 1970. [BOX 75]

Tohi Vagahau Niue. Niue Language Dictionary. Niuean-English with English-Niuean Finderlist, ed. by Wolfgang B. Sperlich. [Honolulu]: Government of Niue & University of Hawaii, 1997. [BOX 13]


[NKOLE: see NYANKOLE]


[NKONYA: see AWUTU]


[NON-ARYAN LANGUAGES OF INDIA AND HIGH ASIA] A Comparative Dictionary of the Non-Aryan Languages of India and High Asia, with a dissertation. Based on the Hodgson lists, official records, and mss., by W[illiam] W[ilson] Hunter. London: Trübner & Co., 1868. [BOX 8]


[NOOTKA] Noticias de Nutka, diccionario de la lengua de los Nutkeses, y Descripcion del volcan de Tuxtla, by José Mariano Moziño & Alberto Maria Carreño. Mexico: Imprenta y Fototipia de la Secretaria de fomento, 1913. [BOX 24]


[NORFOLK: see PITCAIRN-NORFOLK]


[NORTHERN CACHAR LANGUAGES] Notes on Northern Cachar, by R. Stewart, extracted from: Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, Vol. XXIV, Part VII, 1855. Calcutta: Baptist Mission Press, 1856. [BOX 63]


[NORTH STRAITS SALISH: see also CLALLAM, LUSHOOTSEED, SOUTHERN PUGET SOUND SALISH] A Phonology, Morphology, and Classified Word List for the Samish Dialect of Straits Salish, by Brent D. Galloway. Hull: Canadian Museum of Civilization, 1990. [BOX 26]

Saanich, North Straits Salish Classified Word List, by Timothy Montler. Hull, Quebec: Canadian Museum of Civilization, 1991. [BOX 34]


[NSENGA] Senga handbook: a short introduction to the Senga dialect as spoken on the lower Luangwa North-Eastern Rhodesia, A[rthur] C[ornwallis] Madan [ b. 1846]. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1905. 10/98. $60.00. McBlain. [BOX 2]

[NTOMBA] Grammaire synthétique du Lontomba, suivi d'un vocabulaire, by L[ouis] [Octave] Gilliard. Brussels: Éditions de l'Essorial, 1928. [BOX 3]


[NUBIAN: see also MIDOB] Die Nuba-Sprache, by Leo Reinisch. 2 vols. Vienna: Wilhelm Braumüller, 1879. Vol. I: "Erster Theil. Grammatik und Texte." Vol. II: "Zweiter Theil. Nubsich-Deutsches und Deutsch-Nubisches Wörterbuch." [BOX 54]

An English-Nubian Comparative Dictionary, by G.W. Murray. London: Oxford University Press, 1923. [BOX 28]

Dongolese Nubian. A Lexicon. Nubian-English. English-Nubian, by Charles Hubert Armbruster. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1965. [BOX 8]

Nubisches Wörterverzeichnis: nubisch-deutsches und deutsch-nubisches Wörterverzeichnis nach dem Kenzi-Material des Samuêl Alî Hisên (1863-1927), by Inge Hofmann [1939- ]. Berlin: Reimer, 1986. [BOX 28]


[NUER] A Nuer-English Vocabulary, compiled by C. H. Stigand. London: Cambridge University Press, 1923. [BOX 65]

Nuer-English Dictionary, by Ray Huffman. Berlin: Dietrich Reimer (Ernst Vohsen), 1929. [BOX 18]


[NUFOR: see NUMFOR]


[NUKUORO] Nukuoro Lexicon, by Vern Carroll & Robias Soulik. Honolulu: The University Press of Hawaii, 1973. [BOX 9]


[NUMFOR] Noemfoorsch Woordenboek. Uitgegeven onder auspicieën van Het Nieuw-Guinea Studie-Comité en Het Koninklijk Instituut voor de Taal-, Land- en Volkenkunde, te 's-Gravenhage, by J. L. and F[rans] J[ohannes] F[rederik] van Hasselt. Amsterdam: N. V. Drukkerij en Uitgeverij J. H. de Bussy, 1947. [BOX 5]


[NUNGGUBUYU] Nunggubuyu-English Dictionary: Part I A-M. Part II; N-Y, 2 vols., by E[arl] J. Hughes. Sydney: University of Sydney, 1971. [BOX 11]

Nunggubuyu dictionary, by Jeffrey Heath. Canberra: Australian Institute of Aboriginal Studies, 1982. [BOX 9]


[NUPE] A Grammar of the Nupe Language, together with a Vocabulary, by A.W. Banfield & J.L. Macintrye. London: Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge, 1915. [BOX 65]


[NUXALK] A Concise Nuxalk-English Dictionary, by H. F. Nater. Hull, Quebec: Canadian Museum of Civilization, 1990. [BOX 21]


[NYAMWEZI] Nyamwesi-Wörterbuch, by Edmund Dahl. Hamburg: L. Friederichsen, 1915. [BOX 41]


[NYANGBO] "Vocabulary of English Words and Sentences translated into Nyangbo." 8 ff. Typescript with basic English vocabulary., approximately 300 words, and equivalents in Nyangbo. No author or date, but c. 1910. [BOX 53]


[NYANJA] Dictionary of the Nyanja Language, being The Encyclopaedic Dictionary of the Mang'anja Language by the late Rev. David Clement Scott, D.d., M.A., edited and enlarged by Alexander Hetherwick. London: The Religious Tract Society, [1929]. [BOX 2]

Second edition, second printing, 1951: Dictionary of the Nyanja Language, being The Encyclopaedic Dictionary of the Mang'anja Languageby the late Rev. David Clement Scott, D.d., M.A., edited and enlarged by Alexander Hetherwick. London: United Society for Christian Literature. 1951. [BOX 18]

Nyanja-English vocabulary, By Herbert Barnes, enlarged and revised by M. W. Bulley. London: Sheldon Press, 1929. [BOX 17]

English-Cinyanja Dictionary, prepared by the Zambesi Mission. London: United Society for Christian Literature, n.d. [c. 1955]. New edition. [BOX 67]

A Short English-Nyanja Vocabulary, by Thomas Price. Lusaka: Publications Bureau, n.d. [c. 1960]. [BOX 61]

Manuscript Chichewa dictionary, by N. B. Njobvalema of Lilonqwe, circa 1970's. [BOX 36]

Dicionário Português-Cinyanja, by Missionários da Companhia de Jesus [the Jesuit Missionaries]. Lisbon: Junta de Investigações do Ultramar, 1964. [BOX 73]

Typescript materials for Chichewa Dictionary, no author indicated, dated 1970-71, approximately 200 legal size leaves, in several stages, with manuscript notes, [BOX 2]

Dictionary of plant names in Malawi, by Blodwen Binns and J. P. Logah. Zomba. Malawi: The Government Printer, 1972. [BOX 24]

The Student's English-Chichewa Dictionary. Blantyrs: Claim, 1986. Original wrappers. Original published under the title "English-Nyanja Dictionary" in 1972. [BOX 61]


[NYANKOLE: see also NYORO] A simplified Runyankore-Rukiga-English and English-Runyankore-Rukiga dictionary: in the 1955 revised orthography with tone-markings and full entries under prefixes, compiled by C. Taylor. Kampala: The Eagle Press, East African Literture Bureau, 1959. [BOX 19]


[NYEMBA] Dicionário Ganguela-Português: Lingua falada nas regiões Cubango, Nhemba e Luchaze, Provincia de Angola, by Domingo Vieira Baião. Lisbon: Centro de Estudos Filológicos, 1940. [BOX 65]


[NYIHA] Die Sprache der Nyiha in Ostafrika, by Joseph Busse. Berlin: Akademie-Verlag, 1960. [BOX 66]


[NYORO] A Lunyoro-Lunyankole-English and English-Lunyoro-Lunyankole Dictionary, by M[argaret] B[eatrice] Davis. Kampala; London: Uganda Book Shop; Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge, 1938. [BOX 15]


[NZEMA] Nzema Nee Nrelenza Edwebohile Buluku / Nzema-English, English-Nzema Dictionary, by P.A. Kwesi Aboagye. Kelevole: P.A. Kwesi Aboagye, 1965. [BOX 61]


[OFO: see BILOXI]


[OJIBWA, EASTERN] [Cover title] A Grammar and Dictionary of the Otchipwe Language, by [Frederic] Baraga. Montreal: Beauchemin & Valois, 1879. Contains two volumes bound in one: A Theoretical and Practical Grammar of the Otchipwe Language for the use of Missionaries and other persons living among the Indians, by [Frederic] Baraga, A Second Edition, by a Missionary of the Oblates. Montreal: Beauchemin & Valois, 1878; and A Dictionary of the Otchipwe Language explained in English. Part I. English-Otchipwe, by [Frederic[ Baraga, A New Edition, by a Missionary of the Oblates. Montreal: Beauchemin & Valois, 1878. [BOX 63]

A dictionary of the Otchipwe language, explained in English. Part II. Otchipwe-English, by R. R. Bishop[Frederic] Baraga[1797-1868]. A new edition, by a missionary of the Oblates[probably Père Albert Lacombe]. Montreal: Beauchemin & Valois, 1880. [BOX 26]

A Concise dictionary of the Ojibway Indian language compiled and abridged from larger editions by English and French authors. [Cover title] A cheap and concise dictionary of the Ojibway and English languages compiled for the use of the Ojibway Indians in two parts. Part I. English and Ojibway. Toronto, Canada: International Colportage Mission, 1903. [BOX 13]

Second edition (1912): A cheap and concise dictionary in two parts Ojibway Indian langauge. Part I. English and Ojibway. Second Edition. Second Thousand. compiled and abridged from larger Editions by English and French authors. Toronto, Ontario; Rochester, NY: Internationl Colportage Mission, 1912. [BOX 13]

A cheap and concise dictionary in two parts Ojibway Indian langauge, second part Ojibway-English, compiled and abridged from larger Editions by English and French authors. Toronto, Ontario; Rochester, NY: Internationl Colportage Mission, 1907. [BOX 13]

Eastern Ojibwa. Grammatical Sketch, Text & Word List, by Leonard Bloomfield. Ann Arbor: University of Michigan Press, [1957]. [BOX 26]

A Chippewa Language Work Book for Beginners, by Coy Eklund. S.l.: s.n., [ca. 1976]. [BOX 54]

Ojibwewi-Ikikowinan: an Ojibwe Word Resource Book, ed. by John Nichols & Earl Nyholm. Saint Paul, Minnesota: Minnesota Archaeological Society, 1979. [BOX 38]

Dictionary English-Ottawa Ottawa-English, by Charles E. Dawes. Oklahoma: Charles E. Dawes, 1982. 7/99. $17.00. E-bay. [BOX 26]

A Concise Dictionary of Minnesota Ojibwe, by John D. Nichols & Earl Nyholm. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1995. [BOX 19]


[OJIBWA, WESTERN] Sketch of grammar of the Chippeway language: to which is added a vocabulary of some of the most common words, by John Summerfield, "alias Sahgahjew Agahbahweh.". Cazenovia [N.Y.]: J.F. Fairchild, 1834. [BOX 57]

A Dictionary of the Chippewa Indian Language from a manuscript written about one hundred years ago and never before printed. [Flint, Michigan]: Harry C[apelle]. Hill, 1943. [BOX 19]


[OKINAWAN, CENTRAL] Essay in aid of a grammar and dictionary of the Luchuan language, by Basil Hall Chamberlain. Yokohama, Shanghai, Hong Kong, Singapore: Kelly & Walsh; Tokyo: Z. P. Maryua & Co.; London: Kegan Paul, Trench, Trübner & Co., 1895. [BOX 53]


[OKO-JUWOI: see ANDAMANESE LANGUAGES: POLYGLOT]


[OLLARI] Ollari:a Dravidian speech, by Sudhibhushan Bhattacharya. Delhi: Manager of Publications, 1957. [BOX 24]


[ONONDAGA: see under DELAWARE]


[ONTONG JAVA] A study of the Leuangiua Language, by P[eter] A. Lanyon-Orgill. London: Luzac & Co., 1944. [BOX 34]


[ORIYA] An Oriya dictionary in three volumes. Vol. I, embracing an introductory grammar, and English and Oriya dictionary, and a list of official terms. Vol. II. An Oriya dictionary, with Oriya synonyms, compiled by Amos Sutton & Bhobananund Niaya Alankar. Cuttack: Orissa Mission Press, 1841-42. [BOX 65]

The new dictionary (English-Oriya-English), by Satrughna Nath, revised by Girija Sankar Roy. Balubazar; Cuttack, [India]: Cuttack Trading Co., 1963. [BOX 11]


[ORIYA, ADIVASI] An English-Adiwasi Oriya Vocabulary, compiled by Uwe Gustafsson. Madras: Summer Institute of Linguistics, South Asia, 1987. [BOX 15]


[OROMO, BORANA-ARSI-GUJI] A Galla-English, English-Galla dictionary, by E[dwin] C. Foot. Cambridge: the University Press, 1913. [BOX 23]

Vocabolario della lingua Oromonica (lingua Galla) in due parti, italiano-galla e galla-italiano. Seconde edizione, by E[ttore]Viterbo. Milan: Ulrico Hoepli, 1936. Second edition. [BOX 17]

Dizionario Italiano-Borana, by Bartolomeo Venturino. Marsabit, Kenya: Catholic Mission, 1976. [BOX 21]

Oromo dictionary, by Gene B. Gragg, with Terfa Kumsa and other Oromos. East Lansing, Mich.: African Studies Center, Michigan State University, in cooperation with Oriental Institute, University of Chicago, 1982. [BOX 13]


[0SAGE] A Dictionary of the Osage Language, by Francis La Flesche. Washington, D.C.: Government Printing Office, 1932. [BOX 73]


[OSETIN] Osetinsko-russkii slovar: 20000 slov, by A.M. Kasaev. Moscow: Gos. izd-vo inostrannykh i natsionalnykh slovarei, 1952. [BOX 55]


[OSTYAK: see KHANTY]


[OTOMI, MEZQUITAL] Diccionario Castellano-Otomi - Otomi-Castellano. Itzmiquilpan, Mexico: Ediciones del Patrimonio Indigena del Valle del Mexquital y del Instituto Linguistico de Verano, 1956. [BOX 62]


[OTOMI, SOUTHEASTERN] El otomi de Ixtenco, by Yoland Lastra. Mexico, D.F.: Universidad Nacional Autonoma de Mexico, Instituto de Investigaciones Antropologicas,

1997. [BOX 22]


[OUDJAAVANSCH: see KAWI]


[PAKOH: see KATUIC]


[PALAU] Relation des îles Pelew, situées dans la partie occidentale de l'océan Pacifique, composée sur les journaux et les communications du capitaine Henri Wilson et de quelques-uns de ses officiers, qui, en août mil sept cent quatre-vingt-trois, y ont fait naufrage zur l'Antelope, paquebot de la Compagnie des Indes orientales, by George Keate, trans. from the English. Two vols. Paris: Le Jay; Maradan, 1788. [BOX 2]

New Palauan-English Dictionary, by Lewis S. Josephs. Honolulu: University of Hawaii Press, 1990. [BOX 15]


[PALAUNG] A Dictionary of English-Palaung and Palaung-English, by Mrs. Leslie [Mary Lewis Harper] Milne. Rangoon: Government Printing and Stationery, Burma, 1931. [BOX 67]


[PAME, CENTRAL: see CHICHIMECA PAME, NORTHERN]


[PAMONA] Woordenlijst van de Bareë-Taal, gesproken door de Alfoeren van Centraal Celebes beoosten de rivier van Poso, benevens de Topebato-Alfoeren bewesten genoemde rivier, by Alb[ertus] C[hristiaan]Kruyt. 'S-Gravenhage: Martinus Nijhoff, 1894. [BOX 74]

Bare'e-Nederlandsch woordenboek:met Nederlandsch-Bare'e register, by N[icolaus] Adriani [1865-1926]. Leiden: E. J. Brill, 1928. [BOX 30]


[PANAMINT] Tümpisa (Panamint) Shoshone Dictionary, by Jon P. Dayley. Berkeley: University of California Press, [1989]. [BOX 36]


[PANJABI: see PUNJABI]


[PAPAGO / PIMA] Dictionary. Papago / Pima-English. O'othham-Mil-gahn. English-Papago/Pima. Mil-gahn-O'othham, compiled by Dean & Lucille Saxton. Tucson, Arizona: The University of Arizona Press, 1969. [BOX 15, + 2nd printing 1977]

A dictionary of Papago usage, by Madeleine Mathiot. Two vols. Bloomington, Indiana: Indiana University,1973 1976. [BOX 23]

Dictionary. Papago / Pima-English. O'othham-Mil-gahn. English-Papago / Pima. Mil-gahn-O'othham, by Dean Saxton, Lucille Saxton, & Susie Enos. Tucson, Arizona: The University of Arizona Press, 1995. Later printing of revised edition of 1983. [BOX 65]


[PAPIAMENTO] Woordenlijst en samenspraak, Hollandsch-Papiamentsch-Spaansch, compiled by W.M. Hoyer. [Willmestad], Curacao: A. Bethencourt e hijos, 1918. [BOX 27]

Vocabulary and Dialogues: English - Papiamento - Dutch, compiled by W. M. Hoyer. [Willemstad], Curaçao: Hollandsche Boekhandel, 1936. [BOX 23]

"Second edition", 1948: Vocabulary and Dialogues: English / Papiamento / Dutch, compiled by W. M. Hoyer. Willemstad,Curaçao: Hollandsche Boekhandel N.V., 1948. [BOX 20]

{Third edition], 1949: A little Guide. English-Papiamento-Netheland[sic], compiled by W. M. Hoyer. Curaçao: Boekhandel Bethencourt, 1949. [BOX 23]

Eror- i omishonnan di dikshonario papiamentu-ulandes, ulandes-papiamentu, skirbi pa Mario Dijkhoff / ku koperashon di Magalis Vos de Jesus, 1980 de Walburg Pers. Korsou: Boekhandel Salas, 1981. [BOX 25]

English / Papiamentu bilingual dictionary, by Betty Ratzlaff. Bonaire, Netherlands Antilles: The TWR Dictionary Foundation, 1992 [BOX 29]


[PAPUA NEW GUINEA LANGUAGES: see also ANEITYUMESE, ASMAT, BARUYA, FASU, KATE, KILIVILA, KOARI, LONIU, MAILU, MOTU, NEO-MELANESIAN, POLICE MOTU, TOARIPI, YABEM]

A comparative vocabulary of the dialects of British New Guinea, by Sidney H[erbert] Ray. London: Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge, 1895. [BOX 57]


[PASHTO / PUSHTU] A dictionary of the Pukkhto or Pukshto language, in which the words are traced to their sources in the Indian and Persian languages, by H[enry] W[alter] Bellew. Lahore: Rai Sahib M. Gulab Singh, 1901. [BOX 26]

Reprint edition (1980's): A Dictionary of the Pukkhto or Puskhto Language in which the Words are Traced to their Sources in the Indian and Persian Languages, by Henry Walter Bellew. Peshawar Cantt: Saeed Book Bank, n.d. [c. 1980's]. [BOX 61]

An English-Pushtu Vocabulary for Lower and Higher Standard Examinations in Pushtu, by Mirza Said Muhammad. Rawalpindi: Printed at the 'Frontier Exchange' Press, 1905. [BOX 67]

The Pakkhto idiom: a dictionary [A-L] M-Z, 2 vols., by George Waters Gilbertson, assisted by Arif Ullah, Yusufzai, Makhmud, Afridi, Ali Akbar Khan, Qandahari. Hertford: Published by the Author, 1932. [both volumes BOX 72]

Kratkii afgansko-russkii slovar. Okolo 12000 slov, by P.B. Zudin. Moscow: Gos. izd-vo inostrannykh i natsionalnykh slovarei, 1950. [BOX 48]

Russko-afganskii slovar: okolo 21000 slov, by P.B. Zudin. Moscow: Gos. izd-vo inostrannykh i natsionalnykh slovarei, 1955. [BOX 47]

Karmannyi russko-afganskii slovar. 7000 slov, by K[onstantin] A[leksandrovich] Lebedev. Moscow: Gos. izd-vo inostrannykh i natsionalnykh slovarei, 1961. [BOX 48]

Afgansko-russkii slovar (Pushto). 50 000 slov, M[artiros] G[rigorevich] Aslanov. Moscow: Izd-vo "Sovetskaia Entsiklopediia", 1966. [BOX 7]


[PASIGRAPHY] Pasigraphical dictionary and grammar, by Anton Bachmaier. London: Trübner, 1871 [on wrappers]; Augsburg: printed by A. Volkhart, 1870 [on title page]. [BOX 18]


[PAUMARÍ: see APURINÃ]


[PENGO] The Pengo Language: Grammar, Texts, and Vocabulary, by T. Burrow & S[udhibhushan] Bhattacharya. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1970. [BOX 73]


[PENNSYLVANIA DUTCH]

Pennsylvania German Manual, for Pronouncing, Speaking and Writing English. A Guide Book for Schools and Families. In Three Parts: Part I. Pronuncing Exercises. Part II. Pennsylvania German Reader. Part III Pennsylvania German Dictionary, by A[braham] R[easor] Horne. Kutztown, PA.: Urick & Gehring, 1875. [BOX 57]

Second, revised and enlarged edition, 1896: Pennsylvania German Manual for Pronouncing, Speaking and Writing English. Guide Book for Families and Schools. Revised and Enlarged Edition. In Four parts: Part I-English Pronunciation. Part II-Pennsylvania German Literature with English Translation. Part III-Pennsylvania German Dictionary. Part IV-English Vocabulary, by A[braham] R[easor] Horne. Allentown, Pennsylvania: National Educator Print., 1896. [BOX 64]

Third edition, second printing, 1910: Horne's Pennsylvania German Manual. How Pennsylvania German is spoken and written. For pronouncing, speaking and writing English. Third edition. Enlarged and profusely illustrated. Part I. English Pronunciation. Part II. Pennsylvania German literature, with English translation. Part III. Pennsylvania German dictionary, with grammar and spelling rules. Part IV. English vocabulary, by A[braham] R[easor] Horne. Allentown, Pennsylvania: T. K. Horne, 1910. Second printing of third (1905) edition. [BOX 8]

Common sense Pennsylvania German dictionary containing nearly all the Pennsylvania German words in common use, with their English equivalents, by James C. Lins. Kempton, Pa.: James C. Lins, 1887. [BOX 2]

Glossary of 6167 English Words and Expressions and their Berks County Pennsylvania Dutch Equivalents, by Howard Snader. Reading, Pennsylvania: Reading Eagle Press, 1948. [BOX 7]

Pennsylvania Dutch Dictionary and Handbook with special emphasis on the dialect that was, and is, spoken in York County, Pennsylvania. [English-Pennsylvania Dutch], by Edwin R. Danner. York, PA: William Penn Senior High School and Atreus Wanner Vocational School, 1951. [BOX 65]

The English Pennsylvania Dutch dictionary. A glossary of English words and expressions with their Pennsylvania Dutch equivalents together with an illustrated compilation of many unique and fascinating facets of the wonderful Pennsylvania Dutch people and their historical background, including their culture and customs, arts and crafts, folklore and folkways, by Howard Snader. Reading, Pa.: Culinary Arts Press, c. 1965. [BOX 15]

The Pennsylvania German dialect. Pennsylvania German-English dictionary and Pennsylvania German proverbs and sayings, and short conversations, with English translations. Also the life story of a Pennsylvania German boy growing up, and what life is like as an: Old Order Mennonite, by Allan M. Buehler. [Cambridge, Ontario: The Author, 1977]. [BOX 15]


[PENNSYLVANIA GERMAN: see PENNSYLVANIA DUTCH]


[PERSIAN DIALECTS: BAKHTIARI, BADAKHSHANI, HAWRAMI, JAWSHAQAN, JUDEO-PERSIAN; MADAGLASHTI, MEIME, TABARISTAN, VELATRU] The Phonology of the Bakhtiari, Badakhshani, and Madaglashti Dialects of Modern Persian, with Vocabularies, by D[avid] L[ockhart] R[obinson] Lorimer. London: Royal Asiatic Society, 1922. [BOX 66]

Dialectes des Israélites de Hamadan et d'Ispahan et dialecte de Baba Tahir, by Roubène Abrahamian. Paris: Adrien-Masionneuve, 1936. [BOX 13]

Vazhename-ye Tabari, by Sadegh Kiya. Tehran: n.p., 1312 [1937]. [BOX 31]

Three Persian Dialects, by Ann K.S. Lambton. London: The Royal Asiatic Society, 1938. [BOX 9]

The Dialect of Awroman (Hawraman-I Luhon). Grammatical sketch, texts, and vocabulary, by D. N. MacKenzie. Copenhagen: Ejnar Munksgaard, 1966. [BOX 6]


[PHALURA] Notes on Phalãra, an unknown Dardic language of Chitral, by Georg Morgenstierne. Oslo: Jacob Dybwad, 1941. [BOX 6]

Die Sprache von Sau in Ostafghanistan. Beitr¨a;ge zur Kenntnis des Dardischen Phulãra, by Georg Buddruss. Munich: Kitzinger in Kommission, 1967. [BOX 2]


[PHILIPPINE LANGUAGES] A Composite Vocabulary of Philippine Languages, by The Institute of National Language. Manila: Institute of National Language, 1953. [BOX 14]

Philippine Minor Languagues: Word Lists and Phonologies, ed. by Lawrence A[ndrew] Reid. [Honoluly]: University of Hawaii Press, 1971. [BOX 20]


[PIAROA] Manuel Glotológico del Idioma Wo'tiheh, by Pedro J[uan] Krisologo B. Caracas: Centro de Lenguas Indigenas, Instituto de Investigaciones Historicas, Universidad Catolica "Andres Bello", 1976. [BOX 59]


[PIDGIN, CAMEROON] Wes-Kos [Pidgin-English] Glossary: [Preliminary copy] English >Pidgin-English, compiled and edited by G. D. Schneider. Mimeographed manuscript prepared for the Peace Corps, dated Summer 1965. [BOX 37]

Wes-Kos [Pidgin-English] proverbs, idioms, names, compiled by Gilbert D. Schneider. [Athens, Ohio: Center for International Studies], 1965. [BOX 37]

[Cover title] An Introduction to West African Pidgin English, by David [J.] Dwyer, supervised by Davis Smith. [East Lansing]: Produced for the United States Peace Corps by the African Studies Center, Michigan State University, n.d. [1967]. [BOX 40]


[PIDGINS: see also AUSTRALIAN ABORIGINAL PIDGIN; BISLAMA; CHINESE PIDGIN ENGLISH; CHINOOK JARGON; MOBILIAN TRADE LANGUAGE; NEO-MELANESIAN; PIDGIN, CAMEROON; SOUTH SEA ISLANDS PIDGIN; WEST INDIAN ENGLISH] Pidgin English, by Edgar Sheppard Sayer. Toronto, Canada: E. S. Sayer, 1944. [BOX 13]

Pidgin phrasebook/ Trevor Balzer. 1999 2nd ed. [BOX 66]


[PILIPINO: see TAGALOG]


[PIMA BAJO, SONORA] The Pima Bajo of Central Sonora, Mexico, by Campbell W. Pennington. Salt Lake City: University of Utah Press, [1980]. 2 vols. [BOX 21]


[PIPIL] Nawat-English Toponymic Lexicon, by Arden E. M. du Boi. San José, Costa Rica: Editorial Texto, 1976. [BOX 1]

The Pipil Language of El Salvador, by Lyle Campbell. Berlin, New York, Amsterdam: Mouton Publishers, [1985]. [BOX 20]


[PITCAIRN-NORFOLK] The Pitcairnese language, by A[lan] S[trode] C[ampbell] Ross. London: Andre Deutsch, 1964. [BOX 22]

A Dictionary of Norfolk Words and Usages, compiled by Beryl Nobbs. [Norfolk Island: Beryl Nobbs, printed by Photopress International, 1986]. [BOX 18]

Second edition (1992): A Dictionary of Norfolk Words and Usages plus English-Norfolk Appendix. Second edition. [Norfolk Island: Beryl Nobbs, printed by Photopress International, 1992]. [BOX 15]


[PLAINS INDIAN SIGN LANGUAGE] "Sign Language among North American Indians compared with that among other peoples and deaf-mutes," by Garrick Mallery, in: First Annual Report of the Bureau of American Ethnology to the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution, 1879-'80. Washington: Government Printing Office, 1881, pp. 263-552. [BOX 76]

The Indian sign language, with brief explanatory notes of the gestures taught deaf-mutes in our institutions for their instruction and a description of some of the peculiar laws, customs, myths, superstitions, ways of living, code of peace and war signals of our aborigines, by W[illiam] P[hilo] Clark [1845?-1884]. Philadelphia: L.R. Hamersly & Co., 1885. [BOX 71]

Universal Indian sign language of the Plains Indians of North America together with a dictionary of synonyms covering the basic words represented; also, a codification of pictographic symbols of the Ojibway and Sioux nations, William Tomkins. San Diego, Calif.: William Tomkins, 1926. [BOX 31]

[Cover title] How to talk in the Indian sign language, by Buffalo Child Long Lance [1890-1932]. Akron, Ohio: B.F. Goodrich Rubber Co., 1930. [BOX 5]

How: sign talk in pictures, by Iron Eyes Cody [1904- ] assisted by Ye-Was, illustrated by Clarence Ellsworth, posed by Iron Eyes and Ye-Was. Cover title: How: Indian Sign Talk in Pictures. Hollywood, Calif.: Published as a Boelter Classic by Homer H. Boelter Lithography, 1952. [BOX 24]

Second, enlarged and revised edition (1970): Indian talk: hand signals of the American Indians, by Iron Eyes Cody, illustrated by Ken Mansker, Flathead Indian Artist, and posed by Iron Eyes, Yeawas, Robert and Arthur. Healdsburg, Calif.: Naturegraph Publishers, 1970. [BOX 24]

[Cover title] Indian Dictionary, by M[argaret] M. Browne. Casper, Wyoming: S.E. Boyer, n.d. [BOX 15]


[POCHUTLA: see ZAPOTECO, EASTERN POCHUTLA; ZAPOTECO, WESTERN POCHUTLA]


[POKOMAM, EASTERN: see also QUICHÉ] Diccionario pocomam y español, edited by Carolina de McArthur & Ricardo McArthur. [Guatemala]: Instituto Lingüístico de Verano de Centroamérica, 1995. [BOX 27]

[POLICE MOTU] Brief English-Motuan Vocabulary for Medical Personnel, compiled by Lieut. J. N. Walshe. [New Guinea: N[ew] G[uinea] F[orces?] Printing Unit, c. 1942]. [BOX 71]

A Primer of Police Motu, by Percy Chatterton. Port Moresby: Department of Education [printed by The Cairns Post Pty. Ltd, Cairns, Australia], 1950. [BOX 55]

Revised edition, post-1962: A Primer of Police Motu, by Percy Chatterton. Sydney: Pacific Publications, n.d. [ca. 1962]. [BOX 71]

New, renamed edition, 1972: Hiri Motu (Police Motu), by Percy Chatterton. S.l.: [U.F.M Press, 1972]. [BOX 55]

A Dictionary of Police Motu, [edited by Richard Brett, Raymond Brown, Ruth Brown & Velma Foreman]. [Port Moresby: Institute of Summer Linguistics, 1962]. [BOX 20]

Police Motu. An introduction to the Trade Language of Papua (New Guinea) for Anthropologists and other fieldworkers, edited by S[tephen] A[dolphe] Wurm & J. B. Harris. Canberra: Linguistic Circle of Canberra, 1963. [BOX 16]

The Rhyming List of 2,1000 Common English Words with Explanations in Police Motu, by N. Gore. [Papua New Guinea]: n.p., n.d. [c. 1965?]. [BOX 17]


[POLYGLOT] Opuscula. Essays chiefly philological and ethnographical, by Robert Gordon Latham [1812-1888]. [London]; Edinburgh; Leipzig: Williams & Norgate, 14 Henrietta Street, Covent Garden, London and 20 South Frederick Street, Edinburgh. Leipzig, R. Hartmann, (Leipzig printed by B.G. Teubner), 1860. [BOX 36]


[POPOLOCA DE SAN JUAN ATZINGO] Diccionario popoloca de San Juan Ataingo Puebla, by Jeanne Austin Krumholz, Marjorie Kalstrom Dolson & Miguel Hernandez Ayuso. Sucursal en Tucson, Az, E.U.A.: Instituto Linguistico de Verano, 1995. [BOX 25]


[POPOLUCA] Diccionario popoluca de Oluta: popoluca-espanol, espanol-popoluca, by Lawrence E. Clark [1929- ]. Mexico, D.F.: Instituto Linguistico de Verano, 1981. [BOX 25]


[PROTO-MINAHASAN] Proto-Minahasan. Phonology, Morphology and Wordlist, by J[ames] N. Sneddon. Canberra: Department of Linguistics, Research School of Pacific Studies, Australian National University, 1978. [BOX 35]


[PROTO-POLYNESIAN] Proto-Polynesian word list I, by David S. Walsh. Auckland: Linguistic Society of New Zealand, 1966. [BOX 11]


[PUELCHE] Manual o vocabulario de la lengua pampa y del estilo familiar para el uso de los jefes y oficiales del ejercito, y de las familias a cuyo cargo estan los indigenas, Federico Barbara [1828-1893]. Buenos Aires: Imprenta y Liberia de Mayo, 1879. [BOX 71]

Gramatica y Diccionario de la lengua pampa (pamparanquel-araucano) de Juan Manuel [Jose Domingo Ortiz] de Rosas, ed. by Oscar R. Suarez Caviglia & Enrique Stieben. Buenos Aires: Editorial Albatros, 1947. [BOX 29]


[PUGET SALISH: see LUSHOOTSEED]


[PUKKHTO / PUKSHTO / see PASHTO]


[PUNJABI] A dictionary, English and Punjabee, outlines of grammar, also dialogues, English and Punjabee, with grammar and explanatory notes, by Captain [Samuel Cross] Starkey. Calcutta: printed by d'Rozario and Co., 1849. [BOX 22]

An English-Panjabi Vocabulary of 5800 Words, by T[homas] Grahame Bailey. Calcutta: printed at the Baptist Mission Press, and published by the author, 1919. [BOX 15]

Pandzhabsko-russkii slovar. oloko 35000 slov, by Izrail Savelevich Rabinovich. Moscow: Gos. izd-vo inostrannykh i natsionalnykh slovarei, 1961. [BOX 48]


[PURÉPECHA]

Arte de la lengua tarasca, dispuesto con nuevo estilo y claridad por el r. p. m. fr. Diego Basalenque[1577-1651]... año de 1714. Cover title: Arte del idioma tarasco por el P. Fr. Diego Basalenque año de 1714. Mexico City: Oficina tip. de la Secretaria de fomento. 1886. [BOX 3]

Diccionario de la lengua phorhepecha: español-phorhepecha, phorhepecha-español, by Pablo Velásquez Gallardo. Mexico City: Fondo de Cultura Economica, 1978. Also a second copy, reprinted 1988. [BOX 20]


[PUSHTU: see PASHTO]


[QUECHUA] Die Kechua-Sprache, by J[ohann] J[akob] v[on] Tschudi. Vienna: Kaiserliche-königliche Hof- und Staatsdruckerei, 1853. 2 volumes [I. & II. Abteilung: Sprachlehre und Sprachproben; III. Abteilung: Wörterbuch] [BOX 55]

Leyendas de los indios quichuas, by Filiberto de Oliveira Cezar [1856-1910]. Buenos Aires: Imp. de R. Puig, 1892. [BOX 1]

Vocabularies of the general language of the Incas of Peru or Runa simi (called Quichua by the Spanish grammarians), by Sir Clements [Robert] Markham [1830-1916]. London : Williams & Norgate, 1908. [BOX 29]

Vocabulario trilingue: español-queshwa (Quechua)-ingles: con un apendice de aforismos en lengua inkayka, by Faustino Espinoza Navarro. Cuzco: H.G. Rozas, 1956. [BOX 24]

Gramatica y diccionario qechua, by A. Orlando Vela F. [Lima]: Ediciones Studium, [1965]. [BOX 34]

Vocabulario quechua del Pastaza, by Peter Landerman. Yarinacocha, Peru:

Instituto Linguistico de Verano, 1973. [BOX 25]

Diccionario español-quechua, by Francisco [Javier] Carranza [Romero]. Seoul: Korea: Instituto de Estudios Iberoamericanos, Universidad Nacional de Seúl,

1992. [BOX 23]

Diccionario básico del idioma aymara /Gómez Bacarreza, Donato. La Paz : Instituto de Estudios Bolivianos, 1999. [BOX 66]


[QUECHUA, HUANUCO, HUALLAGA] Rimaycuna: quechua de Huanuco: diccionario del quechua del Huallaga, con indices castellano e ingles, by David John Weber et al. Lima, Peru: Instituto Lingüistico de Verano, 1998. [BOX 12]


[QUICHÉ] Diccionario Quiché-Español, by Juan de Leon. Guatemala: [Editorial Landivar], 1954. [BOX 14]

Diccionario Castellano-Quiché y Voces Castellano-Pocomam, by Celso Narciso Teletor. Guatemala City: [Tipografía NacIonal], 1959. [BOX 15]

Quiche-English dictionary, by Munro S. Edmonson. New Orleans: Middle American Research Institute, Tulane University, 1965. 8/7/99. $60. Ethnographic Arts Publications. [BOX 30]

Diccionario del idioma k'iche', by Pedro Florentino Ajpacaja Tum et al. Antigua Guatemala: Proyecto Lingüistico Francisco Marroquin, 1996. [BOX 12]


[RADE] An English-Rade Vocabulary, by Soren Egerod. Stockholm: Museum of Far Eastern Antiquities, 1978. [BOX 31]

A Rhade-English Dictionary with English-Rhade Finderlist, by J[ames] A. Tharp & Y-Bham Buon-Ya. Canberra: Department of Linguistics, Research School of Pacific Studies, The Australian National University, 1980. [BOX 39]


[RALUANA: see KAUANA]


[RAMA] Vokabular der Rama-Sprache nebst grammatischem Abriss, by Walter Lehmann [1878- ]. Munich: Verlag der Bayerischen Akademie der Wissenschaften, 1914. [BOX 39]


[RAPA NUI] Diccionario y gramatica de la lengua de la Isla de Pascua: pascuense-castellano, castellano-pascuense, by Jordi Fuentes. [Santiago de Chile]: Editorial Andres Bello, 1960. 5/21/99. $100. Libros Latinos. [BOX 29]


[RAROTONGAN] Vocabulary of the Mangaian Language, F[rederick] W[illiam] Christian. Honolulu: Bernice P. Bishop Museum, 1924. [BOX 54]

A Dictionary of the Maori Language of Rarotonga, manuscript by Stephen Savage. Wellington, N.Z.: Department of Island Territory, 1962. [BOX 9]

Cook Islands Maori Dictionary, by Jasper Buse & Raututi Taringa, ed. By Bruce Biggs & Rangi Moeka'a. Canberra: The Australian National University, 1996. [BOX 62]


[RENNELLESE SIGN LANGUAGE] A lexicon of signs from a Polynesian outliner [sic] island: a description af 217 signs as developed and used by Kagobai, the only deaf-mute of Rennell Island, by Rolf Kuschel. Copenhagen: Universitet, Psykologisk Laboratorium (Akademisk Forlag), 1974. [BOX 1]


[RESIGARO: see also CHICHIMECA PAME, NORTHERN] Vocabulario resígaro, by Trevor R. Allin. [Lima]; [Yarinacocha, Peru]: Ministerio de Educación ; Instituto Lingüístico de Verano, 1979. [BOX 5]


[RÉUNION CREOLE FRENCH] P'tit glossaire: le piment des mots creoles, by Jean Albany. Paris: J. Albany, 1974. [BOX 21]

Dictionnaire creole reunionnais/francais, by Daniel Baggioni..[Reunion]: Université de la Réunion, Faculté des lettres et sciences humaines, 1990. Second, enlarged edition. 1998. [BOX 24]


[RHADE: see RADE]


[RIF: see TARIFIT]


[ROMANI (GYPSY) LANGUAGES] Zigeuner-Arabisch. Wortschatz und Grammatik der arabischen Bestandteile in den morgenl¨a;ndischen Zigeunersprachen nebst einer Einleitung über das arabische Rotw¨a;lsch und die Namen der morgenl¨a;ndischen Zigeuner, by Enno Littmann. Bonn-Leipzig: Kurt Schroeder Verlag, 1920. [BOX 62]


[ROMANI, BALKAN] Études sur les Tchinghianés; ou, Bohémiens de l'Empire ottoman, by Alexandre G. Paspati [ Alexandros Georgiou Paspates]. Constantinople: Imprimérie Antoine Koroméla, 1870. [BOX 4]

Romani and Dard. George Fraser Black. English Book 6 p. New York, Public library, 1916. [BOX 66]

A glossary of Greek Romany as spoken in Agia Varvara (Athens), by Gordon M. Messing. Columbus, Ohio: Slavica Publishers, 1988. [BOX 11]

Gypsy-English / English-Gypsy Concise Dictionary, by Atanas Slavov. New York: Hippocrene Books, 1999. 9/15/99. $17.95. Powell's. [BOX 16Z]


[ROMANI, BALTIC] Wörterbuch des Zigeunerdialektes von Zakopane, mit Einleitung, Erg¨a;nzungen und Anmerkungen von Edward Klich = Stownik Cyganow z Zakopanego, 2 wstepem, uzupetnieniami i uwagami E. Klicha, by Jan Michat Rozwadowski. Krakow: Naktadem Polskiej Akademiji Umiejetnosci, 1936. [BOX 4]


[ROMANI, CARPATHIAN] Romani cib, das ist: Grammatik und worterbuch der zigeuner sprache, nebst einigen fabeln in derselben. Dazu als Anhang die Hantyrka, oder die "echische Diebessprache, by Anton Jaroslaw Puchmayer [1769-1820]. Prague: Gedruckt in der Fürst-erzbischöflichen Buchdruckerey, 1821. 4/4/00. DM 680 (=$331). Versandantiquariat Lechler. [BOX 72]


[ROMANI, SINTE] Wörterbuch des dialekts der deutschen Zigeuner, by Rodolf von Sowa [1853-1900]. Leipzig: Brockhaus, 1898. [BOX 11]

Einführung in die mitteleurop¨a;ische Zigeunersprache, mit Wörterverzeichnis, by Eduard Hrkal. Leipzig: Otto Harrassowitz, 1940. [BOX 24]

"Bosnian Romani: Vocabulary," by Rade Uhlik, ed. with annotations and etymologies by Frederick George Ackerley, in: Journal of the Gypsy Lore Society, Third Series, Vol. XXI, Parts 1-2, January-April, 1942, pp. 24-55. AND "Bosnian Romani: Vocabulary," continuation in Journal of the Gypsy Lore Society, Third Series, Vol. XXI, Parts 3-4, July-October, 1942, pp. 110-141. [BOX 12]

Srpskohrvaatsko-Ciganski Recnik (Romane Alava), by Ráde Uhlik. Sarajevo: Svjetlost, 1947. [BOX 55]

Wörterbuch Romani-Deutsch-Englisch für den südosteurop¨a;ischen Raum. Mit einer Grammatik der Dialektvarianten, by Norbert Boretzky & Birgit Igla. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz Verlag, 1994. [BOX 14]


[ROMANI, VLACH] The Zincali; or, An account of the gypsies of Spain. With an original collection of their songs and poetry, and a copious dictionary of their language, by George [Henry] Borrow. London: John Murray, 1841. [BOX 24]

First American edition, 1842: The Zincali; or, An account of the gypsies of Spain. With an original collection of their songs and poetry, by George [Henry] Borrow. New York: Wiley and Putnam, 1842. Two volumes in one. [BOX 24]

Les Tsiganes: histoire, ethnographie, linguistique, grammaire, dictionnaire, by C. J. Popp Serboianu. Paris: Payot, 1930. [BOX 12]

"Vulcanius' Romani Vocabulary," in: Journal of the Gypsy Lore Society, Third Series, Vol. IX, Part 1. [BOX 12]

Dictionnaire tsigane-français: dialecte kalderash, by Georges Calvet. Paris: L'Asiatheque, 1993. [BOX 16]


[RONGA] Dicionários Xironga-Português e Português-Xironga, precedidos de certas instruções necessárias à formação de grande número de palavras, by José Luis Quintão. Lisbon: Agéncia geral das Colóniasm, Divisão de Publicaçõs e Biblioteca, 1951. [BOX 21]

Dicionário Ronga-Português, by Rodrigo de Sá Nogueira. Lisbon: Junta de Investigações do Ultramar, 1960. [BOX 73]


[ROSHAN DIALECT: see SHUGNI]


[ROTI: see also MALAY] Rottineesch-Hollandsch Woordenboek, by J[ohann] C[hristoph] G[erhard] Jonker. Leiden: E. J. Brill, 1908. [BOX 6]


[ROTUMAN] Rotuman Grammar and Dictionary comprising Rotuman phonetics and grammar and a Rotuman-English dictionary, C[lerk] Maxwell Churchward. [Sydney]: Printed by the Australasian Medical Publishing Company limited for the Methodist Church of Australasia, Department of Overseas Missions, 1940. [BOX 56]


[ROVIANA] A Roviana and English dictionary with English-Roviana index and list of Natural history objects, by J. H. L[awry] Waterhouse. Guadalcanar, British Solomon Islands: Printed at the Melanesian Mission Press, 1928. [BOX 57]


[RUANDA: see KIVU PGYMY]


[RUSHAN: see SHUGHNI]


[RWANDA: see also HAYA]


[SA'A] Dictionary and Grammar of the Language of Sa'a and Ulawa, Solomon Islands, by Walter G[eorge] Givens. Washington, D.C.: Carnegie Institution, 1918. [BOX 71]


[SAEK] William J. Gedney's The Saek Language: Glossaries, Texts, and Translations, edited by Thomas John Hudak. Ann Arbor, Michigan: The University of Michigan, Center for South and Southeast Asian Studies, 1993. [BOX 4]


[SAGADA IGOROT: see IGOROT]


[SAHO] Die Saho-Sprache, Erster Band. Texte der Saho-Sprache. Zweiter Band. Wörterbuch der Saho-Sprache, by Leo Reinisch [1832-1919]. Vienna: Alfred Hölder, 1889, 1890. 2 vols. [BOX 13]


[SAHU] Sahu-Indonesian-English dictionary and Sahu grammar sketch, by L[eontien] E. Visser & C.L.Voorhoeve. Dordrecht, Holland ; Providence, U.S.A.:Foris Publications, 1987. [BOX 28]


[SAKA] Saka Studies, by Sten Konow. Oslo: Oslo Ethnografiske Museum, 1932. [BOX 41]


[SALINAN: see also COSTANOAN] A Vocabulary of the language of San Antonio Mission, California, by Bonaventure Sitjar. New York: Cramoisy Press, 1861. [BOX 46]

[Cover title] The Language of the Salinan Indians, by J[ohn] Alden Mason. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1918. [BOX 16]


[SALISH: see NORTH STRAITS SALISH]


[SAMOAN] A Grammar and Dictionary of the Samoan Language, by George Pratt. London: Trübner & Co., 1878. Second edition. [BOX 2]

Third edition, revised, 1893: A Grammar and Dictionary of the Samoan Language, with English and Samoan Vocabulary, by George Pratt. [London]: London Missionary Society, 1893. [BOX 2]

Fourth edition, enlarged and revised, 1911: Pratt's Grammar and Dictionary of the Samoan Language. Fourth edition, enlarged and revised, by J. E. Newell. Malua, Samoa: London Missionary Society, 1911. [BOX 67]

Dictionnaire Samoa-Français-Anglais et Français-Samoa-Anglais précédé d'une grammaire de la langue Samoa, by L. Violette. Paris: Maisonneuve, 1879. [BOX 18]

Grammatik der Samoanischen Sprache nebst Lesestücken und Wörterbuch, by H. Neffgen. Vienna & Leipzig: A. Hartleben's Verlag, [1903]. [BOX 57]

English translation, 1918: Grammar and Vocabulary of the Samoan Language Together with Remarks on some of the Points of Similarity between the Samoan and Tahitian and Maori Languages, by H. Neffgen, trans. from the German by Arnold B. Stock. London: Kegan Paul, Trench, Trübner & Co., 1918. [BOX 67]

English and Samoan Vocabulary, (O le Faasologaupu Peritania ua Faa-Samoaina.) Being Part III. Of the Grammar and Dictionary of the Samoan Language, by J[ames] E[dward]Newell. Malua, Samoa: London Missionary Society, 1905. 4th ed. [BOX 67]

Samoan Dictionary: Samoan-English. English-Samoan, by G[eorge] B[ertram] Milner. London: Oxford University Press, 1966. [BOX 1, BOX 3]

Interim edition, published in Manila, 1978: Samoan Dictionary: Samoan-English. English-Samoan, by G[eorge] B[ertram] Milner. Manila: Samoan Free Press, 1978. Bibliophile. [BOX 17]

A Lexicon of Foreign Loan-Words in the Samoan Language, by Horst Cain. Cologne, Vienna: Böhlau Verlag, 1986. [BOX 21]


[SAMOYED LANGUAGES] Samojedische Wörterverzeichnisse, compiled and newly edited by Kai Donner [1888-1935]. Helsinki: Suomalais-ugrilaisnen seura, 1932. [BOX 28]


[SAN ANTONIO MISSION: see SALINAN]


[SANDAWE] Die Sandawe: linguistisches und ethnographisches Material aus Deutsch-Ostafrika, by Otto Dempwolff. Hamburg: L. Friederichsen, 1916. [BOX 35]

"Vocabulary of English Words and Sentences Translated into Fiomi, Tatoga, Sandawi." Manuscript wordlist entered on 20 p. printed form, c. 1910. [BOX 53]

A classified vocabulary of the Sandawe language, by Ryohei Kagaya. Tokyo: Institute for the Study of Languages and Cultures of Asia and Africa, Tokyo University of Foreign Studies (ILCAA), 1993. [BOX 27]


[SANGIR] Blanco Woordenlyst, uitgegeven op last der Regeering van Ned. Ind. ten behoeve van Taalvorschers in den Ned. Ind. Arch. Tagulandangsch. N.p., n.d. [ca. 1950's]. [BOX 33]

Sangirees-Nederlands woordenboek met Nederlands-Sangirees register, by K. G. F. Steller. 's-Gravenhage: Martin Nijhoff, 1959. [BOX 34]


[SANGO: see also CONGO LANGUAGES, POLYGLOT] Vocabulaire Français-Sango et Sango-Français, Langue commerciale de l'Oubangui-Chari, précédé d'un abrége grammatical, by J. Calloc'h. Paris: Librairie Paul Geuthner, 1911. [BOX 55]

Sango, langue vehiculaire de l'Oubangui-Chari, by [Charles] Tisserant. Edited by the Vicariat Apostolique de Bangui. Issy-Les Moulineux (Seine): Les Presses missionnaires, 1950. [BOX 2]

A Dictionary of Sango, Charles R[ussell] Taber. Hartford, Ct: Hartford Seminary Foundation, 1965. [BOX 42]

A Grammar of Sango, by William J. Samarin. The Hague: Mouton & Co., 1967. [BOX 73]

Dictionnaire Sango-Français. Bàkàrí Sango-Fàránzì et Lexique Français-Sango. Kεtε Bàkàrí Fàránzì-Sango, by Luc Bouquiaux. Paris: SELAF, 1978 [BOX 19]


[SANTALI] A Santal Dictionary, by P[aul] O[laf] Bodding. Oslo: I Kommisjon Hos Jacob Dybwad, 1929-1936. 5 vols. [BOX 40]


[SAR] Vocabulaire du patois arabe tchadien ou "tourkou" et des dialectes sara-madjinngaye et sara-m'baye (s.-o. du Tchad), suivi de conversations et d'un essai de classification des tribus saras, les superstitions locales, les coutumes et les pratiques de la medicine indigene dans la race sara, by Gaston Muraz [1887- ]. Paris, Limoges, Nancy: Charles-Lavauzelle, n.d. [ca. 1928]. [BOX 10]


[SASAK] Beknopt Sasaksch-Nederlandsch woordenboek, by R[oelof] Goris [1898-1965]. Singaradja (Bali): Kirtya Liefrinck-van der Tuuk, 1938. [BOX 29]


[SAVARA: see SORA]


[SAVI: see PHALURA]


[SAWU] Sawuneesche Woordenlijst, by J. K. Wijngaarden. 's-Gravenhage: Martinus Nijhoff, 1896. [BOX 20]


[SEA DAYAK: see DAYAK]


[SEA ISLANDS CREOLE ENGLISH] The Black Border. Gullah Stories of the Carolina Coast (With a Glossary), by Ambrose E[lliott] Gonzales. Columbia, S.C.: The State Company, 1922. [BOX 24]

Gulluh fuh oonuh (Gullah for you). A Guide to the Gullah Language, by Virginia Mixson Geraty. Orangeburg, South Carolina: Sandlapper Publishing Co., 1997. [BOX 27]


[SEDANG] Ngu'-Vu'ng Sedang. Sedang Vocabulary, by Kenneth D. Smith. Saigon: Bô Giáo-Duc, 1967. [BOX 57]


[SELEPET] Selepet-English Dictionary, by K.A. & N.A. McElhanon. Canberra: The Australian National University, 1970. [BOX 4]


[SELKUP: see also SAMOYED LANGUAGES] Selkupisches Wörterverzeichnis. Tas-Dialekt, by István Erdélyi. Bloomington, Indiana: Indiana University; Mouton & Co., 1970. [BOX 32]

Selkup Texts with Phonetic Introduction and Vocabulary, by László Szabó. Bloomington, Indiana: Indiana University Publications, 1976. [BOX 6]


[SEMAI] A Vocabulary of Central Sakai (Dialect of the Aboriginal Communities of the Gopeng Valley), by R[ichard] J[ames] Wilkinson. Kuala Lumpur: Printed by J. Brown at the Frederated Malay States Government Press, 1915. [BOX 56]

Sengoi-English, English-Sengoi dictionary, by Nathalie Means & Paul B. Means, ed. by Gordon P. Means. [Toronto]: Joint Centre on Modern East Asia, University of Toronto, York University, 1986. [BOX 34]


[SENECA] Seneca Morphology and Dictionary, by Wallace L. Chafe. Washington, D.C.: Smithsonian Press, 1967. [BOX 76]

Onödowa'ga:' Gawë:nö' Oiwa'shö'öh. Words of the Seneca Language, prepared by Wallace Chafe. Salamanca, N.Y.: Seneca Bilingual Education Program, Salamanca City Central School District, 1983. [BOX 37]


[SENGA: see NSENGA]


[SENUFO] Essai de Phonologie du Tyembara (dialecte Sénoufo), by Paulette Roulon. [Paris]: [Societé d'Études Linguistiques et Anthropologiques de France], 1968 [wrappers dated 1972]. [BOX 65]


[SESUTO: see SOUTHERN SOTHHO]


[SHAKACHO] A Dictionary of Moca (Southwestern Ethiopia), by Wolf Leslau. Berkeley and Los Angeles: University of California Press, 1959. [BOX 9]


[SHAMBALA: see also BANTU LANGUAGES] Schambala-Wörterbuch, by F. LangHeinrich. Hamburg: L. Friederichsen, 1921. [BOX 7]


[SHAN: see TAI MAU]


[SHAWNEE: see also MIAMI ] Ten years of Upper Canada in Peace and War, 1805-1815: being the Ridout letters, with annotations by Matilda [Ridout]Edgar [1844-1910]; also an Appendix of the Narrative of the Captivity among the Shawanese Indians, in 1788, of Thos. Ridout, afterwards Surveyor-General of Upper Canada, and a Vocabulary, compiled by him, of the Shawanese Language. Toronto: William Briggs, 1890. [BOX 28]


[SHERPA] Sherpa Nepali English: Conversation and Basic Words, by Ang Phinjo Sherpa. Kathmandu: [Published by the author], n.d. [1989]. [BOX 67]


[SHILLUK] Shilluk Grammar, with a Little Shilluk Dictionary, by B[ernardo] Kohnen. Verona: Missione Africane, 1933. [BOX 61]


[SHINA] Grammar of the Shina (Sina) Language, consisting of a full grammar, with texts and vocabularies of the main or Gilgiti Dialect and briefer grammars (with vocabularies and texts) of the Kohistani, Guresi and Drasi dialects, by T. Grahame Bailey. London: The Royal Asiatic Society, 1924. [BOX 73]


[SHONA] A dictionary, with notes on the grammar of the Mashona language, commonly called Chiswina, [by H. Buck]. London: Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge, 1924. [BOX 9]

English-Chiswina Dictionary with an outline Chiswina Grammar, originally compiled by E. Biehler, revised and published by the Jesuit Fathers. [Mariannhill, Natal]: The Jesuit Fathers, 1927. Third edition, enlarged. [BOX 11] Also: a second copyin poor condition, spine persished, but with contemporary ownership signature of D. M. Close, dated Oct. 1932, and with numerous manuscript additions and notes throughout. [BOX 41]

"Fourth edition," retitled reprint, 1950: A Shona Dictionary, with an outline Shona grammar, originally compiled by E[dward] Biehler. Cape Town: Longmans, Green and Co., 1950. [BOX 67]

A Vocabulary of the Dialects of Mashonaland in the new Orthography, by Bertram H[erbert] Barnes. London: The Sheldon Press, 1932. [BOX 57]

Standard Shona Dictionary, by M. Hannan, S.J. London; New York: Macmillan & Co.; St. Martin's Press, 1959. [BOX 15]

Reprinted, with corrections (1961): identical to above copy, but corrected reprint with 1961 date on title page. [BOX 9]


[SHOSHONI: see also UTE-SOUTERN PAIUTE] Shoshonean dialects of California, by A[lfred] L[ouis] Kroeber [1876-1960]. Berkeley: The University Press, 1907. [BOX 27]

Newe natekwinappeh: Shoshoni stories and dictionary, by Wick R. Miller. Salt Lake City: University of Utah Press, 1972. [BOX 32]


[SHUGHNI] Rushanskie i Khufskie teksty i slovar, by V[alentina] S[tepanovna] Sokolova. Moscow; Leningrad: Izd-vo Akademii nauk SSSR, 1959. [BOX 48]

Bartangskie teksty i slovar, by V[alentina] S[tepanovna] Solokova. Moscow: Izd-vo Akademii nauk SSSR, 1960. [BOX 6]


[SHUSWAP]

Shuswap-English dictionary, A[ert] H[endrik] Kuipers. Leuven: Peeters, 1983. [BOX 22]


[SIAGHA-YENIMU: see MANDOBO]


[SIERRA LEONE LANGUAGES] Specimens of Languages from Sierra Leone, by Northcote W[hitridge] Thomas. London: Harrison and Sons, 1916. [BOX 5]


[SIKSIKA: see BLACKFOOT]


[SIKULE] Vergleichendes Wörterverzeichnis der Sichule-Sprache auf der Insel Simalur an der Westkuste von Sumatra, by Hans K¨a;hler [1912- ]. Berlin: Dietrich Reimer, 1959. [BOX 12]


[SILOZI: see LOZI]


[SINDHI] Hindi-Inglisa-Sindhi sabda-kosa. Hindi-English-Sindhi dictionary, by Deepchandra [Tilokchand][1909- ], Deva Dutta K. Sharma & Prabhudas Brahmachari. Ajmer: Sunder Sahitya Publishing House, 1962. [BOX 27]


[SINHALESE] A School Dictionary: Part First: Cingalese & English; contains the Cingalese words in use only, rendered into English. Part Second: English and Cingalese; contains English primitive words and those of utility only, rendered into Cingalese. An Introduction is prefixed, containing observations on these languages, designed to assist in their acquirement, and an Appendix Is added, containing the Latin and the French Phrases which occur most frequently in English books, by John Callaway. Colombo: Printed for the Author, at the Wesleyan Mission Press, 1821. [BOX 65]

A Pocket Dictionary Of The English And Sinhalese Languages, by the Rev. James Nicholson, Wesleyan Missionary, revised and enlarged by the Rev. David de Silva, and revised again by the Rev. J. Simon de Silva. Colombo: Methodist Book Room, 1901; BOUND WITH: A Sinhalese-English Dictionary abridged from Clough's Dictionary, by Revs. T[homas] Moscrop & R. A. Mendis. Collupitiya: W. Methodist Book Room, 1899. [BOX 17]

A Sinhalese-English dictionary, by the late Rev. Charles Carter. Colombo: Published by The Baptist Missionary Society, printed by The "Ceylon Observer" printing works, 1924. [BOX 37]

An Etymological Glossary of the Sinhalese Language, by Wilhelm Geiger. Colombo: The Royal Asiatic Society Ceylon Branch, 1941. [BOX 62]

Singalsko-russkii slovar: okolo 37 000 slov, by A[leksandr] A[leksandrovich] Belkovich. Moscow: Sovetskaia Entsiklopediia, 1970. [BOX 48]

Clough's Sinhala English Dictionary, by B[enjamin] Clough. New Delhi: Asian Educational Services, 1982. Second New and Enlarged Edition. [BOX 69]


[SIOUX: see DAKOTA; LAKOTA]


[SIRIONÓ] Vocabulario castellano-sirionó, by Anselmo E[bner] Schermair {1902- ].Innsbruck: Innsbrucker Gesellschaft zur Pflege der Geissteswissenschaften, 1962. [BOX 11]


[SKAGIT-NISQUALLY: see LUSHOOTSEED]


[SLAVEY] [cover title] Slave Indians, Tenne, [attributed to Robert Kennicott, 1835-1866]. [S.l.: s.n., n.d. [1869?]. [BOX 43]


[SM'ALGYAX: see TSIMSHIAN]


[SOMALI] Somali-English and English-Somali Dictionary, Evangeliste de Larajasse. London: Kegan Paul, Trench, Trübner & Co., 1897. [BOX 64]

Somali-English dictionary, by R[oy] C[live] Abraham. London: University of London Press, 1964. [BOX 16]

Second impression (1966): Somali-English Dictionary, by R. C. Abraham. University of London Press, 1966. Second impression. [BOX 65]

Petit Lexique Somali-Français, by Christophe Philibert. Paris: Librarie C. Klincksieck, 1976. [BOX 63]

The Modernisation of Somali Vocabulary, with Particular Reference to the Period from 1972 to the Present, by John Charles Caney. Hamburg: Helmut Buske Verlag, 1984. [BOX 29]

Somali-English Dictionary, by Virginia Luling. Wheaton, Maryland: Dunwoody Press, 1987. [BOX 27]

English-Somali Somali-English Dictionary. Ingirisi Soomaali Qaamuus Soomaali Ingirisi, compiled by Mohamud Korshel. New Delhi: Star Publications, 1994. [BOX 19]


[SONGHAI] Manuel de la langue soñgay parlée de Tombouctou à Say dans la boucle du Niger, by [Augustin] Hacquard [1860-1901] &. [Auguste] Dupuis[-Yakouba] [b. 1865]. Paris: J. Maisonneuve, 1897. [BOX 49]

Lexique Songhoy, by Sididié Oumar Traoré. [Bamako]: Institut des Sciences Humaines du Mali, 1976. [BOX 38]


[SONGE: see CONGO LANGUAGES, POLYGLOT]


[SONGHOY: see SONGHAI]


[SONGUM: see also BONGU]


[SONSOROL] Grammar and Vocabulary of the Language of Sonsorol-Tobi, by A[rthur] Capell. Sydney: University of Sydney, 1969. [BOX 61]


[SORA] English-Sora Dictionary, compiled by G[idugu] V[enkata] Ramamutri. Madras: Printed by the Superintendent, Government Press, 1933. [BOX 57]

ALSO: Sora-English Dictionary, by G[idugu] V[enkata] Ramamutri. Madras: Printed by the Superintendent, Government Press, 1938. [BOX 57]


[SOTHO, NORTHERN] Noord-Sotho. Northern-Sotho. Terminologie en spelreëls No. 2. Terminology and Orthography No. 2. The Department of Bantu Education. Pretoria: Staatsdrukker; The Government Printer, 1962. [BOX 67]


[SOTHO, SOUTHERN: see also FANAGOLO] Sesuto-English vocabulary. Mantsue a Sesotho le tlalosetso ea 'ona ka sEnglish. [Morija]: Khatiso ea Moria, 1876. [BOX 24]

Second, enlarged edition, 1893: Se-Suto-English and English-Se-Suto vocabulary. Mantsue a se-Sotho le se-English le hlaloso ea 'ona, with an elementary sketch of se-Suto grammarby E. Jacottet, by A[dolphe] Mabille [1836-1894]. Moria: Khatiso, 1893. 1/26/00. $500. Rulon-Miller. [BOX 71]

Fifth edition, 1924: Sesuto-English Dictionary, compiled by A. Mabille & H. Dieterlen. Morija: Sesuto Book Depot, 1924. Fifth edition. [BOX 64]

New, revised and enlarged edition, 1950: Southern Sotho-English Dictionary, by A. Mabille & H. Dieterlen, reclassified, revised and enlarged by R. A. Paroz. Morija, Basutoland: Morija Sesuto Book Depot, 1950. [BOX 6]

First printing of the 1950 edition in the new orthography, 1961: Southern Sotho-English Dictionary, by A. Mabille & H. Dieterlen, reclassified, revised and enlarged by R. A. Paroz. Morija, Basutoland: Morija Sesuto Book Depot, 1961. [BOX 65]

Steps to learn the Sesuto language comprising an elementary grammar, graduated exercises, and a short vocabulary, Second Edition, [by F. Hermann Kruger]. Morija, Basutoland: A. Mabille, 1883. Second edition. [BOX 55]

Everyday Sesotho Grammar, by M. R. L. Sharpe. Morija: Morija Sesuto Book Depot, 1952. [BOX 55]]

Suid-Sotho / Southern Sotho. Terminologie en Spelreëls No. 2. Teminology [sic] and Spelling No. 2. Department of Bantu Education. Pretoria: Staatsdrukker; The Government Printer, 1962. [BOX 17]


[SOUTH AUSTRALIAN ABORIGINAL LANGUAGES] The Native Tribes of South Australia, comprising The Narrinyeri, by the Rev. George Taplin. The Adelaide tribe, by Dr. Wyatt, J.P. The Encounter Bay Tribe, by the Rev. A. Meyer. The Port Lincoln Tribe, by the Rev. C.W. Schürmann. The Dieyerie Tribe, by S. Gason. Vocabulary of Woolner District Dialect (Northern Territory) by John Wm. Ogilvie Bennett, with an Introductory Chapter by J.D. Woods. Adelaide: E. S. Wigg & Son, 1879. [BOX 72]

"Native Vocabulary of Miscellaneous New South Wales Objects," by Jas. Larmer, in: Journal and Proceedings of the Royal Society of New South Wales, 1898, pp. 223-229. [BOX 10]


[SOUTHERN PUGET SOUND SALISH] Southern Puget Sound Salish: Texts, Place Names and Dictionary, by Warren A. Snyder. Sacramento, Cal.: The Sacramento Anthropological Society, Sacramento State College, 1968. [BOX 78]


[SOUTHERN RHODESIAN LANGUAGES] A Southern Rhodesian Botanical Dictionary of Native and English Plant Names, by H[iram] Wild. Salisbury, Southern Rhodesia: The Government Printer, 1952. [BOX 14]

Second edition, enlarged and revised, [1972]: A Rhodesian botanical dictionary of African and English plant names, by Hiram Wild, revised and enlarged by H. M. Biegel and S. Mavi. Salisbury, Rhodesia: Government Printer, 1972. [BOX 33]


[SOUTH SEA ISLAND VOCABULARIES] Captain Cook's South Sea Island vocabularies, by Peter A. Lanyon-Orgill. London: published by the author, 1979. [BOX 23]


[SOUTH SEA ISLANDS PIDGIN ENGLISH: see AUSTRALIAN ABORIGINAL PIDGIN ENGLISH]


[SPANISH DIALECT, ST. BERNARD PARISH, LOUISIANA] The Spanish Dialect in St. Bernard Parish, Louisiana, by Raymond R. MacCurdy. Albuquerque: The University of New Mexico Press, 1950. [BOX 20]


[ST. LUCIAN CREOLE] Dictionary of St. Lucian Creole. Part 1: Kwéyòl-English. Part 2: English-Kwéyòl, compiled by Jones E. Mondesir, edited by Lawrence D. Carrington. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter, 1992. [BOX 62]


[SUBANU: see CEBUANO]


[SUDANESE ARABIC: see ARABIC, SUDANESE SPOKEN]


[SUDANESE AFRICAN LANGUAGES] Zentralsudanische Studien: Wörterverzeichnisse der Deutschen Zentral Afrika Expedition 1910/1911, nachgelassene Aufnahmen von Gustav Nachtigal und eignene Sammlungen, ed. by Johannes Lukas. Hamburg: Friederichsen, De Gruyter & Co., 1937. [BOX 78]


[SUKUMA: see also BANTU LANGUAGES, HAYA] A Vocabulary of Sukuma, compiled by I[rvine] Richardson, ed. by W.M. Mann. London: School of Oriental and African Studies, University of London, 1967. [BOX 19]


[SULU] English-Sulu-Malay vocabulary with useful sentences, tables, &c., by Andson Cowie, edited by Wm. Clark Cowie. London: Printed for the Editor by T. May, 1893.


[SUMBA] [no title page] Soembaneesche Wordenlijst, by W. Pos. Extract from Bijdragen tot de taal-, land- en volkenkunde van Nederlandsch- Indie, ser. 6, v.9, pp. [184]-284. 1901. [BOX 36]

Kamberaas (Oost-Soembaas)-Nederlands Woordenboek met Nederlands-Kamberaas Register, by L. Onvlee, Oe. H. Kapita & P. J. Luijendijk. Dordrecht: Foris Publications, 1984. [BOX 18]


[SUMO: see also MOSKITO] Vocabulario preliminar del ulwa (sumu meridional). [Managua, Nicaragua]: [Cambridge, Mass.]: Centro de Investigaciones y Documentacion de la Costa Atlantica; Centro de Ciencia Cognitiva, Instituto Tecnologico de Massachusetts, 1988. [BOX 38]

Diccionario Elemental del Ulwa (sumu meridional) Karawala, Región Autónoma Atlántico Sur, Nicaragua; [Bluefields]; [Cambridge, MA]: CODIUL / UYUTMUBAL; Centro de Inverstigaciones y Documentación de la Costa Atlántica; Centro de Ciencia Cognitiva, Instituto Technológico de Massachusetts, 1989.] [BOX 38]

Diccionario panamahka. Sumo-español-sumo, by Melba E. McLean Cornelio. [Managua]: CIDCA, 1996. [BOX 10]


[SUNDA] Soendasch-Nederduitsch Woordenboek, in three parts., by H. J. Oosting. Batavia: Ogilvie and Co., 1879. [BOX 5]

Supplement door H.J. Oosting op het door hem, op last van het gouvernement van Ned.-Indie, zamengestelde Soendasch-Nederduitsch woordenboek, by H. J. Oosting. Amsterdam: Johannes Müller, 1882. [BOX 33]

Nederduitsch-Soendasch Woordenboek, by H. J. Oosting. Amsterdam: Johannes Müller, 1887. [BOX 74]

Soendaas-Nederlands woordenboek, by F. S. Eringa [d. 1983]. Dordrecht; Cinnaminson, U.S.A.: Cinnaminson, N.J., U.S.A.: Foris Publications Holland ; Sole distributor for the U.S.A. and Canada, Foris Publications U.S.A, 1984. [BOX 34]


[SUNDANESE: see SUNDA]


[SUSU] Dictionnaire français-soso et soso-français, by [Jean Baptiste] Raimbault. 2. Édition. Rome: Mission Catholique de Conakry, 1923. [BOX 1]


[SVAN] Svan-English dictionary, compiled by Chato Gudjedjiani and Letis Palmaitis, ed. by B. George Hewitt. Delmar, N.Y.: Caravan Books, 1985. 3/12/99. $35.50. Zubal Books. [BOX 33]


[SWAHILI: see also BANTU LANGUAGES; LUO] Dictionnaire français-swahili, by Ch[arles] Sacleux. Zanzibar: Mission des P. P. du St. Esprit, 1891. [BOX 36]

Second edition, revised and enlarged, 1959 (c. 1949): Dictionnaire francais-swahili, deuxième édition, revue et augmentée, by Ch[arles] Sacleux. Paris: Institut d'ethnologie, 1959 (c. 1949). [BOX 41]

A Dictionary of the Suahili Language, compiled by J[ohann] L[udwig] Krapf. London: Trübner & Co., 1882. [BOX 71]

Second edition, revised (1925): Swahili-English dictionary : being Dr. Krapf's original Swahili-English dictionary revised and re-arrangedby Rev. [H. K.] Binns. London: Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge, 1925. [BOX 72]

Praktische Grammatik der Suaheli-Sprache, auch für den Selbstunterricht. Mit Uebungstücken, einem Lesebuche und einem Deutsch-Kisuaheli-Wörterbuch, by A[ugust] Seidel. Vienna; Pest; Leipzig: A. Hartleben's Verlag, [1890]. [BOX 57]

English-Swahili dictionary compiled for the use of the Universities' mission to Central Africa, by [A]rthur [C]ornwallis Madan [ b. 1846]. Oxford; London: Clarendon Press; Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge, 1894. [BOX 10]

Second edition, revised (1902): English-Swahili dictionary. Second edition, revised, by A[rthur] C[ornwallis] Madan [b. 1846]. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1902. [BOX 9]

A Handbook of the Swahili Language as Spoken at Zanzibar, edited for the Universities' mission to Central Africa by the late Edward Steere, fourth edition, revised and enlarged by A[rthus] C[ornwallis] Madan. London: Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge, 1894. [BOX 72]

English-Swahili Vocabulary. Compiled from the Works of the Late Bishop Steere and from other Sources, by A[rthur] C[ornwallis] Madan. London: Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge, 1900. [BOX 64]

New edition, revised orthography (1937): English-Swahili vocabulary: compiled from the works of the late Bishop Steere and from other sources, by A[rthur] [Cornwallis] Madan [b. 1846]. London: Sheldon Press, 1937. [BOX 29]

Vocabulary of English Words & Sentences translated into six languages or dialects, viz.:- Zanzibar Swahili (Ki-Unguja), Mombasa Swahili (Ki-Mvito), Lamu Swahili (Ki-Amu), Patta Swahili (Ki-Pate), Siyu Swahili (Ki-Siu), Bajun (Faza) Swahili (Ki-Tikuu), by A. C. Hollis. S.l: n.p, n.d. [London; New York: MacMillan, 1911?]. [BOX 53]

Elementary Kiswaheli Grammar or Introduction into the East African Negro Language and Life, by A. Reichart & M. Küsters. Heidelberg: Julius Groos, 1926. [BOX 64]

A standard English-Swahili dictionary (founded on Madan's English-Swahili dictionary), by the Inter-territorial Language (Swahili) Committee to the East African Dependencies, under the direction of the late Frederick Johnson. London: Oxford University Press, Humphrey Milford, 1939. [BOX 1]

Up-Country Swahili Exercises for the Soldier, Settler, Miner, Merchant, and their Wives and all who deal with Up-Country Native without Interpreters, by F. H. La Breton. Kitale: LeBreton, 1942. Fifth edition. [BOX 61]

A New English-Swahili Phrase Book, by B. J. Ratcliffe & Howard Elphinestone. Nairobi: East African Standard, [1952 ]. Later printing. [BOX 13]

Swahili pocket dictionary, by Margaret [Arminel] Bryan. Nairobi; London:

Highway Press; Longmans, Green, 1955. Later printing. [BOX 17]

A Concise English-Swahili Dictionary. Kamusi ya Kiingereza-Kiswahili, by R.A. Snoxall. London: Oxford University Press, 1958. [BOX 64]

[In Cyrillic script] Suakhili-russkii slovar, ed. by D[mitrii] A[alekseevich] Oldgerogge. Moscow: Gos. izd-vo inostrannykh i natsionalnykh slovarei, 1961. [BOX 64]

ALSO: [In Cyrillic script] Kratkii suakhili-russkii i russko-suakhili slovar, by A[leksandr] I[vanovich] Kutuzov & Ali Juma Zidikher. Moscow: Sovetskaia Entsiklopediia, 1965. [BOX 10]

Concise Swahili and English Dictionary [including Swahili-English and English-Swahili]by D.V. Perrott. London: The English Universities Press, Ltd., 1965. [BOX 75]

Swahili-English Dictionary, by Charles W[illiam] Rechenbach. [Washington, D.C.]: The Catholic University of America Press, 1967. [BOX 17]

Afrikan language dictionary: Swahili-English and English-Swahili, by D. W. Kabithe. Toledo, Ohio: Swahili Understanding International, 1980. [BOX 40]


[SWAHILI, ZAIRE] ALSO: Manuel de kingwana: le dialecte occidental de swahili, by John Whitehead & L.F. Whitehead. Wayika, Congo Belge: La Mission de et a Wayika, 1928. [BOX 67]


[SWAZI] Concise SiSwati Dictionary. SiSwati-English / English-SiSwati, compiled by D[avid] K. Rycroft ("Mkhosi"). Pretoria: J.L. van Schaik, 1981. [BOX 63]


[TAABWA] Dictionnaire kitabwa-français et français-kitabwa, by August van Acker. Brussels: [Spineux et cie], 1907. 3/30/00. £35 (=$55). Anthony C. Hall. [BOX 3]


[TABULAM BUNDJALUNG: see WESTERN BUNDJALUNG]


[TACHELHIT]

Étude sur laTachelit du Soûs: vocabulaire Français-Berbère, by E[dmond] Destaing [1872-1940]. Paris: Eernest Leroux, 1938. [BOX 24]


[TAE'] Tae' (Zuid-Toradjasch)-Nederlandsch Woordenboek met Register Nederlandsch-Tae', by H. Van der Veen. 's-Gravenhage: Martinus Nijhoff, 1940. [BOX 24]


[TAGABILI] Tagabili vocabulary, by Vivian Forsberg & Alice Lindquist. Manila: Published by the Summer Inst. of Linguistics in cooperation with the Bureau of Public Schools and the Institute of National Language of the Department of Education, 1955. [BOX 22]


[TAGALOG / PHILIPINO] A Dictionary of the [Native] Plant Names of the Philippine Islands, by Elmer D[rew] Merrill. Manila: Bureau of public printing, 1903. [BOX 6]

Tagalog. The basis of the national language of the Philippines. [Cover title] A guide to the Tagalog dialect in the Philippines. Brisbane: H. Pole & Co., 1944. [BOX 15]

(Draft) Tesaurong Ingles-Tagalog, by Consuelo Torres Panganiban, Jose Ma. Panganiban, & Jose Villa Panganiban. S.l: n. p., n.d. [ca. 1947]. [BOX 55]

Pocket Dictionary Tagalog-English / English-Tagalogby Clodualdo del Mundo and Andrea Amor Tablan. Manila: Abiva Publishing House, 1948. [BOX 65]

Pocket Dictionary. Talatingang Pambulsa. English-Tagalog Tagalog-English Vocabulary, by P[ablo] Jacobo Enriquez & Maria Odulio Guzman. Manila: Philippine Book Company, [1949]. [BOX 15]

Publications of the Institute of National Language, Nos. 1-9. Manila: Bureau of Printing, 1954-55, as follow:

No. 1: Vocabulary lists for teaching various subjects in the Filipino languages, by R[ufino] Alejandro, T[eodora] A. Agoncillo, & P. R. Glorioso. Manila: Bureau of Printing, 1954. [BOX 22]

No. 2: Economic and allied terms (Mga katawagáng pangkabuhayan at mga kauri), by V[ito] C. Santos and others. Manila: Bureau of Printing, 1954. [BOX 22]

No. 3: Legal terms (Mga katawangang pambatas), by P[onciano] B. P[eralta] Pineda and others. Manila: Bureau of Printing, 1954. [BOX 22]

No. 4: Parliamentary terms and usages (Mga katawagan at pananalitang gamit sa kapulungan), by P[onciano] B. P[eralta] Pineda and others. Manila: Bureau of Printing, 1954. [BOX 22]

No. 5: Arithmetical and geometrical terms (Mga katawagang pang-aritmetika at pangheometriya), by V[ito] C. Santos and others. Manila: Bureau of Printing, 1954. [BOX 22]

No. 6: Geographical terms (Mga katawagang pangheograpiya), by V[ito] C. Santos and others. Manila: Bureau of Printing, 1954. [BOX 22]

No. 7: Traffic signs and terms (Mga babala at katawagang pantrapiko), by V[ito] C. Santos and others. Manila: Bureau of Printing, 1954. [BOX 22]

No. 8: Mga katawagan sa pagsasaka (farming terms), by P[onciano] B. P[eralta] Pineda. Manila: Bureau of Printing, 1954. [BOX 22]

No. 9: Vocabulary of identical Tagalog and Ilocano words with identical meanings translated into English, by Catalino D. Garduque. Manila: Bureau of Printing, 1955. [BOX 22]

An English-Tagalog Dictionary. Manila: Institute of National Language, Republic of the Philippines, Bureau of Printing, 1960. [BOX 54]

Pilipino-English English-Pilipino Dictionary, compiled by Andrea A. Tablan & Carmen B. Mallari. New York: Washington Square Press, Inc., 1961. [BOX 7]

Tagalog Dictionary, by Teresita V. Ramos. Honolulu: University of Hawaii Press, 1971. [BOX 19]

Pilipino-English / English-Pilipino Concise Dictionaryby Sam & Angelina Bickford. New York: Hippocrene Books, 1985. [BOX 75]

Dictionary English-Tagalog (Pilipino), compiled & edited by Ricardo Benedikto. New Delhi: Star Publications, 1997. [BOX 59]


[TAHITIAN] A Tahitian and English Dictionary, with introductory remarks on the Polynesian language, and a short grammar of the Tahitian dialect: with an appendix containing a list of foreign words used in the Tahitian Bible, in commerce, etc. with the sources from whence they have been derived, [by Herbert John Davies]. Tahiti: printed at the London Missionary Society's press, 1851. [BOX 62]

Grammaire et dictionnaire de la langue maori.; dialecte tahitien, by [Tepano Jaussen]. [Saint-Germaine; Saint-Cloud]: Impr. de L. Toinon et Ce; Impr. De Mme Ve Belin], [1861]. [BOX 57]

Second edition, 1898: Grammaire et dictionnaire de la langue maorie; dialecte tahitien, by Tepano Jaussen. Paris: Neia i te nenei raa no Belin, 1898. [BOX 2]

A vocabulary of English - French - Tahitian, with explanatory remarks on Tahitian dialect, by J[phn] Frank Stimson [1883- ], Orovini, Papeete, Tahiti: Published by O.B. Peterson for the Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints, 1924. [BOX 26]

A New grammar of the Tahitian dialect of the Polynesian language, and combined with a vocabulary of English, French, Tahitian, Second Edition, arranged and published by Geo. W. Burbidge for the Church of Jesus Christ of Latter Day Saints. [n.p.], 1930. [BOX 2]

[Cover title] Grammaire Tahitienne suivie d'un vocabulaire pratique, by Marcel Sénac. With woodcut illustrations by Roger Parry. Toulouse: Imprimerie Régionale, n.d. [c. 1938]. [BOX 17]

A comparative dictionary of the Tahitian language: Tahitian-English with an English-Tahitian finding list, by Edmund Andrews [1892-1941] & Irene [Geene] D[wen] Andrews [1892- ]. Chicago: Chicago Academy of Sciences, 1944. [BOX 23]

Tahitian-English English-Tahitian Dictionary, compiled by Leonard Clairmont in collaboration with Mauu Ariiteuira Teriitahi. Hollywood, CA: Leonard Clairmont, n.d. [1960's]. Second edition. [BOX 65]

Third edition,revised, n.d.: Say It In Tahitian. Tahitian-English English-Tahitian Dictionary. Useful Phrases and Conversation. Third Edition Revised, compiled by Leonard Clairmont in collaboration with Mauu Ariiteuira Teriitahi. Los Angeles: Tahiti Musique, n.d. Third edition. [BOX 17]

Dictionnaire moderne tahitien-français et français-tahitien, by Mai-Arii Cadousteau & Jacques Anisson de Perron. Papeete (Tahiti): Stepolde, 1973. [BOX 29]

Lexique du tahitien contemporain: tahitien-français, français-tahitien, by Yves Lemaitre. Pref. de A. G. Haudricourt. Paris: Office de la recherche scientifique et technique outremer, 1973. [BOX 12]


[TAI DIALECTS, SOUTHWESTERN] William J. Gedney's Southwestern Tai Dialects: Glossaries, Texts, and Translations, edited by Thomas John Hudak. Ann Arbor, Michigan: The University of Michigan, Cneter for South and Southeast Asian Studies, 1994. [BOX 4]


[TAI DON] Dictionnaire tay blanc français avec transcription latine, by Georges Minot, in: Bulletin de l'École Française d'Extrême-Orient, Vol. XL, fasc. 1, Hanoi, 1940, pp. [1]-237 238-240. [BOX 74]


[TAI NÜA] A dictionary of Dehong, Southwest China, by Yongxian Luo [1954- ]. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics, 1998. [BOX 37]


[TAI MAU] Shan Chrestomathy. An Introduction to Tai Mau Language and Literature, by Linda Wai Ling Young. Lanham, MD: University Press of America, 1985. [BOX 14]


[TAJIK] Tadzhiksko-russkii slovar: 40 000 slov, edited by E[vgenii] E[duardovich] Bertels. Moscow: Gos. izd-vo inostrannykh i natsionalnykh slovarei, 1954. [BOX 47]


[TAMAHAQ, HOGGAR] Dictionnaire Français-Tamâheq (langue des Touareg), contenant: 1° tous les mots de la langue française traduisibles en Tamâheq soit directement, soit par des phrases, 2° la traduction en Tamâheq de tous ces mots avec la prononciation figurée en caractères français et en caractères tifinar'; 3° les diffèrentes acceptions des mots avec de nonbreux exemples, dictons, proverbes, traits de mœurs des imouhar', etc., etc., by S. Cid Kaoui. Alger: Adlophe Jourdan, 1894. [BOX 77]

Dictionnaire pratique Tamâheq-Français (langue des Touareg) contenant 1° plus de six mille mots de la langue Tamâheq; la traduction en français de tous ces mots avec la prononciation figurée en caractères français et en caractères tifinar'; leurs différentes acceptions, avec de nombreux exemples, dictons, proverbes, traits de mœrs des Imouhar', etc.; 2° l'indication du genre, du nombre des noms; les formes verbales, etc., by S. Cid Kaoui (see notes for previous entry). Alger: Adolphe Jourdan, 1900. [BOX 77]

Dictionnaire abregé touareg-français (dialecte de l'Ahaggar), 2 vols., by [Charles] de Foucauld [1858-1916], ed. by René [Marie Joseph] Basset [1855-1924].. Alger: Bastide-Jourdan, 1918-1920. [BOX 24]

Dictionnaire touareg-francais, dialecte de l'Ahaggar, by Charles de Foucauld [1858-1916]. 4 vols. [Paris]: Imprimerie nationale de France, 1951-1952. [BOX 7]

Lexique français-touareg dialecte de l'Ahaggar, by Jean Marie Cortade with the collaboration of Mouloud Mammeri. Paris: arts et metiérs graphiques, 1967. [BOX 42]


[TAMASHEK: see TAMAHAQ, HOGGAR]


[TAMAZIGHT, CENTRAL; see also TACHELHIT] A Computerized Lexicon of Tamazight, Berber Dialect of Ayt Seghrouchen, by Ernest T. Abdel-Massih. Ann Arbor: Center for Near Eastern and North African Studies, University of Michigan, 1971. [BOX 38]


[TAMIL] Grammatica damulica, quae per varia paradigmata, regulas & necessarium vocabulorum apparatum, viam brevissimam monstrat, qua lingua damulica seu| malabarica, quae inter Indos Orientales in usu est, & hucusque in Europa incognita fuit, facile disci possit: in usum eorum qui hoc tempore gentes illas ab idololatria ad cultum veri Dei, salutemque aeternam evangelio Christi perducere cupiunt, .by Bartholomaeus Ziegenbalg [1683-1719]. Halae Saxonum: litteria & impensis Orphanotrophei, 1716. [BOX 32]

A Dictionary, of the Tamil and English Languages, by J.P. Rottler. In four parts. Madras: Printed at the Vepery Mission Press, 1834-1841. [BOX 70]

English and Tamil Dictionary; containing all the more important words in Dr. Webster's Dictionary of the English language. Second edition, enlarged and revised. Jaffna: American Mission Press, 1852. [BOX 29]

A comprehensive Tamil and English dictionary of high and low Tamil assisted by competent native scholars in part from manuscript materials of the late Rev. Joseph Knight and others, by Miron Winslow. Madras: P.R. Hunt, 1862. [BOX 43]

English and Tamil Vocabulary. Part I, Part II. Part III(3 vols). Madras, Allahabad, Calcutta, Rangoon, Colombo: The Christian Literature Society for India, 1919-1920-1917. Later editions. [BOX 16]

Cooly Tamil as understood by labourers on tea & rubber estates, specially arranged for planters and planting students, by W.G.B. Wells. Colombo: The Ceylon Observer, 1927. Fourth edition.[BOX 57]

A Dictionary Tamil and English based on Johann Philip Fabricius's 'Malabar-English Dictionary'. Third edition, revised and enlargedby Purushotma, and edited by D. Bexell. Tranquebar: Evangelical Lutheran Mission Publishing House, 1933. Third edition. [BOX 18}

Dictionnaire tamoul-français. Dictionnaire français-tamoul. Troisième édition., two vols., by [Louis Marie] Mousset & [Louis Savinien] Dupuis. Pondichery: Imprimerie de la Mission, 1938/1942 (two vols. in one) and 1952. Third edition. [BOX 26]

A Dictionary of English and Tamil, revised edition, compiled by P[eter] Percival. Madras: The Madras School Book and Literature Society, 1938. Revised edition. [BOX 54]

Tamilsko-russkii slovar, okolo 38000 slov, by A[leksandr] M[oiseevich] Piatigorskii & S[emen] G[esselovich] Rudin. Moscow: Gos. izd-vo inostrannykh i natsionalnykh slovarei, 1960. [BOX 47]

Desriptive Grammar of Cilappatikaaram, by S. V. Subramanian. Madras: Paari Nilayam, [1965]. [BOX 25]


[TANAINA] Dena'ina noun dictionary, by James [M.] Kari. Fairbanks: Alaska Native Language Center, University of Alaska, 1977. [BOX 34]


[TANGALE] A dictionary of the Tangale language: (Kaltungo, Northern Nigeria), by Hermann Jungraithmayr. Berlin: Dietrich Reimer, 1991. [BOX 12]


[TANGGA] Tanga-English English-Tanga Dictionary, by F.L.S. Bell. Sydney: The University of Sydney, 1977. [BOX 35]


[TARAHUMARA, CENTRAL] Tarahumara-English English Tarahumara Dictionary and an Introduction to Tarahumara Grammar, by I. Thord-Gray. Coral Gables, Florida: University of Miami Press, 1955. [BOX 5]


[TARASCO: see PURÉPECHA]


[TARIFIT]

Diccionario español-rifeño, by Esteban Ibáñez. Madrid: [Imprenta de la viuda de E. Maestre], 1944. [BOX 11]

Diccionario rifeno-espanol (etimologico), by Esteban Ibánez. Madrid: Instituto de Estudios Africanos, 1949. [BOX 2]


[TARTAR: see TATAR]


[TATAR] Tatar-English English-Tatar Dictionary, by Sergey Shakhmayev. New York: Hippocrene Books, [1994]. [BOX 20]


[TASMANIAN] Vocabulary of the dialects of some of the aboriginal tribes of Tasmania, by Joseph Milligan. Hobart, Tasmania: William Thomas Strutt, Government Printer, 1890. [BOX 29]

The Aborigines of Tasmania, by H. Ling Roth. Assisted by Marion E. Butler, with a Chapter on the Osteology by J. G. Garson, M.D., Vice-President Anthropological Institute, and Lecturer on Comparative Anatomy at Charing Cross Hospital; and a Preface by Edward B. Tylor, Esq. D.C.I., F. R.S. [etc.]. With Numerous Autotype Plates, from Original Drawings made by Edith May Roth. London: Kengan Paul, Trench, Trübner & Col, 1890. [BOX 55]

A Word-List of the Tasmanian Aboriginal Languages, by N.J.B. Plomley. [Launceton: Australia]: The Author in association with the Government of Tasmania, 1976. [BOX 9]


[TEDA] Dictionnaire ethnographique téda, précédé d'un lexique français-téda, by Charles Le Coeur. Paris: Librairie Larose, 1950. [BOX 38]


[TELUGU] Dictionary, English and Teloogoo, by J.C. Morris. Two volumes. Madras: Printed at the Asylum Herald Press, 1835, 1839. [BOX 8]

English and Telugu Grammatical Vocabulary. Useful Words and Idiomatic Sentences. Series of Vocabularies, No. III. Second Edition. Madras: The ChristianVernacular Education Society, 1890. [BOX 15]

Galletti's Telugu Dictionary: a Dictionary of Current Telugu, by A. Galletti di Cadilhac. London: Oxford University Press, Humphrey Milford, 1935. [BOX 57]

Merolu Telugu, by D.B. Polkam. Poona: Deccan College, 1971. [BOX 27]


[TEMBÉ: see GUAJAJÁRA]


[TEMNE: see THEMNE]


[TEN'A: see INGALIK]


[TESO] A Handbook of the Ateso Language, by A[rthur] L[eonard] Kitching. London: Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge, 1915. [BOX 67]

An English-Ateso and Ateso-English Vocabulary, by J.H. Hilders & J.C.D. Lawrance. Nairobi, Kampala, Dar-es-Salaam: The Eagle Press, 1958. [BOX 63]


[TETUN]

Tettum-Hollandsche Woordenlijst met beknopte spraakkunst, by A. Mathijsen. 's Hage; Batavia: Martin Nijhoff; Albrecht & Co., 1906. [BOX 38]

Diccionario Teto-Portuguès, by Raphael Das Dores. Lisbon: Imprensa Nacional, 1907. [BOX 62]

Tetun-English Dictionary, by Cliff Morris. Canberra: The Australian National University, 1984. [BOX 74]


[TEWA] Ethnozoology of the Tewa Indians, by Junius Henderson & John Peabody Harrington. Washington, D.C.: Government Printing Office, 1914. [BOX 26]

Ethnobotany of the Tewa Indians, by Wilfred William Robbins, John Peabody Harrington & Barbara Freire-Marreco. Washington, D.C.: Government Printing Office, 1916. [BOX 26]


[THAI] Lehr- und Lesebuch der Siamesischen Sprache und Deutsch-Siamesisches Wörterbuch. Zum Selbststudium mit phonetischer Ausprachebezeichnung, Übungsaufgaben und Lesebuch, by F[ranz] J[oseph] Wershoven. Vienna. Pest. Leipzig: A. Hartleben's Verlag, [1892]. [BOX 57]

Essai de dictionanaire Français-Siamois, by M[arie]-J[ospeh] Çuaz. Bangkok: Imprimerie de la Mission Catholique, 1903. [BOX 56]

English-French-Siamese word and phrase book. Petit livre de conversation anglais-français-siamois, by B[asil] O[sborn] Cartwright. Bankok: The American Presbyterian Mission Press, 1917. [BOX 15]

"Siamesiche-deutsches Wörterverzeichnis juristischer Fachausdrücke," by Walter Trittel. Berlin: Reichsdruckerei, 1932. [BOX 11]

Thai-English dictionary, by George Bradley McFarland [1866-1942]. Stanford University, Calif.; London: Stanford University Press; H. Milford, Oxford University Press, 1944. Second issue of first edition. [BOX 1]

Phonetic Dictionary of the Thai Language. Part I: Thai-English. Part II: English-Thai, by Mary R. Haas. 2 vols. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1947. [BOX 57]

Taisko-russkii slovar, by L[ev] N[ikolaevich] Morev. Moscow: Sovetskaia Entsiklopediia, 1964. [BOX 11]

Modern Thai Pronunciation Dictionary, by Master John. Bangkok: Woothisarn, 1968. [BOX 64]

English-Thai & Thai-English Dictionary, by M.L. Manich Jumsai. Chalermint Press, 1968. [BOX 75]

Robertson's Practical English-Thai Dictionary, by Richard G. Robertson. Bangkok: Asian Books, n.d. [c. Charles E. Tuttle 1969]. [Box 7]

E-Saan-Central Thai Dictionary. Revised Edition, by Sutthiya Sueppha, Karuna Kitkhayan, & Chotima Juengsawat. Thailand: U.S. Peace Corps, [1983]. [BOX 36]

English Thai / Thai English Dictionaryby Chalermint. Brooklyn, N.Y.: Saphrograph Corp., [n.d.]. [BOX 75]


[THANGATTI: see WORIMI]


[THARAKA] Outlines of a Tharaka grammar, with a list of words and specimens of the language, Gerhard Lindblom [1887- ]. Uppsala: J. -A. Lundell, 1914. [BOX 16]


[THEMNE] A collection of Temne traditions: fables and proverbs, with an English translation : as also some specimens of the author's own Temne compositions and translations: to which is appended a Temne-English vocabulary, by Rev. C[hristian] F[rederick] Schlenker. London: Printed for the Church Missionary Society, 1861. [BOX 27]

"Vocabulary of English words and sentences translated into Temne, Baga, Limba, Valu, Bulom, Krim," [compiled by R. F. Honter]. Manuscript wordlist entered on 24 p. printed form, c. 1920. [BOX 53]

A Hand-book of the Temne language, by A. T. Sumner. Freetown: Government Printing Office, 1922. [BOX 26]

Temne names and proverbs, Abou Bai-Sharka. Freetown: People's Educational Association of Sierra Leone, 1986. [BOX 27]


[THOMPSON] A Vocabulary and Outlines of Grammar of the Nitlakapamuk or Thompson Tongue, (The Indian Language Spoken between Yale, Lillooet, Cache Creek and Nicola Lake.) together with a Phonetic Chinook dictionary Adapted for use in the Province of British Columbia, by J.R. Good. Victoria, [B.C.]: St. Paul's Mission Press, Collegiate School, 1880. [BOX 62]

Thompson River Salish dictionary: nle?kepmxcin, by Laurence C. Thompson. Missoula, MT: University of Montana, 1996. [BOX 42]


[THURAWAL] [cover title] A Dcitionary of The Dharug Language-the Inland Dialect, by J[ames] L. Kohen [Blacktown, NSW]: Blacktown and District History Society, 1990. Second edition. 1/30/99. A$35 =$22). Cornstalk Bookshop. [BOX 39]


[TIBETAN: see also NEWARI] Tibetsko-russkii slovar', s' prisovokupleniem' al'favitnago spiska, by IAkov Ivanovich Shmidt [1779-1847]. St. Petersburg: Izd. Imp. Akademieiu nauk", 1843. [BOX 43]

A Tibetan-English dictionary, with special reference to the prevailing dialects. To which is added an English-Tibetan vocabulary, by H[einrich] A[ugust] J¨a;schke [1817-1883], London: [Berlin, Printed by Unger brothers (T. Grimm)], 1881. [BOX 30]

Tibetan-English-Hindi guide, containing colloquial Tibetan, with equivalents in Hindi-Tibetan, Hindi, English-Tibetan, English and romanized Tibetan, by Tashi Wangdi. Calcutta: Printed at The Baptist Mission Press, 1909. [BOX 18]

Sanskrit-Tibetan-English vocabulary: being an edition and translation of the Mahavyutpatti, by Alexander Csoma de Körös, ed. by E. Denison Ross. Calcutta: The Asiatic Society, 1910. Series:: Memoirs of the Asiatic Society of Bengal ; v. 4, no. 1 (only of 2 parts). [BOX 14]

An English-Tibetan Dictionary, containing a Vocabulary of approximately 20,000 Words with their Tibetan Equivalents, by Lama Dawasamdup Kazi [Zla-ba Bsam'Grub]. Calcutta: Baptist Mission Press, published by the University, 1919. [BOX 70]

Dictionnaire français-tibetain.Tibet oriental, by [Pierre Philippe Giraudeau] [1850- ] & Francis Goré. Paris: Adrien-Maisonneuve, 1956. Second copy: [BOTH BOX 30]

Kratkii tibetsko-russkii slovar, 21000 slovar, by B[oris] V[ladimirovich] Semichov, IU[rii] M[ikhailovich] Parfionovich, & B[idiia] D[andarovich] Dandaron. Moscow: Gos. izd-vo inostrannykh i natsionalnykh slovarei, 1963. [BOX 74]

Der kleine Tibeter [Deutsch-Tibetsches Wörterbuchlein], by Hans Huggenberger. Basel: printed by H. Weiss, 1964. [BOX 16]

Tibetisch-deutsches Wörterbuch, by Eberhardt Richter. Leipzig: Verlag Enzyklopadie, 1966. [BOX 9]

Tibetan-English Dictionary with Supplement, by Stuart H. Buck. Washington, D.C.: The Catholic University of America Press, 1969. [BOX 20]

Dbyin Bod san sbyar gyi tshig mdzod snan ba gsar pa. The New light English-Tibetan dictionary, by T.G. Dhongthog. Dharmsala: Library of Tibetan Works and Archives, 1973. [BOX 63] [2nd copy, blue cover BOX 63]

Tsang Han tui chao La-sa kou yu tzu tien = [Bod Rgya san sbyar gyi Lha sa'i kha skad tshig mdzod], by Tao-chuan Yu & Chia-chang Fu. Pei-ching: Min tsu chu pan she : Hsin hua shu tien fa hsing, 1983. [BOX 11]

English-Tibetan Dictionary of Modern Tibetan, compiled by Melvyn C. Goldstein with Mgawangthondup Narkyid. Berkeley: University of California Press, [1984]. [BOX 56]

New English-Tibetan dictionary = Dbyin Bod san sbyar gyi tshig mdzod gsar bsgrigs, by Norbu Chophel. Dharamsala, India: Norbu Chophel, 1985. [BOX 17]

Conversational English-Tibetan dictionary, by Anil Gupta [1958- ]. Delhi, India: Sri Satguru Publications, 1992. [BOX 12]

A Tibetan-Newari Lexicon cum Phrase Book with Illustrations, by Christoph Cüppers, Kashinath Tamot & Philip Pierce. Bonn: VGH Wissenschaftsverlag, 1996. [BOX 15]


[TIBBU: see TEDA]


[TIDDIM CHIN: see CHIN, TEDIM]


[TIGRE: see also AMHARIC] Vocabulary of the Tigre language, written down by [Karl] Moritz von Beurmann [1835–1863], published with a grammatical sketch, by Dr. A[dalbert] Merx [1838–1909]. Halle; London: Buchhandlung des Waisenhauses, Trübner & Comp., 1868. [Box 28]

Manuale tigre-italiano, con due dizionarietti italiano-tigre e tigre-italiano e cartina dimostrativa degli idiomi parlati in Eritrea, by Manfredo Camperio [1826-1899]. Milano: Ulrico Hoepli, 1894. [BOX 7]

Wörterbuch der Tigre-Sprache. Tigre-Deutsch-Englisch, by Enno Littmann & Maria Höfner. Wiesbaden: Franz Steiner Verlag, 1956–1962. [BOX 59]


[TIGRINYA] English-Tigrigna Dictionary. [in Tigre script] 'Englizena-Tegrena Mazgaba-Qalat, compiled by Board of Scholars. New Delhi: Languages-of-the-World Publications, 1992. [BOX 54]


[TIKOPIA] A Tikopian vocabulary, compiled mainly from materials collected by the Rev. W. J. Durrad, of the Melanesian mission, ed. by Herbert W[illiam] Williams [1860-1937]. [Wellington, N.Z.?]: [Journal of the Polynesian Society], [1926]. [BOX 16]

Tikopia-English dictionary. Taranga fakatikopia ma taranga fakainglisi, by Raymond William Firth. [Auckland] : [S.l.]: Auckland University Press; Oxford University Press, 1985. [BOX 57]


[TIMORESE: (ATONI) see also MALAY]


[TIMOTE-CUICA FAMILY] "La vamille linguistique Timote (Venezuela)," by P. Rivet, in: International Journal of American Linguistics, New York, 4, no. 2-4 (January 1927), pp. 137-167. [BOX 14]


[TIMUCUA] The Timucua language, by Albert S[amuel] Gatschet[1832-1907]. [Philadelphia], 1880. Three parts. [BOX 36]

Vocabulaire Timucua, by Raoul de La Grasserie [1839-1914]. [Orleans: Georges Jacob, [1890]. Purchased as part of previous lot. [BOX 36]

Textes en Langue Timucua, avec traduction analytique, par MM. Albert Gatschet et Raoul de la Grasserie. Paris: J. Maisonneuve, Libraire-Éditeur, 1890. [box 36]

A Grammar and Dictionary of the Timucua Language, by Julian Granberry. Tuscaloosa, Alabama: University of Alabama Press, 1993. [BOX 62]


[TIRURAY] Tiruray-English Lexicon, by Stuart A. Schlegel. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1971. [BOX 36]


[TIV] A Dictionary of the Tiv Language, by Captain R[oy] C[live] Abraham. London: Published on behalf of the Government of Nigeria by the Crown Agents for the Colonies, 1940. [BOX 18]. A second copy. [BOX 66]

English-Tiv Dictionary, by Gerard Terpstra. Ibadan, Nigeria: Institute of African Studies, University of Ibadan, 1968. [BOX 38]


[TIWA, NORTHERN] An Introductory Paper of the Tiwa Language, Dialect of Taos, New Mexico, by John P. Harrington. [Washington, D.C.]: Archaeological Institute of America, 1910.[BOX 18]


[TIWI] The Tiwi Language. Grammar, myths and dictionary of the Tiwi language spoken on Melville and Bathurst Islands, northern Australia, by C. R. Osborne. Canberra: Australian Institute of Aboriginal Studies, 1974. [BOX 14]


[TLAPANECO, AZOYÚ] "Notes on the Tlappanecan Language of Guerrero," by Paul Radin, in: International Journal of American Linguistics, New York, Vol. 8, No. 1 (December 1933), pp. 45-72. [BOX 14]


[TLINGIT] English-Tlingit Dictionary: Nouns, compiled by Constance Naish & Gillian Story. Fairbanks, Alaska: Summer Institute of Linguistics, [1963]. [BOX 4]


[TO] Die drei Sprachen des Bajastammes: To, Labi, Baja, by Günter Tessmann [1884- ]. Berlin, Seminar für Orientalische Sprachen, 1931. [BOX 29]


[TOARIPI] A Dictionary of Toaripi with English-Toaripi Index(two volumes), by H. A. Brown. Sydney: University of Sydney, 1968. [BOX 61]


[TOBELORESE] Woordenlijst der Tobelo-Bòeng-Taal, by J.L.D. van der Roest. 'S-Gravenhage: Martinus Nijhoff, 1905. [BOX 74]

Tobèloreesch-Hollandsch Woordenboek met Hollandsch-Tobèloreesche inhoudsopgave, by A. Hueting. 'S-Gravenhage: Martinus Nijhoff, 1908. [BOX 74]


[TOBIAN] Memoir of the language and inhabitants of Lord North's Island, by John Pickering. Cambridge, Mass.: Metcalf and Co., 1845. [BOX 77]


[TOGO FRENCH] Dictionnaire des particularités du français au Togo et au Dahomey, by S[uzanne] Lafage. [Abidjan]: Université d'Abidjan, Institut de linguistique appliquée, 1975. [BOX 8]


[TOGO LANGUAGES] "Les dialectes du Moyen-Togo," by J. Bertho. Extract from Bulletin de l'Institut Français d'Afrique Noire, Dakar, IFAN, vol. 14, 1952. [BOX 29]


[TOKELAUAN (TOKELAU)] Tokelau dictionary, compiled by Ropati Simona. Apia, Western Samoa: Office of Tokelau Affairs, 1986. [BOX 1]


[TOK PISAN] Booklet on pidgin English as used in the mandated territory of New Guinea. With dictionary of nouns and phrases. This language is used in conversation with natives, Asiatics, and German white missionaries, by E[ustace] C[yril] N[orman] Helton. Brisbane: W. H. Adams, [ca.1943]. [BOX 71]

Booklet on pidgin English as used in the mandated territory of New Guinea. With dictionary of nouns and phrases. This language is used in conversation with natives, Asiatics, and German white missionaries, by E[ustace] C[yril] N[orman] Helton. Brisbane: W. H. Adams, [ca.1945]. [BOX 71]

[Cover title] Melanesian pidgin: phrase-book and vocabulary, [by Robert Anderson Hall]. [s.l.]: Headquarters USAFISPA, 1943. [BOX 17]

First edition, second issue (1943): Melanesian Pidgin Phrase-Book and Vocabulary, by Robert A[nderson] Hall, Jrd. Baltimore, MD: Linguistic Society of America, 1943. [BOX 16]

Melanesian Pidgin English: grammar, Texts, Vocabulary, by Robert A[nderson] Hall, Jr. Baltimore, Maryland: Linguistic Society of America at the Wavely Press, 1943. [BOX 37]

The Book of Pidgin English, Being (1) A Grammar and Notes, (2) A Pidgin English-English Dictionary, (3) An English-Pidgin English Dictionary, by John J[oseph] Murphy. Brisbane: W. R. Smith & Paterson, 1943.[BOX 17]

Second edition, 1947: The Book of Pidgin English, Being (1) A Grammar and Notes, (2) A Pidgin English-English Dictionary, (3) An English-Pidgin English Dictionary, by John J[oseph] Murphy. Brisbane: W. R. Smith & Paterson, 1947. [BOX 55]

Third edition, 1949: The Book of Pidgin English, Being (1) A Grammar and Notes, (2) An Outline of Pidgin English, (3) a Pidgin English-English Dictionary, (4) An English-Pidgin English Dictionary, by John J[oseph] Murphy. Brisbane: W. R. Smith & Paterson, 1949. [BOX 57]

"Fourth Edition," 1954: The Book of Pidgin English, Being (1) A Grammar and Notes, (2) An Outline of Pidgin English, (3) a Pidgin English-English Dictionary, (4) An English-Pidgin English Dictionary, by John J[oseph] Murphy. Brisbane: W. R. Smith & Paterson, 1954. [BOX 66]

"Fifth edition," 1956: The Book of Pidgin English, Being (1) A Grammar and Notes, (2) An Outline of Pidgin English, (3) a Pidgin English-English Dictionary, (4) An English-Pidgin English Dictionary, by John J[oseph] Murphy. Brisbane: W. R. Smith & Paterson, 1956. [BOX 1]

"Sixth edition," 1959: The Book of Pidgin English, Being (1) A Grammar and Notes, (2) An Outline of Pidgin English, (3) a Pidgin English-English Dictionary, (4) An English-Pidgin English Dictionary, by John J[oseph] Murphy. Brisbane: W. R. Smith & Paterson, 1959. [BOX 17]

"Seventh edition," 1962: The Book of Pidgin English, Being: (1) A Grammar and Notes, (2) An Outline of Pidgin English, (3) a Pidgin English-English Dictionary, (4) An English-Pidgin English Dictionary, by John J[oseph] Murphy. Brisbane: W. R. Smith & Paterson, 1962. [BOX 1]

"Eighth edition," [fourth edition] revised, 1966: The Book of Pidgin English, Being (1) A Grammar and Notes, (2) An Outline of Pidgin English, (3) a Pidgin English-English Dictionary, (4) An English-Pidgin English Dictionary, by John J[oseph] Murphy. Brisbane: W. R. Smith & Paterson, 1966. [BOX 55]

"Ninth edition," [fifth edition] revised, 1973: The Book of Pidgin English (Neo-Melanesian), Being (1) A Grammar and Notes, (2) An Outline of Neo-Melanesian, (3) Classified Vocabulary and Phrases, (4) a Neo-Melanesian-English Dictionary, (5) An English-Neo-Melanesian Dictionary, by John J[oseph] Murphy. Brisbane: W. R. Smith & Paterson, 1973. [BOX 55]

Revised [sixth] edition, 1985: The Book of Pidgin English, revised edition, by John J[oseph] Murphy. Bathhurst, N.S.W.: Robert Brown & Associates, 1985. [BOX 17]

Grammar and Dictionary of Neo-Melanesian, by Francis Mihalic. Techny, Illinois: The Mission Press, S.V.D., 1957. [BOX 6]

First edition, Australian issue: Grammar and Dictionary of Neo-Melanesian, by Francis Mihalic. Westmead, N.S.W.: Westmead Printing [for The Mission Press], 1957. [BOX 6]

A Kuk Buk in Pidgin, by Laurel Levi. Rabaul, T. N. G.: Methodist Mission Press, 1964. [BOX 17]

Concise Dictionary of New Guinea Pidgin (Neo-Melanesian) with translations in English and German, compiled by Friedrich Steinbauer. Madang, New Guinea: Kristin Press, 1969. [BOX 67]

The Jacaranda Dictionary and Grammar of Melanesian Pidgin, by Francis Mihalic. [Milton, Q.]: Jacaranda Press, 1971. [BOX 19]


[TOL] "The Jicaques of Honduras," by Edward Conzemius, in: International Journal of American Linguistics, New York, Vol. 2, Nos. 3-4 (January 1923), pp. 162-170. 12/26/99. $13. Ethnographic Arts. [BOX 14]


[TOLOWA] Xus We-Yó'. Tolowa (Tututni) Language Dictionary. Second Edition. Crescent City, CA: Tolowa Language Committee, 1989. [BOX 41]


[TONGA: see TUMBUKA]


[TONGAN] An Account of the Natives of the Tonga Islands in the South Pacific Ocean. With an original grammar and vocabulary of their language. Compiled and arranged from the extensive communications of Mr. William Mariner, several years resident in those Islands, ed. by John Martin. 2 vols. London: John Murray, 1817. [BOX 63]

Third edition: An Account of the Natives of the Tonga Islands in the South Pacific Ocean. With an original grammar and vocabulary of their language. Compiled and arranged from the extensive communications of Mr. William Mariner, several years resident in those Islands, ed. by John Martin. 2 vols. Edinburgh: Constable & Co. and Horst, Chance & Co., 1827. [BOX 71]

A vocabulary of the Tonga language, arranged in alphabetical order: to which is annexed a list of idiomatical phrases, by S[tephen] Rabone. Neiafu, Vavau: The Wesleyan mission press, 1845. 1/31/00. $381. Rulon-Miller [BOX 72]

Tongan dictionary: Tongan-English and English-Tongan, C[lerk] Maxwell Churchward. London: Oxford University Press, 1959. [BOX 5]

A Simplified Dictionary of Modern Tongan, by Edgar Tu'inukuafe. Aotearoa, N.Z.: Polynesian Press, 1992. [BOX 27]


[TONKAWA] An analytical dictionary of the Tonkawa language, by Harry Hoijer[1904- ]. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1949. [BOX 13]


[TONTEMBOAN] Tontemboansch-Nederlandsch Woordenboek met Nederlandsch-Tontemboansch Register, by J[ohannes] Alb[ert] T[raugott] Schwarz. Leiden: E. J. Brill, 1908. [BOX 19]


[TORWALI] Torwali: An Account of a Dardic language of the Swat Kohistan, by George A[bramham] Grierson. London: Royal Asiatic Society, 1929. [BOX 59]


[TOTONAC] Diccionario totonaco de Xicotepec de Juarez, Puebla, totonaco-castellano, castellano-totonaco, by Aileen A. Reid & Ruth G. Bishop. Mexico, D.F.: Instituto Linguistico de Verano, 1974. [BOX 25]


[TRINIDAD & TOBAGO CREOLE] Cote ce Cote la. Trinidad & Tobago Dictionary, compiled by John Mendes. Trinidad: B. L. C. P. Ltd, n.d. [post-1979]. [BOX 9]


[TRIQUE] Diccionario Triqui de Chicahuaxtla, Triqui-Castellano, Castellano-Triqui, compiled by Claude Good. Mexico, D.F.: Instituto Linguistico de Verano, 1978. [BOX 25]


[TRUKESE: see CHUUK]


[TS'ETS'AUT] "Ts'ets'aut, an Athapascan language from Portland Canal, British Columbia," by Franz Boas & Pliny E. Goddard, in: International Journal of American Linguistics, New York, Vol. 3, No. 1 (July 1924), pp. [1]-35. [BOX 14]


[TSHIVENDA] English-VendaVocabulary, by L.T. Marole and F.J. de Gama. Sibasa: Marole Book Depot, 1954. Third edition. [BOX 57]

Teo Dza Tshivenda(#39) [English-Tshivenda / Tshivenda-English Dictionary], compiled by N. J. van Wermelo. Pretoria: The Government Printer, 1958. [BOX 3]

Venda. Terminologie en Spelreëls No. 2. Terminology and Spelling No. 2[= Second Edition], compiled by the Venda Language Committee, Department of Bantu Education. Pretoria: The Government Printer, 1962. [BOX 17]

Venda Dictionary. Tshivenda-English, by N[icolaas] J[acobus] van Warmelo. Pretoria: J.L. van Schaik, 1989. [BOX 63]


[TSIMSHIAN: see also CHINOOK WAWA] A practical dictionary of the Coast Tsimshian language, by John Asher Dunn. Ottawa: National Museums of Canada, 1978. [BOX 33]

Sm'algyax: A Reference Dictionary and Grammar for the Coast Tsimshian Language, compiled and edited by John Asher Dunn. Seattle: University of Washington Press, 1995. [BOX 33]


[TSONGA] An English-vernacular dictionary of the Bantu-Botatwe dialects of Northern Rhodesia, by J. Torrend. Natal, South Africa : London : P.O. Mission Siding, Northern Rhodesia : Chikuni Bookstall: Mariannhill ; Kegan Paul, Trench, Trubner & Co., 1931. [BOX 29]

Tsonga. Terminologie en Spalreëls No. 2. Terminology and Orthography No. 2[= Second Edition], by the Tsonga Language Committee, Department of Bantu Education. Pretoria: The Government Printer, 1962. [BOX 17]


[TSWANA] Lokwalo loa mahuku. A secwana le seeñeles. Kabo ea nteha. Mahuku a secwana a hetolecwe mo puoñ ea seeñeles, by John [Tom] Brown [d.1925]. London: printed for the London Missionary Society by Yates and Alexander Chancery Buildings, 1876. [BOX 23]

Second edition, revised, enlarged and rearranged (1954): Secwana dictionary: Secwana-English and English-Secwana (Revised, enlarged and re-arranged), by J[ohn] Tom Brown [d. 1925]. Lobatsi: South Africa District Committee of the London Missionary Society, [1954]. [BOX 9]

Tswana. Terminologie en Spelreëls No.2. Terminology and Orthography No. 2[= Second Edition], by the Sotho Language Committee, Department of Bantu Education. Pretoria: The Government Printer, 1962. [BOX 17]


[TUAMOTU] A Dictionary of some Tuamotuan Dialects of the Polynesian Language, by J. Frank Stimson & Donald Stanley Marshall. The Hague: Martinus Nijhoff, 1964. [BOX 59]

ALSO: Material Culture in the Tuamotu Archipelago, by Kenneth P. Emory. Honolulu: Department. of Anthropology, Bernice Pauahi Bishop Museum, 1975. [BOX 39]


[TUCANO: see also NADËB] Pequena gramatica e dicionario da lingua tucana. Missao salesiana do Rio Negro-Amazonas, by Antonio Giacone. Manaos, Amazonas, Brazil: Papelaria Velho Lino de Lino Aguiar, [1939?]. 9/13/99. $33.50 (including postage). McBlain Books. [BOX 24]


[TULU] English-Tulu Dictionary, by Rev. A. Mnner. New Delhi: Asian Educational Service, 1987. [BOX 17]


[TUMBUKA] Tumbuka-Tonga-English Dictionary, by Rev. Wm. Y. Turner. Blantyre, Nyasaland: Church of Scotland Mission, 1952. [BOX 65]


[TUMLEO] Zur Kenntnis der melanesischen Sprache von der Insel Tumleo, by Leonhard Schultze. Jena: Gustav Fischer, 1911. [BOX 22]


[TUNEN] Lexique de la langue Tunen (parler des Banen du Sud-Ouest du Cameroun), by Idelette Dugast (1898- ]. Paris: C. Klincksieck, 1967. [BOX 12]


[TUNICA] A Structural and Lexical Comparison of the Tunica, Chitimacha, and Atakapa Languages, by John R[eed] Swanton [1873- ]. Washington: Government Printing Office, 1919. [BOX 11]

Tunica Dictionary, by Mary R. Haas. Berkeley and Los Angeles: University of California Press, 1953. 5/99. $78. Argosy Books. [BOX 36]


[TUNISIAN ARABIC] Peace Corps English-Tunisian Arabic Dictionary, by Rached Ben Abdelkaer, Abdeljelil Ayed, & Aziza Naouar. N.p. [Washington, D.C.?]: [Government Printing Office], 1977. [BOX 38]


[TUPI FAMILY] Dicionário Português-Tupí, by Rubem Lima. Minneapolis: Prosperity Publishing, c. 1997. [BOX 10]


[TURKANA] English-Turkana Dictionary, by A[nthony J.] Barrett. Nairobi: Macmillan Kenya, 1988. [BOX 59]

Turkana-English Dictionary, by A[nthony J.] Barrett. London: Macmillan Education, 1990. [BOX 67]


[TUVIN] Russko-tuvinskii slovar: 22 000 slov, by A[leksandr] A[dolfovich] Palmbakh [1897-1963]. Moscow: Gos. izd-vo inostrannykh i natsionalnykh slovarei, 1953. [BOX 48]


[TWI: see AKAN]


[TYEMBARA: see SENUFO]


[TZOTZIL] The Great Tzotzil Dictionary of San Lorenzo Zinacantán, by Robert M. Laughlin. Washington, D.C.: Smithsonian Institution Press, 1975. [BOX 76]

Diccionario Tzotzil de San Andrés con variaciones dialectales. Tzotzil-Español, Español-Tzotzil, by Alfa Hurley viuda de Delgaty & Augustín Ruíz Sánchez. Mexico City: Instituto Lingüístico de Verano, 1978. [BOX 25]

The great Tzotzil dictionary of Santo Domingo Zinacantán, with grammatical analysis and historical commentary, by Robert M. Laughlin, with John B. Haviland. Three Vols. Washington, D.C.: Smithsonian Institution Press, 1988. [BOX 54]


[TZUTUJIL, EASTERN and WESTERN] Diccionario tz'utujil, by Francisco Perez Mendoza & Miguel Hernandez Mendoza. La Antigua Guatemala: Proyecto Lingüistico Francisco Marroquin, 1996. 10/8/99. $30. Libros Latinos. Second copy 4/2/99. $34. Libros Latinos. [BOX 12] [BOX 23]


[UBYKH] Die Sprache der Ubychen. Grammatische Skizze. Texte, Ubychisches Glossar nebst deutschem Index, by Adolf Dirr. Leipzig: Verlag der Asia Major, 1928. [BOX 4]

Dictionnaire de la langue oubykh avec introduction phonologique, index francais-oubykh, textes oubykhs, by Hans Vogt [1903-- ].[Oslo]: Universitetsforlaget, 1963. [BOX 41]


[UIGHUR] Inglizcha-uighurcha lughat. English-Uighur Dictionary. Urumchi: Shinjang Khalq Nashriyati, 1988. [BOX 55]


[ULAWA: see SA'A]


[ULVA: see MOSQUITO]


[UNAMI] "Words, Phrases, and Short Dialogues, in the Language of the Lenni Lenape, or Delaware Indians," by Rev. John Heckewelder [Section III, with separate title page], in: Transactions of the Historical & Literary Committee of the American Philosophical Society, held at Philadelphia, for Promoting Useful Knowledge. Vol. I. Philadelphia: Abraham Small, 1819. [BOX 13]

Zeisberger's Indian Dictionary. English, German, Iroquois-the Onondaga and Algonquin-the Delaware, printed from the Original Manuscript in Harvard College Library. Cambridge: John Wilson and Son, 1887. [BOX 69]

A Lenâpé-English dictionary. From an anonymous ms. in the archives of the Moravian Church at Bethlehem, Pa., ed. with additions by Daniel G[arrison]: Brinton (1837-1899) & Albert Seqaqkind Anthony . Philadelphia: The Historical Society of Pennsylvania, 1888. [BOX 75]

The original Strachey vocabulary of the Virginia Indian language, by John P. Harrington. Washington, D.C.: United States Government Printing Office, 1955. [BOX 26]


[UMA] De Uma-taal (West Midden-Celebes): spraakkunstige schets en teksten. Uitg. en van een woordenlijst voorzien, by S[amuel] J[onathan] Esser [1900-1044]. 's-Gravenhage: Martin Nijhoff, 1964. [BOX 29]


[UMBUNDU] Vocabulary of the Umbundu Language Comprising Umbundu-English and English-Umbundu. Lists of Three Thousand Words used by the Inhabitants of Bailundu and Bihe, and other Countries of West Central Africa, prepared by Rev. W.H. Sanders, Rev. W.E. Fay, and other Missionaries of the [West Central African Mission] of the A[merican] B[oard] C[ommissioners] F[oreign] M[issions]. [Boston: Beacon Press, Thomas Todd, Printer], 1885. [BOX 15, also: Observations upon the Grammatical Structure and Use of the Umbundu or the Language of the Inhabitants of Bailundu and Bihe, and other countries of West Central Africa. By Rev. Wesley M. Stover, 1885]

Second, enlarged edition, 1911: Vocabulary of the Umbundu Language Comprising Umbundu-English and English-Umbundu, [by Rev. William Fay and other Missionaries of the] West Central African Mission. [?Kamundongo, Angola]: A[merican] B[oard] C[ommissioners] F[oreign] M[issions], 1911. [BOX 17]

Mbundu English-Portuguese Dictionary, With Grammar and Syntax, by Amandus Johnson. Philadelphia: The International Printing Company, 1930. [BOX 20]


[URAON: see KURUKH]


[URDU] Manuale e Glossario della lingua indostana o urdu, by Camillo Tagliabue. Rome: Tipografia della R. Accademia dei Lincei, 1898. [BOX 23]

Guide to Military Urdu and the Elementary Examination, by Major W[illiam] Turner. Karachi: The Education Publishing Company, [1942]. [BOX 22]

Hospital Conversation with Vocabulary and Phrases (in Roman Urdu), by A. W. Cornelius. Landour, Missourie, India: The Missourie Book Society, 1943. [BOX 2]

Karmannyi urdu-russkii slovar. 6000 slov, by L[idiia] B[orisovna] Kibirkshtis. Moscow: Gos. izd-vo inostrannykh i natsional'nykh slovarei, 1958. [BOX 47]

Karmannyi russko-urdu slovar. 8000 slov, by A[ntonina] A[leksandrolna] Davidova & Y. L. Lawrynenko. Moscow: Gos. izd-vo inostrannykh i natsional'nykh slovarei, 1958. 8/23/00. $16. Worldwide Antiquarian. [BOX 47]

Urdu-russkii slovar: 30 000 slov, S. V. Biriulev, et al. Moscow: Sovetskaia Entsiklopediia, 1964. [BOX 49]


[UTE-SOUTHERN PAIUTE]

Chemehuevi: A Grammar and Lexicon, by Margaret L. Press. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1979. [BOX 36]


[UZBEK] The Uzbek Dialect of Qilich (Russian Turkestan) with Texts and Glossary, by Gunnar Jarring. Lund; Leipzig: C.W.K. Gleerup; Otto Harrassowitz, 1937. [BOX 61]

Özbekische Grammatik, mit Bibliographie, Lesestücken und Wörterverzeichnis, by A[nnemarie] von Gabain. Leipzig and Vienna: Otto Harrassowitz, 1945. [BOX 57]

Russko-uzbekskii slovar. 50 000 slov, edited by R. Abdurakhmanov. Moscow: Gos. izd-vo inostrannykh i natsionalnykh slovarei, 1954. [BOX 47]

Uzbek-English Dictionary, by Natalie Waterson. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1980. [BOX 63]


[VEDDA] Vedda Language of Ceylon: Texts and Lexicon, by M. W. Sugathapala de Silva. Munich: R. Kitzinger, 1972. [BOX 2]

[VEI] Outlines of a Grammar of the Vei Language together with a Vei-English Vocabulary, and an account of the discovery of the Vei mode of syllabic writing, S[igismund] W[ilhelm] Koelle. London: Kegan Paul, Trench, Trübner & Co., [ca. 1905]. Third edition. [BOX 72]


[VELATRU: see PERSIAN DIALECTS]


[VENDA: see TSHIVENDA]


[VIETNAMESE]

Theoretisch-praktische Grammatik der Annamitischen Sprache. Mit analysierten Übungss¨a;tzen, eine Chrestomathie und einem annamitisch-deutschen Wörterbuch. Mit 9 Schrifttafeln, by A[dolf] Dirr. Vienna; Pest; Leipzig: A. Hartleben's Verlag, [1894]. [BOX 57]

Nouveau vocabulaire français-tonkinois et tonkinois-français, by P[aul Emile Emmanuel Auguste] Crépin [Bourdier de Beauregard] [1866- ]. Paris: A. Challamel, 1900. [BOX 9]

Vietnamese-English Dictionary with the International Phonetic System and more than 30,000 words and idiomatic expressions, by Mrs. Le Van Hung & Dr. Le Van Hung. Paris: Éditions Europe-Asie, 1955. [BOX 63]

Vietnamese-English Vocabulary, by Nguyen Dình Hòa. Washington, D.C.: [Office of Training, National Security Agency?], 1955. [BOX 37]

Enlarged and improved edition, 1966: Vietnamese-English Dictionary, by Nguyen-Dinh-Hoa. Rutland, Vermont: Charles E. Tuttle, 1966. [BOX 15]

Vetnamsko-russkii slovar: okolo 36000 slov, by I[vetta] I[vanovna] Glebova, et al. Moscow: Gos. izd-vo inostrannykh i natsionalnykh slovarei, 1961. [BOX 49]

Vietnamese Phrase Book[Cover title]. Washington, D.C.: Headquarters, Department of the Army, 1962. [BOX 13]

Deutsch-vietnamesisches Wörterbuch, by Klaus Ferkinghoff. Wiesbaden: Otto Harrassowitz, 1962. [BOX 23]

Viêt-Anh Tù-Dien Loai Pho Thông. General Vietnamese-English Dictionary, by Nguyen-Van-Khôn. Saigon: Khai-Tri, [1966].

Tu-Dien Dictionary English-Vietnamese Anh-Viet, by Kim-ly Molling. Hayward, California: Vietnamese-American Company, 1975. [BOX 5]

Anh-Viet tu dien y khoa gia dinh = The family medical encyclopedia, by Hoang Mai Nguyen. Glendale, California: Dai Nam, 1985. [BOX 49]


[VILI] Dictionnaire français-fiote, dialecte du Kakongo, by the Holy Ghost Fathers. Paris: Maison-Mère, 1890. [BOX 72]


[VISAYAN: see CEBUANO]


[VO] A few notes on Wa, by G[odfrey] Drage [1868- ]. Rangoon: Superintendent, Government Printer, Burma, 1907. [BOX 31]


[WAKHI: see INDO-IRANIAN FRONTIER LANGUAGES]


[WAKKA: see KABI]


[WAMBON: see MANDOBO]


[WAMPANOAG] [Cover title] Vocabulary of the Massachusetts (or Natick) Indian Language, by Josiah Cotton. Cambridge: Metcalf and Company, 1829. [BOX 43]

Natick Dictionary, by James Hammond Trumbull. Washington: Government Printing Office, 1903. [BOX 76]


[WAPPO] English-Wappo Vocabulary, by Jesse O. Sawyer. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1965. [BOX 61]


[WARAO] "Vocabulario Teurgico-Magico de los Indios Guaraos," by Basilio Maria de Barral, in: Antropológica, No. 4, 1958, pp. [27]-36. [BOX 71]


[WARLPIRI] Dictionary of the Wailbri (Warlpiri, Walpiri) language.. Part II. English-Wailbri, by Reverend Laurie Reece. Sydney: University of Sydney, 1979. [BOX 31]


[WATHAWURRUNG] Wathawurrung and the Colac language of southern Victoria, ed. BY Barry j. Blake. Canberra: Pacific linguistics, Research School of Pacific and Asian Studies, Australian National University, 1998. [BOX 49]


[WAYUU] Diccionario de la lengua guajira, [Vol. I] guajira-castellano, by Miguel Angel Jusayú [1934- ], II castellano-guajira, by Miguel Angel Jusayú & Jesús Olza Zubiri. Caracas : Maracaibo: Universidad Catolica Andres Bello, Centro de Lenguas Indigenas; Biblioteca Corpozulia, 1977, 1981. [BOX 23]


[WERCHIKWAR: see BURUSHASKI]


[WES-KOS: see PIDGIN, CAMEROON]


[WESTERN ABENAKI] Western Abenaki. Volume 1: Abenaki-English, by Gordon M. Day. Hull, Quebec: Canadian Museum of Civilization, 1994. AND Western Abenaki. Volume 2: English-Abenaki, by Gordon M. Day. Hull, Quebec: Canadian Museum of Civilization, 1995. [BOX 9]


[WESTERN APACHE: see APACHE, WESTERN]


[WESTERN BUNDJALUNG: see BANDJALANG]


[WESTERN SOTHO: see TSWANA]


[WEST INDIAN ENGLISH: see BAHAMIAN ENGLISH; BARBADIAN ENGLISH; CAYMAN ISLANDS ENGLISH]


[WHITE HMONG: see HMONG DAW]


[WHITE MEO: see HMONG DAW]


[WHITE TAI: see HMONG DAW]


[WIK-NGATHAN] Wik-Ngathan dictionary, by Peter [John] Sutton [1946- ].

Prospect, South Australia: Caitlin Press, 1995. [BOX 37]


[WINTU] The Wintun Indians of California and their neighbors, by Peter Knudtson. Happy Camp, Calif.: Naturegraph Publishers, 1977. [BOX 11]

Wintu Dictionary, by Alice Schlichter. Berkeley: Department of Linguistics, 1981. [BOX 18]

Wintu Dictionary, by Harvey Pitkin. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1985. [BOX 36]


[WIRADHARI: see AWABAKAL]


[WIRANGU] "Vocabularies of Three South Australian Native Languages-Wirrung, Narrinyeri, and Wongaidya," by J. M. Black, in: Transactions and Proceedings of the Royal Society of South Australia, Vol. XLI, pp. 1-13, Adealide: Royal Society of South Australia, 1917. [BOX 23]

"Aborigines of the West Coast of South Australia. Vocabularies and Ethnographical Notes," by Daisy M. Bates, pp. 152-167, in: Transaction and Proceedings of the Royal Society of South Australia, Vol. XLII. Adelaide: Published by the Society, December 24, 1918. [BOX 9]


[WITOTO: see HUITOTO]


[WOLIO] Wolio dictionary (Wolio-English-Indonesian) = Kamus Bahasa Wolio (Wolio-Inggeris-Indonesia), by J[ohannes] C[ornelis)]Anceaux [1920- ].Dordrecht, Holland ; Providence, R.I., U.S.A.: Foris Publications Holland, 1987. [BOX 34]


[WOLOF] Das Westliche Afrika, oder Sitten, Gebr¨a;uche und Gewohnheiten der Afrikaner zwischen dem Senegal und Gaambia und der Mohrenst¨a;mme in der grossen Wüste; nebst naturhistorischen Bemerkungen und der Geschichte der afrikanshcen Colonien. Aus dem französischen des R. G. V. mit 44 Kupfern, zwey Landkarten und einem Musikblatte. Pesth: Konr. Ad. Hartleben, 1816. [BOX 71]

Manuel français-ouolof, by Armand-Pierre Angrand. Dakar: Librairie Maurice Viale, n.d. [ca. 1940]. [BOX 66]

Second edition (1952): Manuel Français-Ouolof, by A[rmand]-P[ierre] Angrand. Dakar, Senegal: Maison du livre, 1952. [BOX 11]


[WOOLNER DISTRICT: see SOUTH AUSTRALIAN ABORIGINAL LANGUAGES]


[WORIMI] An Attempt Towards a Comparative Grammar of Two Australian Languages. Part II. Indices and Vocabularies of Kattang and Thangatti, by Nils M. Holmer. Canberra: Australian Institute of Aboriginal Studies, 1967. [BOX 7]


[WO'TIHEH: see PIAROA]


[WU] A Vocabulary of the Shanghai Dialect, by J[oseph] Edkins. Shanghai: Presbyterian Mission Press, 1869. [ BOX 19]

An English-Chinese vocabulary of the Shanghai dialect, prepared by a Committee of the Shanghai Vernacular Society. Shanghai: American Presbyterian Mission Press, 1901. [BOX 37]


[WURI: see GWAMHI-WURI]


[XÂRÂCÙÙ] Dictionnaire Xârâcùù (Nouvelle-Calédonie), by Claire Moyse-Faurie & Marie-Adèle Néchérö-Jorédié. [Noumée, New Caledonia]: Les Editions Populaires, 1986. [BOX 62]


[XHOSA] A vocabulary of the Kaffir language. Second edition., by John Ayliff. London: The Wesleyan Mission House, 1863. [BOX 41]

An English an Kaffir Dictionary. Princiapply of the Xosa-Kaffir, but including also many words of the Zulu-Kaffir dialect, by W[illiam] J[afferd]Davis. London: Printed for the Wesleyan Missionary Society, 1877. [BOX 16]

Kafir phrase book [and Vocabulary]. Eighth edition, fortieth thousand, by James Stewart [1831-1905]. [Lovedale, South Africa]: Lovedale Mission Press, 1916. [BOX 17]

A Kafir-English dictionaryby Albert Kropf. Second Edition, ed by Robert Godfrey. [Stutterheim] South Africa: Lovedale Mission Press, 1915. [BOX 13]

Xhosa. Terminologie en Spelreëls No. 2. Terminology and Orthography No. 2[= Second Edition], compiled by the Xhosa Language Committee, Department of Bantu Education. Pretoria: The Government Printer, 1962. [BOX 17]

English-Xhosa dictionary, by A[rnold] Fischer [1926- ]. Cape Town; New York: Oxford University Press, 1985. [BOX 12]


[!XOO] Zu/'hoasi fonologie & woordeboek, by J[annie] W[inston] Snyman. Kaapstad & Rotterdam: A. A. Balkema, 1975. [BOX 1]


[YABEM] Jabêm-English Dictionary. Reproduction of the Jabêm-Deutsch Wörterbuch compiled by Rev. H. Zahn 1917 Logaweng-Neuguinea, revised by J.F. Streicher. Canberra: Department of Linguistics, Research School of Pacific Studies, The Australian National University, 1982. [BOX 3]


[YAGNOBI] Iagnobskie teksty. S prilozheniem iagnobsko-russkogo slovaria, by M[ikhail] S[tepanovich] Andreev & E.M. Peshchereva. Moscow: Izd-vo Akademii nauk SSSr, 1957. [BOX 78]


[YAKIMA: see also NEZ PERCE] Grammar and Dictionary of the Yakama Language, by Marie Charles Pandosy, trans. by George Gibbs & J[ohn] G[ilmary] Shea. New York: Cramoisy Press, 1862. [BOX 46]


[YAKUT] [cover title] Dr. A. Th. v. Middendorff's Sibirische Reise. Band II. Theil 2. Über die Sprache der Jakuten. Erste Lieferung: Jakutisch-deutsches Wörterbuch. An installment of the first edition of Reise in den aussersten Norden und Osten Sibiriens, wahrend der Jahre 1843 und 1844, by Alexander Theodor von Middendorff [1815-1894.] St. Petersburg: Buchdr. der K. Akademie der Wissenschaften : Zu haben bei Eggers, 1847. [BOX 2]

Russko-iakutskii slovar: okolo 28 500 slov, by P[etr] S[avvich] Afanasev & L[uka] N[ikiforovich] Kharitonov. Moscow: Sovetskaia entsiklopediia, 1968. [BOX 49]

Dialektologicheskii slovar iazyka sakha: dopolnitelnyi tom : soderzhit okolo 5,000 slov, by M[ikhail] S[piridonovich] Voronkin, M[ikhail] P[etrovich] Alekseev, and IU[rii] I[vanovich] Vasilev. Novosibirsk: VO "Nauka", 1995. [BOX 47]


[YAMDENA] Woordenboek der Jamdeensche taal, by P[eter] Drabbe [1887- ]. Bandoeng: A.C. Nix, 1932. [BOX 14]


[YANA] Yana Dictionary, by Edward Sapir & Morris Swadesh. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1960. [BOX 36]


[YANZI] Dictionnaire Français-Yansi (Rép. Du Zaïre), by Wendo Nguma. Bandundu, Zaire: CEEBA Publications, 1986. [BOX 38]


[YAO (Bantu): see also BANTU LANGUAGES] A dictionary of the Yao Language, by G. Meredith Sanderson. Zomba: Nyasaland Government Printer, 1954. [BOX 19]

Dicionário de Português-Chi-Yao e Chi-Yao-Português, by Miguel José Viana. Lourenço Marques: Imprensa Nacional de Moçambique, 1961. [BOX 15]


[YAO (Thai)] Yao-English Dictionary, by Sylvia J. Lombard, ed. by Herbert C. Purnell, Jr. Ithaca, NY: Southeast Asia Program, Cornell University, 1968. [BOX 38]


[YAQUI] Yoeme-English English-Yoeme Standard Dictionary: a Language of the Yaqui Tribe in the American Southwest and Northern Mexico, with a comprehensive Grammar of Yoeme Language, by David L. Shaul. New York: Hippocrene Books, 1999. [BOX 28]


[YAY: see NHANG]


[YAZGHULAMI: see also INDO-IRANIAN FRONTIER LANGUAGES] IAzguliamsko-russkii slovar, D[zhoi] I[osifovna] Edelman. Moscow: "Nauka", 1971. [BOX 48]


[YIDINY] Words of Our Country: Stories, Place Names and Vocabulary in Yidiny, the Aboriginal Language of the Cainrs-Yarrabah Region, compiled and edited by R[obert] M. W. Dixon. St. Lucia, Qld., Australia : University of Queensland Press; 1991. [BOX 27]


[YOMBE] Mayombsch Idioticon. [Deel I. A tot en met Mup'esukila.] Deel II. Mup'ioka tot einde. Met twee kaarten, 2 vols., by Leo Bittremieux. Ghent: Drukkerij "Erasmus," 1922 [wrappers dated 1923]. [BOX 67]


[YORUBA: see also HAUSA] Grammar and Dictionary of the Yoruba Language with an introductory description of the country and people of Yoruba, by Rev. T.J. Bowen. Washington, D.C.: Smithsonian Institution, 1858. [BOX 32]

Dictionary of Modern Yoruba, by R[oy] C[live] Abraham. London: University of London Press, 1958. [BOX 9]

Atúmò ede Yoruba: A Short Yoruba Grammar and Dictionary, by Isaac O. Delano. London: Oxford University Press, 1958. [BOX 64]

A Dictionary of the Yoruba Language. London: Oxford University Press, 1961. Seventh impression. [BOX 64]

Yoruba Numerals, by Robert G. Armstrong. London: Published for the Nigerian Institute of Social and Economic Research by the Oxford University Press, 1962. [BOX 71]


[YUGARABUL: see KABI]


[YUGUMBIR: see BANJALANG; see also KABI]


[YUKAGIR] Jukagirskii Jazyk, by E. A. Krejnovic. Moscow: Akademii Nauk SSSR, 1958. [BOX 7]


[YUKI] Yuki Vocabulary, by Jesse O. Sawyer and Alice Schlichter. Original wrappers. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1984. [BOX 36]


[YULU] Brief grammar outlines of the Yulu and Kara languages (Bahr el Ghazal, Sudan - Central African Republic) with a small comparative vocabulary of Bongo, Baka, Yulu [and] Kara, by Stefano Santandrea. Rome: Printed by the Sodality of St. Peter Claver, 1970. Vocabulary reprinted from separate 1963 publication. [BOX 54]


[YUMAN LANGUAGES: see COCOPA, HAVASUPAI, KILIWA, MARICOPA]


[YUPIK, CENTRAL ] Grammar and Vocabulary of the Eskimo Language as spoken by the Kuskokwim and Southwest Coast Eskimos of Alaska, by John Hinz. Bethlehem, Pennsylvania: The Society for Propagating the Gospel, The Moravian Church, 1944. Also a second copy, second printing 1955. [BOX 15]

Yup'ik Eskimo Dictionary, compiled by Steven A. Jacobson. N.p: Alaska Native Language Center, University of Alaska, 1984. [BOX 69]


[YUPIK, CENTRAL SIBERIAN: see INUKTITUT, NORTH ALASKAN]


[YURAK: see NENETS]


[ZANDE] Vocabulaire Français-Azande et Azande-Français, based on information furnished by Block, Bolle, et al. Bruxelles: Imprimerie Veuve Monnom, 1912. [BOX 1]

La Langue des Azande: Volume III. Dictionnaire Zande-Français, by C.R. Lagae & V.H. Vanden Plas. Ghent: Editions Dominicaines "Veritas," 1925. [BOX 62]

Zande and English Dictionary, compiled by Rev. Canon Gore & Mrs. E.C. Gore. London: Sheldon Press, 1931. [BOX 56]

Revised [second] edition: Zande and English Dictionary, compiled by Rev. Canon Gore & Mrs. E.C. Gore, revised edition by H.C. Bullen. London: Sheldon Press, 1952. [BOX 65]


[ZAPOTECA] Vocabviario en langva capoteca, hecho y recopilado por el mvy r verendo padre fray Juan de Cordoua, de la orden de los predicadores, que reside en esta nueua españa. Mexico: Pedro Charte & Antonio Ricardo, 1578 [facsimile edition: Mexico City: Ediciones Toledo, 1987]. [BOX 53]


[ZAPOTECO, EASTERN POCHUTLA: see ZAPOTECTO, WESTERN POCHUTLA]


[ZAPOTECO, MITLA] Diccionario zapoteco de Mitla, Oaxaca, by Morris Stubblefield & Carol Miller de Stubblefield. Mexico, D.F.: Instituto Linguistico de Verano, 1991. [BOX 25]


[ZAPOTECO, SAN BARTOLOMÉ ZOOGOCHO] Diccionario Zapoteco de Zoogocho Oaxaca, by Rebecca Long C. & Sofronio Cruz M. Mexico, D.F.: Instituto Linguistico de Verano, 1999. [BOX 25]


[ZAPOTECO, SIERRA DE JUAREZ] Diccionario Zapoteco de Juarez: Zapoteco-Espanol. Espanol-Zapoteco. Ca titsa' qui' ri'u, by Neil Nellis & Jane Goodner de Nellis. Mexico: Publicado por el Instituto Linguistico de Verano, 1983. [BOX 25]


[ZAPOTECO, WESTERN POCHUTLA] "El Dialecto Mexicano de Pochutla, Oaxaca," by Franz Boas, in: International Journal of American Linguistics, Vol. 1, No. 1 (July 1917), pp. 9-44. [BOX 35]


[ZAPOTECO, YATZACHI] Diccionario Zapoteco de Yatzachi el Bajo, Yatzachi el Alto, Oaxaca, by Inez M. Butler H[aworth]. Tucson, AZ: Instituto Lingüístico de Verano, 1997. [BOX 40]


[ZEBAKI DIALECT: see INDO-IRANIAN FRONTIER LANGUAGES]


[ZHANG-ZHUNG] The Zhang-Zhung Language. A Grammar and Dictionary of the Unexplored Language of the Tibetan Bonpos, by Erik Haarh. Copenhagen; Arhus: Ein Munksgaard; Universitetsforlaget, 1968. [BOX 3]


[ZHUANG, SOUTHERN] William J. Gedney's The Tai Dialect of Lungming: Glossaries, Texts, and Translations, edited by Thomas John Hudak. Ann Arbor, Michigan: The University of Michigan, Center for South and Southeast Asian Studies, 1991. [BOX 4]


[ZOQUE] Diccionario Zoque de Copainalá, by Roy & Margaret Harrison & Castulo Garcia H. Mexico, D.F.: Instituto Linguistico de Verano, 1981. [BOX 25]

Vocabulario zoque de Rayon, by Roy Harrison & Margaret B. de Harrison. Mexico, D.F.: Instituto Linguistico de Verano, 1984. [BOX 25]

Diccionario zoque de Francisco Leon, by Ralph Engel & Mary Allhiser de Engel. Mexico, D.F.: Instituto Linguistico de Verano, 1987. [BOX 25]


[ZULU] The Zulu companion, offered to the Natal colonist, to facilitate his intercourse with the natives, by C. W. Posselt. Pietermaritzburg: D. D. Buchanan, 1850. [BOX 55]

ALSO: An English-Kafir dictionary of the Zulu-Kafir language, as spoken by the tribes of the colony of Natal, by James Perrin. Pietermaritzburg: Printed by May & Davis, 1855. 11/11/98. £200 (= $330). Christison Rare Books. [BOX 18]

New and revised edition, 1917: Perrins' English-Zulu dictionary,. Natal: P. Davis & Sons, 1917. [BOX 18]

A Zulu-Kafir Dictionary etymologically explained, with Copious Illustrations and Examples, preceded by An Introduction to the Zulu-Kafir Language, by Rev. J.L. Döhne. Cape Town: G. J. Pike's Printing Office, 1857. [BOX 62]

Zulu-English Dictionary, by John W[illiam] Colenso [1814-1888]. Pietermaritzburg: P. Davis, 1861. [BOX 24]

Fourth edition, 1905: Zulu-English Dictionaryby J[ohn] W[illiam] Colenso [1814-1883]. Fourth Authorised Edition. Revised and Enlarged. Cover title: Colenso's Zulu-English Dictionary. Fourth Edition. Natal: Vause, Slatter & Co., 1905. [BOX 24]

An easy Zulu Vocabulary and Phrase Book with Grammatical Notes, by Samuel Gibbs. Natal: P. Davis and Sons, 1892. [BOX 72]

Enlarged edition, 1902: An easy Zulu Vocabulary and Phrase Book with Grammatical Notes, by Samuel Gibbs, with additions and amendments by R. C. O Samuelson. Natal: P. Davis and Sons, 1902 [cover date: 1903]. [BOX 55]

A First Kafir Course, by C. J. Crawshaw. Cape Town: J. C. Juta, 1897. [BOX 65]

A Zulu manual, or vade-mecum, being a companion volume to "The Zulu-Kafir language," and the "English-Zulu dictionary," by Charles Roberts [1836-1901]. London: Kegan Paul, Trench, Trübner & Co. Ltd., 1900. [BOX 13]

Three native accounts of the visit of the Bishop of Natal in September and October, 1859, to Umpande, King of the Zulus; with explanatory notes and a literal translation, and a glossary of all the Zulu words employed in the same: designed for the use of students of the Zulu language. Third edition., [by John William Colenso]. Pietermaritzburg; Durban:Vause, Slatter & Co., 1901. [BOX 67]

A Zulu-English dictionary with notes on pronunciation a revised orthography and derivations and cognate words from many languages; including also a vocabulary of Hlonipa words, tribal- names, etc., a synopsis of Zulu grammar and a concise history of the Zulu people from the most ancient times, by Alfred T. Bryant. Pinetown, Natal: The Mariannhill Mission Press, 1905. [BOX 35]

An English-Zulu dictionary, with the principles of pronunciation and classification fully explained, by Charles Roberts. London: Kegan Paul, Trench, Trübner and Co., 1915. Second edition, sixth impression. [BOX 55]

Incwadi yesisngisi nesizulu. Zulu without a grammar, by conversational exercises. For housekeepers, farmers, overseers, storekeepers, doctors, police, and all such as come into frequent contact with natives, by A[lfred] T. Bryant. Maritzburg; Durban: P. Davis & Sons, [ca. 1917]. Third edition. [BOX 57]

An abridged English-Zulu word-book. Incwadi yabantu yamazwi esingisi ecasiselwe ngesizulu, by A[lfred] T. Bryant. [Mariannhill, South Africa]: Mariannhill Mission Press. [ca. 1917]. [BOX 17]

A Concise English-Kafir Dictionary, by J. McLaren. London: Longmans, Green and Co., 1923. [BOX 64]

Zulu references for interpreters and students, by Carl Faye. With 5 portraits and a map. Pietermaritzburg: City Printing Works, Limited, 1923. [BOX 32]

Zulu-English Dictionary, compiled by C[lement] M[artin] Doke & B[enedict] W[allet] Vilakazi. Johannesburg: Witwatersrand University Press, 1948. [BOX 40]

English and Zulu Dictionary, compiled by C. M. Doke, D. McK. Malcolm, & J. M. A. Sikakana. Johannesburg: Witwatersrand University Press, 1958. [BOX 64]


[ZUNI] Zuni dictionary, by Stanley [Stewart] Newman [1905- ].[Bloomington, IN: Indiana University Research Center in Anthropology, Folklore, and Linguistics, 1958. [BOX 32]